Home

SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G CPU## Programmable Controllers

1. D 81 6 to 89 0 mm 116 Installation Section 5 2 Unit Dimensions CJ series CPU Unit CPU Unit End Cover SYSMAC RUN o CJIG CPU44 ERR ALMa PROGRAMMABLE ppp o OR COMM o MMABLI ROLLER Y 27 je A5 la 62 B i 14 7 Unit Depth lo 65 gt ee 73 9 gt The depth is the same for all Units 117 Installation Section 5 2 CJ series Power Supply Unit PA205R CJ POWER 65 81 6 lt E CJ1W IC101 I O Control Unit CJ1W 11101 I O Interface Unit 118 Installation Section 5 2 CJ series Basic I O Units 8 16 point Basic I O Units 32 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID211 16 pt input Fujitsu compatible Connector CJ1W OD 211 16 pt sinking output CJ1W ID231 32 pt input CJ1W OD212 16 pt sourcing output CJ1W OD231 32 pt output
2. SEND 090 RECV 098 CE CMND 490 Host Link 4 Controller Link E FINS Network Host Link FINS terminator FINS Host Link header S Host Link Bridge Eidmer RECITEN E CMND 490 5 _ x flea Controller Link Network Controller Link Network Gateway FINS Factory Interface Network Service messages are commands and responses that are used as a message service in an OMRON Network FINS messages enable the user to control operations such as sending and receiv ing data and changing operating modes when necessary The features of FINS messages are as follows Flexible Communications FINS messages are defined in the application layer and do not rely on the physical layer data link layer or other lower level layers This enables flexible communications on the CPU bus and different types of networks Basically communications with Ethernet Controller Link or Host Link Networks and between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units is possible via the CPU bus Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 CPU Bus Unit Ethernet FINS TCP IP Host Link FINS x FINS Controller
3. 5 2 2 Installation in a Control Panel A CJ series PC must be mounted inside a control panel on DIN Track Nor mally the CPU Rack is installed on top and the Expansion Racks under it Note ACJ series PC must be mounted on DIN Track It cannot be mounted with Screws DIN Track p o m 8 Ae v wy SZ AZ SZ Consider the width of wiring ducts wiring ventilation and Unit replace ment when determining the space between Racks Up to 3 Expansion Racks can be connected Each I O Connecting Cable can be up to 12 m long but the sum total of all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks must be 12 m or less Whenever possible route I O wiring through wiring ducts or raceways Install the duct so that it is easy to fish wire from the I O Units through the duct It is handy to have the duct at the same height as the Racks 112 Installation Section 5 2 Duct i 20 mm min Unit DIN Track T 20 mm min Duct Wiring Ducts The following example shows the proper installation of wiring duct 81 6 to 89 mm Mounting bracket Duct Expansion Rack Note Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques Terminal Screws M3 5 0 8N m M3 0 5N m Cable Connector Screws M2 6 0 2N m 113 Installation Routing Wiring Ducts Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm
4. FINS Commands Host Link FINS m Host Link terminator Host Link header Note In Host Link mode FINS commands contained between a header and termi nator can be sent from the host computer to any PC on the Network Commu nications are possible with PCs on the same or different types of interconnected Networks up to two levels away three levels including the local level but not including the Host Link connection Host Link terminator Host Link header Controller Link Network or Ethernet Ethernet Controller Link Network Gateway 49 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 Communications from Host Computer FINS Host Link header Note FINS Messages 50 SEND 090 Sends data to the Host computer RECV 098 Receives data from the Host computer CMND 490 Executes a specified FINS command SEND RECV CMND ig ae Host Link terminator In Host Link mode FINS commands contained between a header and termi nator can be sent from the host computer to any PC on the Network Commu nications are possible with PCs on the same or different types of interconnected Networks up to two levels away three levels including the local level but not including the Host Link connection
5. Network 3 oe See Poon eee Network 1 Network 2 Seamless message communications are possible across Ethernet Controller Link and DeviceNet networks enabling easy information integration on machine machine to machine and machine to host levels Note NT Link communications between an NT31 NT631 V2 PT and a CJ series PC are now possible at high speed 1 2 2 Versatile Functions Memory Card and File Management Functions Transfer Data to and from Memory Cards Convert EM Area Banks to File Memory Automatic File Transfer at Start up 1 0 Memory Files in CSV and Text Format File Operations Format Delete etc from Ladder Programs Program Replacement During Operation Data area data program data and PC Setup data can be transferred as files between the Memory Card compact flash memory and a Programming Device program instructions a host computer or via FINS commands Mem ory Cards are available with capacities 8 15 30 and 48 Mbytes l O Memory program and parameter areas stored as files Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory to provide file manage ment capabilities without a Memory Card and with much faster access time than a Memory Card The EM Area can be very useful for storing data such as trend data as files The PC can be set up to transfer the program and or PC Setup files from the Memory Card w
6. When wiring pay careful attention to the polarity The load may operate if the polarity is reversed Although the V and COM terminals of rows A and B are internally connected wire all points completely CJ1W OD261 Transistor Output Unit Fujitsu Connectors 64 Points Sinking Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 10 2 to 26 4 V DC Maximum Load Current 0 3 A point 1 6 A common 6 4 A Unit Maximum Inrush Current 3 0 A point 10 ms max Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 1 5 V max ON Response Time 0 5 ms max 310 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A OFF Response Time 1 0 ms max Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between the external terminals and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max No of Circuits 64 16 points common 4 circuits Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 170 mA max Fuse None External Power Supply 10 2 to 26 4 V DC 50 mA min Weight 110 g max Accessories None Circuit Configuration z Internal circuits CN1 ouT15 B COMI COMI hE de OUTOO a Terminal Connections I O word m 1 ar 12 to 24 VDC 1 0 word m I O word m2 V to fA OUT15
7. 332 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim foes z after startup ing ags set Words Bits mode tings change A40113 Duplication Error Flag Fatal error ON in the following cases Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number Two Special I O Units have been assigned the same unit number Two Basic I O Units have been allocated the same data area words CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The duplicated unit number is indi cated in A409 to A416 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Duplication error 0 No duplica tion Cleared Cleared A410 to A416 A40114 I O Bus Error Flag Fatal error ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot or when the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The slot number 00 to 09 where the O Bus Error occurred is written to A40400 to A40407 in binary and the rack number 00 to 03 is written to A40408 to A40415 in binary When the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack OE Hex will be stored in both locations This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error Cleared
8. Maintaining the status of all outputs on Output Units when PC operation stops hot start Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit A50012 Programming Manual W394 6 4 2 Load OFF Func tions 6 4 1 Hot Start Hot Stop Func tions Controlling I O Memory Maintaining the previous contents of all O Memory at the start of PC operation hot start Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit A50012 Maintaining the previous contents of all I O Memory when the PC is turned on Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit A50012 and set the PC Setup to maintain the status of the IOM Hold Bit at start up IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup Programming Manual W394 6 4 1 Hot Start Hot Stop Func tions 15 Function Tables Section 1 3 File Memory Purpose Automatically transferring the program I O Memory and PC Setup from the Memory Card when the PC is turned on Function Enable the automatic transfer at start up function by turning ON pin 2 of the CPU Unit s DIP switch and cre ate an AUTOEXEC file Creating a library of pro grams for different pro gram arrangements Memory Card functions Program Files Creating a library of param eter settings for various PC Racks and models Memory Card functions Parameter Files Creating a library of data files with settings for vari ous PC Racks and CPU Bus Units Memory Card functions Data Files Storing I O Comment data with
9. Basic I O Unit Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us O REFRESH 1 word refresh IN 1 word refresh OUT 60 word refresh IN 60 word refresh OUT 7 SEGMENT DECODER INTELLIGENT I O READ INTELLIGENT I O WRITE Serial Communications When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length Instructions column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us PROTOCOL Sending 0 words receiving 0 words MACRO Sending 249 words receiving 249 words TRANSMIT Sending 1 byte Sending 256 bytes 262 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us RECEIVE Storing 1 byte Storing 256 bytes CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP Network Instructions Instruction NETWORK SEND When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Mnemonic Length steps execution See note t ON Conditions ime us OFF execution time us NETWORK
10. CJ series Power Supply Unit CJ1W PA205R 100 to 240 V AC with RUN output Output capacity 5 A at 5 V DC Memory Cards HMC EF861 Flash memory 8 MB HMC EF171 Flash memory 15 MB HMC EF371 Flash memory 30 MB HMC EF571 Flash memory 48 MB HMC AP001 Memory Card Adapter I O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 Required to connect an Expansion Rack Must be connected next to the CPU Unit Connect to the I O Interface Unit CJ1W 1I101 on the first Expansion Rack with a CS CJ series I O Connecting Cable End Cover CJ1W TERO1 Must be connected to the right end of the CPU Rack One End Cover is provided with the CPU Unit and with an I O Interface Unit A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected DIN Track PFP 50N Track length 50 cm height 7 3 mm PFP 100N Track length 1 m height 7 3 mm PFP 100N2 Track length 1 m height 16 mm PFP M Stopper to prevent Units from moving on the track Two each are provided with the CPU Unit and with an I O Interface Unit Programming Consoles CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PRO01 E C200H PRO27 E An English Keyboard Sheet CS1W KS001 E is required Programming Console Keyboard Sheet CS1W KS001 E For CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO01 E or C200H PRO27 E Programming Console Connecting Cables CS1W CN114 Connects the CQM1 PROO1 E Programming Console Length 0 05 m CS1W CN224
11. Error code When a non fatal error user defined FALS 006 or system error or a fatal error user defined FALS 007 or system error occurs the 4 digit hexadecimal error code is written to this word When two or more errors occur simultaneously the highest error code will be recorded Refer to page 347 for details on error codes Error code Cleared Cleared Written when error occurs 331 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim Related Words Bits giar startup ing bas ea change A40106 FALS Error ON when a non fatal error is gener 1 FALS 006 Cleared Cleared Written Flag ated by the FALS 006 instruction executed when The CPU Unit will continue operating o error Fatal error and the ERR ALM indicator will flash oot 2 ood occurs The corresponding error code will be written to A400 Error codes C101 to C2FF correspond to FALS numbers 001 to 511 This flag will be turned OFF when the FALS errors are cleared A40108 Cycle Time ON if the cycle time exceeds the 0 Cycle time Written PC Setup Too Long maximum cycle time set in the PC under max when the Cycle Flag Setup the cycle time monitoring 1 Cycle time cycle time time moni Fatal error time CPU Unit operation will stop over max exceeds toring and the ERR ALM indicator on the max time front of the CPU Unit will light This flag will
12. AC Input Supply 100 to 240 V AC allowable 85 to 264 V AC Voltage selection is not required LG Ground to a resistance of 100 Q or less to increase noise resistance and avoid electric shock GR Ground to a resistance of 100 Q or less to avoid electric shock RUN Output The internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating RUN or MON ITOR mode 83 I O Control Units and I O Interface Units Section 3 5 3 4 3 Dimensions PA205R CJ POWER s i 65 Ls 81 6 m 80 3 4 4 Power Supply Confirmation Condition 1 Current Requirements Condition 2 Power Requirements After determining what power supply voltage is required calculate the current and power requirements for each Rack There are two voltage groups for internal power consumption 5 V DC and 24 V DC Current Consumption at 5 V DC Internal Logic Power Supply The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units including the CPU Unit that use 5 V DC power Power Supply Unit Maximum current at 5 V DC CJIW PAZ0SR Current Consumption at 24 V DC Relay Driving Power Supply The following table shows the current that can be supplied
13. PC Setup Section 7 1 Item Address in Settings Function Related New Programming flags and setting s Console words effective Word Bit s ness Minimum Cycle Time 0001 to 7D00 1 to 32 000 ms 1 ms units Default 0000 No minimum Set to 0001 to 7D00 to specify a minimum cycle time If the cycle time is less than this setting it will be extended until this time passes Leave this setting at 0000 for a variable cycle time Can t be changed during opera tion Takes effect at the start of opera tion Enable Watch Cycle Time Setting Watch Cycle Time Setting 0 Default 1 Bits O to 14 Default 0 Set to 1 to enable the Watch Cycle Time Setting in bits 0 to 14 Leave this setting at 0 for a maxi mum cycle time of 1 s A40108 Cycle Time Too Long Flag 001 to FAO 10 to 40 000 ms 10 ms units Default 001 1 S This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 209 is set to 1 The Cycle Time Too Long Flag A40108 will be turned ON if the cycle time exceeds this setting A264 and A265 Present Cycle Time Takes effect at the start of opera tion Can t be changed during opera tion Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time Enable Fixed Servicing Time Fixed Servicing Time 0 Default 1 Bits 0 to 7 Default 0 Set to 1 to enable the fixed peripheral servicing time in bits O to 7 Default 496 of the cycle time 00 to FF 0 0 to 25 5 ms 0
14. 5 3 4 Connecting I O Devices Input Devices Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input devices DC Input Units The following types of DC input devices can be connected 136 Wiring Section 5 3 Contact output Sensor Power O COM Supply Sensor Power Supply O IN DC Input Unit 1 9 COMO Current regulator P ower 0v Supply Sensor Power COM Sensor Power Supply 137 Wiring Section 5 3 The circuit below should NOT be used for I O devices having a voltage output Voltage output Sensor QO COMO EE Erg Precautions when When using a two wire sensor with a 12 V DC or 24 V DC input device check Connecting a Two wire DC that the following conditions have been met Failure to meet these conditions Sensor may result in operating errors 1 2 3 1 Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and the sensor residual volt age Von Veco Vn 2 Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and sensor control output load current lout min lt lon lt lout max lon Vcc Vg 1 5 PC internal residual voltage Ryy When loy is smaller than lour min connect a bleeder resistor R The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows R Vcc Vg lour min lon Power W 2 Vcc Vg 7 R x 4 allowable margin 3 Relation between current when the PC is OFF and sensor leakage curre
15. DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINARY BINARY TO BCD DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD 2 S COMPLE MENT To a word after converting to a con stant To indirect IR after converting to indirect IR DOUBLE 2 S COMPLEMENT To a word after converting to a con stant To indirect IR after converting to indirect IR 16 BIT TO 32 BIT SIGNED BINARY To a word after expanding from a constant To indirect IR after expanding from indirect IR DATA DECODER Decoding 1 digit 4 to 16 Decoding 4 digits 4 to 16 Decoding 1 digit 8 to 256 Decoding 2 digits 8 to 256 DATA ENCODER Encoding 1 digit 16 to 4 Encoding 4 digits 16 to 4 Encoding 1 digit 256 to 8 Encoding 2 digits 256 to 8 ASCII CONVERT Converting 1 digit into ASCII Converting 4 digits into ASCII ASCII TO HEX Converting 1 digit COLUMN TO LINE LINE TO COL UMN 258 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction SIGNED BCD TO BINARY Mnemonic Code Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No OFF execution time us DOUBLE SIGNED BCD TO BINARY Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format s
16. Default The user program is automatically trans ferred from the Memory Card when power is turned ON The user program is not automatically trans ferred from the Memory Card when power is turned ON Used to store the programs in the Memory Card to switch operations or to automatically transfer programs at power up Memory Card ROM operation Note When pin 7 is ON and pin 8 is OFF easy backup reading from the Memory Card is given priority so even if pin 2 is ON the user program is not automati cally transferred from the Memory Card when power is turned ON Not used Peripheral port communications parameters set in the PC Setup are used Peripheral port communications parameters set using Programming Console or CX Pro grammer Peripheral bus only are used Turn ON to use the peripheral port for a device other than Programming Console or CX Programmer Peripheral bus only RS 232C port communications parameters set using a CX Programmer Peripheral bus only are used RS 232C port communications parameters set in the PC Setup are used Turn ON to use the RS 232C port for a Pro gramming Device User defined pin Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 User defined pin Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 Set pin 6 to ON or OFF and use A39512 in the program to create a user defined condi tion without using an I O Unit Writing from the CPU Unit
17. G7TC IA16 Type Input Block Input voltage output type Input 24 V DC Output Relay connection 1 Connecting Cable and 2 I O Terminals Input 100 200 V AC Output Relay 32 point Transistor Output Unit G70D SOC16 1 Output Block Input 24 V DC Output Relay G70A ZOC16 4 Relays Relay Terminal Socket NPN Relays 91 SECTION 4 Operating Procedures This section outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CJ series PC system 4 Introduction a a cece een eet hh hn 94 4 2 JBxamples ieed ib Sebi eR ERES oh ae ee eE eR ia 96 93 Introduction 4 1 94 Introduction 1 2 3 Section 4 1 The following procedure outlines the recommended steps to follow when pre paring CJ series PCs for operation 1 Installation Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required Connect the CPU Unit Power Supply Unit I O Units and End Cover In stall a Memory Card if required See 5 2 Installation for details Wiring Connect the power supply wiring I O wiring and Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Console Connect communications wiring as required See 5 3 Wiring for details on power supply and I O wiring See 2 3 Basic System Configuration for details on connecting Program ming Devices Initial Settings Hardware Set the DIP switches and Rotary switches on the CPU Unit and other Unit
18. RS 232C port RS 232C Note The maximum cable length for an RS 232C connection is 15 m RS 232C communications specifica tions however do not cover transmissions at 19 2 Kbps Refer to documentation of the device being connected when using this baud rate IBM PC AT or Compatible Computer CPU Unit Computer Signal Pin Pin Signal name No No name FG 1 1 CD SD 2 2 RD neee ao s 1 Ts sp edes RS 4 4 ER cs 5 5 SG 5V 6 6 DR DR 7 7 RS ER 8 8 CS SG 9 9 CI D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin connector male connector male 365 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E 1 N Connections via RS 232C Port RS 232C RS 422A 485 NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 E terminating resistance ON 5 V RS 232C power required Terminating resistance ON RS 232C RS 232C ports Personal Computer Shield NT ALOO1 E Link Adapter
19. 0 Not initializ ing 1 Initializing Reset to 0 automatically after initializa tion Retained Written during ini tialization AS50100 to AS50115 A33000 to A33515 Special I O Unit Initializ ing Flags These flags are ON while the corre sponding Special I O Unit is initializ ing after its Special I O Unit Restart Bit A50200 to A50715 is turned from OFF to ON or the power is turned ON The bits in these words correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95 as follows A33000 to A33015 Units 0 to 15 A33100 to A33115 Units 16 to 31 A33500 to A33515 Units 80 to 95 Use these flags in the program to prevent the Special I O Unit s refresh data from being used while the Unit is initializing Also IORF 097 cannot be executed while a Special I O Unit is initializing These bits are turned OFF automati cally when initialization is completed 0 Not initializ ing 1 Initializing Reset to 0 automatically after initializa tion Retained Cleared AS50200 to AS50715 326 Maximum Differentia tion Flag Number These words contain the maximum value of the differentiation flag num bers being used by differentiation instructions See Function column Cleared Written at the start of opera tion A29513 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim P ise z after startup ing ags set Words Bits mod
20. Change the indicated setting to a valid setting 283 Error Processing Section 11 2 Error Program Error Flag and Probable cause Possible remedy ming code in word data Console A400 display CPU Bus Unit error A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A417 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags An error occurred in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit The corresponding flag in A417 is turned ON to indi cate the problem Unit Bits A41700 to A41715 corre spond to unit numbers 0 to F Check the Unit indicated in A417 Refer to the Unit s operation manual to find and correct the cause of the error Restart the Unit by toggling its Restart Bit or turn the power OFF and ON again Replace the Unit if it won t restart Special I O Unit error SIOU ERR A40206 Special I O Unit Error Flag A418 to A423 Spe cial I O Unit Error Unit Number Flags An error occurred in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a Special I O Unit The corresponding flag in A418 to A423 is turned ON to indicate the problem Unit Bits A41800 to A42315 cor respond to unit numbers 0 to 95 Check the Unit indicated in A418 to A423 Refer to the Unit s operation man ual to find and correct the cause of the error Restart the Unit by toggling its Restart Bit or turn the power OFF and ON again Replace the Unit if it won t restart Battery error A40204 Battery Error Flag T
21. Counter PVs C Retained Retained Retained Retained Task Flags TK Cleared Cleared Retained Retained Index Registers IR Retained Retained Cleared Retained Data Registers DR Retained Retained Cleared Retained Content after Mode Change or Power Interruption I O Area Mode Changed PC Power OFF to ON IOM Hold Bit Cleared IOM Hold Bit Held Data Link Area CPU Bus Unit Area Special I O Unit Area DeviceNet Area Internal I O Area IOM Hold Bit OFF Cleared IOM Hold Bit ON Retained IOM Hold Bit OFF Cleared IOM Hold Bit ON Cleared IOM Hold Bit OFF Cleared IOM Hold Bit ON Retained Work Area W Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained Holding Area H Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Auxiliary Area A Status varies from address to address Data Memory Area D Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Extended Data Memory Area E Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Timer Completion Flags T Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained Timer PVs T Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained Counter Completion Flags C Retained Retained Retained Re
22. Power Power f Forced bit status OFF O ON Forced bit status Mode switch Retained Power en Retained Forced Status Forced Status Retained when Hold Bit 1 ON Hold Bit 0 OFF power is turned ON Startup Mode Setting This setting determines whether the startup mode will be the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch or the mode set here in the PC Setup Note If this setting specifies the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch 0 but a Programming Console isn t connected the CPU Unit will automatically enter RUN mode at startup This differs from the default opera tion for CS series CPU Units PRCN Programming Console s mode switch Mode switch setting RUN mode when disconnected Rz Power ON Power ON Other PC Setup s Startup Mode setting PRG PROGRAM mode MON MONITOR mode RUN RUN mode Power ON Detect Low Battery This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected If this Setting is set to detect errors 0 and a battery error is detected the Battery Error Flag 440204 will be turned ON 158 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Detect Interrupt Task Error Note EM File Memory Settings Peripheral Port Settings Note A battery error will be detected when the battery is disconnected or its voltage drops below the minimum allowed ia Disconnectedor Battery Error Flag voltage to
23. Serial Communications CJ1W SCUA41 Serial Communications Unit Unit Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Unit DeviceNet Unit CJ1W DRM21 Registration not possible Note The DeviceNet Unit is not only compatible with versions 2 0 and earlier ver sions of CX Programmer and so it cannot be registered in the I O table Cre ate an I O table online 59 SECTION 3 Nomenclature Functions and Dimensions This section provides the names of components and their functions for various Units The Unit dimensions are also provided 3s CPU Units nr hha eet do eec Hele ae Gee ERES AER 62 Sale Models 21 cec RC eC t ep e x s 62 3 1I 2 Component i e ub eR Reb ER Coe ned bee eens 62 3 1 3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map sese esee 65 3 1 4 Dimensions cemere ete RR RD Dee des 66 3 2 Pile Memory 5 ee tUe Eee EUR CERA CR HR RES 67 3 2 1 Files Handled by CPU Unit 0 04 67 3 2 2 Initializing File Memory 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 69 3 2 3 Using File Memory 0 0 00 eee eee eee 69 3 2 4 Memory Card Dimensions 00 00 0002 eee 71 3 2 5 Installing and Removing the Memory Card 71 3 3 Programming Devices 00 0 cece eee eee eee 74 3 3 1 Programming Consoles 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 75 3 3 25 CX Programmer peek ge Rec ROC aap Ea e TI 3 3 3 Peripheral Port Specifications 00 00 00 eee 80 3 3 4 RS
24. Transferring 255 bits BLOCK TRANSFER Transferring 1 word Transferring 1 000 words BLOCK SET Setting 1 word Setting 1 000 words DATA EXCHANGE Word to word Indirect IR to indirect IR DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE Word to word Indirect IR to indirect IR SINGLE WORD DIS TRIBUTE DATA COL LECT MOVE TO REGISTER 254 Word to IR Indirect IR to IR Section 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Mnemonic Code ON Instruction MOVE TIMER COUNTER PV TO REGIS TER MOVRW Data Shift Instructions Instruction SHIFT REGISTER Mnemonic Length steps See note execution time us Conditions Word to IR OFF execution time us Indirect IR to IR When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Resetting OFF execution time us Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words ASYNCHRO NOUS SHIFT REGISTER Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words WORD SHIFT Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT Shifting words Shifting indirect IR DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT Shifting words Shifting indire
25. 0001 to 01FF 1 to 511 decimal 4101 to 42FF 0001 to 01FF 1 to 511 decimal C101 to C2FF FAL 006 FALS 007 When more than 20 errors occur the oldest error data in A195 to A199 is deleted and the newest record is stored in A100 to A104 Error Log Area Order of Error code occurrence A100 Error code 1 A101 Error contents A102 Minute second S A103 Day hour occurrence 2 A104 Year month A105 Error code A106 Error contents i A107 Minute second i A108 Day hour Time of i A109 Year month occurrence 20 A195 Error code A196 Error contents A197 Minute second om A198 Day hour occurrence A199 Year month A300 a Error Log Pointer error counter The Error Log Pointer can be reset by turning ON the Error Log Pointer Reset Bit A50014 effectively clearing the error log displays from the Programming Consoles or CX Programmer The contents of the Error Log Area will not be cleared by resetting the pointer Error Processing Section 11 2 11 2 Error Processing 11 2 1 Error Categories Errors in CJ series PCs can be broadly divided into the following three cate gories Category Result Indicators Comments RUN ERR ALM CPU Standby The CPU Unit will not start opera OFF OFF tion in RUN or MONITOR mode Non fatal Errors The CPU Unit will continue operat ON Flashing Other indicators will also operate including FAL 006 ing in RUN or MONITOR mode Green Red when a communications error has
26. 1 Installation 2 Wiring Section 4 2 Connect the Units When necessary install a Memory Card a AC100 240V INPUT Lan A HUN OUTPUT AC240V UC2av Make sure that the total power consumption of the Units is less than the max imum capacity of the Power Supply Unit Connect the power supply and I O wiring AC100 240 INPU ele RUI OUTPI C240 DG24 sm 0000 3 al e Li z Q 3 Initial Settings Hardware 96 Make necessary hardware settings such as the DIP switch settings on the CPU Unit In particular be sure that the settings for the peripheral port and RS 232C port are correct In the following example a Programming Console is connected to the periph eral port so pin 4 is turned OFF A Programming Device other than a Pro gramming Console is connected to the RS 232C port so pin 5 is turned ON Examples Section 4 2 Note When devi
27. 1 2 3 Memory Card in CSV or text format it is now possible to read the data using Windows applications by mounting a Memory Card in the personal computer card slot using a HMC AP001 Memory Card Adapter File name and extension Data transfer direction Program files doeet OBJ 1 Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit 2 Setthe following information Program File Name A654 to A657 and Pro gram Password A651 3 Next from the program turn ON the Replacement Start Bit A65015 Memory Card to CPU Unit Data transfer direction CPU Unit to Memory Card when backing up Memory Card to CPU Unit when restoring File File name and extension Program files BACKUP OBJ Data files BACKUP IOM BACKUPIO IOR BACKUPDM IOM BACKUPELI IOM BACKUPSTD Parameter files 1 Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit 2 Turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch 3 To back up data press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for three seconds To restore data turn ON the PC power The following files can be transferred between a Memory Card and the CX Programmer File name and extension Data transfer direction Symbols file SYMBOLS SYM Between CX Programmer and Comment file COMMENTS CNT Memory Card 1 Insert a formatted Memory Card into the CPU Unit 2 Place the CX Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to transfer the above files from the personal computer to the P
28. A195 A105 A196 A197 A198 A199 A110 Error record 20 A20110 Online Editing Wait Flag Wait amp 235 nline edit processing mo icona A20110 A50100 to A50115 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits and A30200 to A30215 CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flags Automatically turned OFF by system Example Unit No 1 V 50101 or at startup WA Unit initialized A301 Current EM Bank EM Area Current Bank If bank 2 is the current bank the E2 00100 can also be address simply as E00100 350 Auxiliary Area Appendix B A40109 Program Error Error Address UM Overflow Error Flag A29515 Illegal Instruction Flag A29514 Distribution Overflow Error Flag A29513 Task Error Flag A25912 No END 001 Error Flag A29511 Illegal Area Access Error Flag A29510 Indirect DM EM Addressing Error Flag A29509 Instruction Processing Error Flag ER A29508 Flag goes ON A42615 Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag Special I O Unit 10 ms max IORF 097 instruction Refreshed twice I O refresh 351 Appendix C Memory Map of PC Memory Addresses PC Memory Addresses PC memory addresses are set in Index Registers IROO to IR15 to indirectly address I O memory Normally use the MOVE TO REGISTER MOVR 560 and MOVE TIMER COUNTER PV TO REGISTER MOVRW 561 instructions to set PC memory addresses into the Index Registers Some instructions such as DATA SEARCH SRCH 181
29. A654 to A657 When program replacement starts the program file name will be stored in ASCII File names can be specified up to eight characters in length excluding the extension File names are stored in the following order A654 to A657 i e from the lowest word to the highest and from the highest byte to the lowest If a file name is less than eight characters the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining word will be filled with spaces 20 Hex Null characters and space characters cannot be used within file names Example File name is ABC OBJ Read only Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function Name Address Description Access Program Program Error Flag A40109 ON when program contents are incorrect CPU Unit Read only Error Fatal error operation will stop Information Program Error Task A294 Provides the type and number of the tack that was Read only being executed when program execution stops as a result of a program error Instruction Processing A29508 This flag and the Error Flag ER will be turned ON Read only Error Flag when an instruction processing error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruction error Indirect DM EM BCD Error A29509 This flag and the Access Error Flag AER will be Read only Flag turned ON when an indirect DM EM BCD error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect DM EM BCD error Illegal Access
30. CPU Unit Built in RAM Memory Parameter Area See Note 1 I O Memory Area Drive 1 EM file memory See Note 2 The battery life is 5 years at an ambient temperature of 25 C User program memory i Misiones E EE Ladder program Drive 0 Memory Card flash memory File memory Note 1 The Parameter Area stores system information for the CPU Unit such as the PC Setup An attempt to access the Parameter Area by an instruction will generate an illegal access error 2 Part of the EM Extended Data Memory Area can be converted to file memory to handle data files and program files in RAM memory format which has the same format as Memory Cards 65 CPU Units Section 3 1 Opening the Battery Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the bat Compartment Cover tery compartment cover and lift open the cover Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover Battery li CJ ces aai DIP switch J I ON olg a D e e vt jw e N oo Orient the battery as shown below Place the ca
31. Connects the CQM1 PRO27 E Programming Console Length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 Connects the CQM1 PRO27 E Programming Console Length 6 0 m Programming Device Connecting Cables for peripheral port 34 CS1W CN118 Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin receptacle For converting between RS 232C cable and peripherals Length 0 1 m CS1W CN226 Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 2 0 m CS1W CN626 Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 6 0 m Basic System Configuration Name Programming Device Connecting Cables for RS 232C port Model XW2Z 200S CV Section 2 3 Specifications Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 2 0 m Static resistant connector used XW2Z 500S CV Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 5 0 m Static resistant connector used XW2Z 200S V Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 2 0 m see note XW2Z 500S V Connects DOS computers D Sub 9 pin Length 5 0 m see note Battery Set CPM2A BAT01 Also used for CPM2A and CQM1H Cannot be used with CS series CPU Unit Note A peripheral bus connection is not possible when connecting the CX Pro grammer via an RS 232C Connecting Cable Use the Host Link SYSMAC WAY connection 35 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 Connecting Programming Devices CX Programmer or Programming Consoles When using a Programming Console connect the Programm
32. Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immedi ately after power has been turned OFF Doing so may result in electric shock Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a countermeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a counter measure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system When the 24 V DC output service power supply to the PC is overloaded or short circuited the voltage
33. FIND MAXIMUM MAX 182 and FIND MINIMUM MIN 183 output the results of processing to an Index Register to indicate an PC memory address There are also instructions for which Index Registers can be directly designated to use the PC memory addresses stored in them by other instructions These instructions include DOUBLE MOVE MOVL 498 some symbol comparison instructions L lt gt L L L L and gt L DOUBLE COMPARE CMPL 060 DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE XCGL 562 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY L 591 DOUBLE DECRE MENT BINARY L 593 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY L 401 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY L 411 SET RECORD LOCATION SETR 635 and GET RECORD LOCATION GETR 656 The PC memory addresses all are continuous and the user must be aware of the order and boundaries of the memory areas As reference the PC memory addresses are provided in a table at the end of this appendix Note Directly setting PC memory addresses in the program should be avoided whenever possible If PC memory addresses are set in the program the program will be less compatible with new CPU Unit mod els or CPU Units for which changed have been made to the layout of the memory Memory Configuration There are two classifications of the RAM memory with battery backup in a CJ series CPU Unit Parameter Areas These areas contain CPU Unit system setting data such as the PC Setup CJ series CPU Bus Unit Setups etc An
34. Fixed allocation setting 3 The following words are allocated to the master function even when the DeviceNet Unit is used as a slave Outputs CIO 3370 slave to master Inputs CIO 3270 master to slave Fixed allocation Outputs CIO 3570 slave to master setting 1 Fixed allocation setting 2 Fixed allocation setting 3 Inputs CIO 3470 master to slave Outputs CIO 3770 slave to master Inputs CIO 3670 master to slave The CIO Area can be used as work bits if the the bits are not used as shown here Section 2 1 Reference 9 3 I O Area 9 4 Data Link Area 2 5 3 Communications Network System Controller Link Unit Operation Manual W309 9 5 CPU Bus Unit Area Operation Manual for each CPU Bus Unit 9 6 Special I O Unit Area Operation Manual for each Special I O Unit DeviceNet Unit Opera tion Manual W380 Internal I O Area 4 800 300 words CIO 120000 to CIO 149915 words CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 37 504 2 344 words CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 words CIO 3800 to CIO 6143 These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to control program execution They cannot be used for external I O 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 23 Specifications Section 2 1 Item Work Area Specification 8 192 bits 512 words W00000 to W51115 W000 to W511 Controls the programs only I O from external I O termi
35. Read only RS 232C Port PT Com munications Flags A39300 to A39307 The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS 232C port is communicating with a PT in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 Read only RS 232C Port PT Priority Registered Flags A39308 to A39315 The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority when the RS 232C port is communicating in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 Read only RS 232C Port Reception Counter No protocol mode A39300 to A39315 Indicates in binary the number of bytes of data received when the RS 232C port is in no protocol mode Read only Serial Device Com munications Information Communications Units 0 to 15 Ports 1 to 4 Settings Change Bits A62001 to A63504 The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that port are being changed Bits 1 to 4 in A620 to A635 correspond to ports 1 to 4 in Communications Units 0 to 15 Read write Instruction related information 218 Step Flag A20012 ON for one cycle when step execution is started with STEP 008 Read only Current EM Bank A301 This word contains the current EM bank number in 4 digit hexadecimal Read only Maximum Differentiation Flag Number A339 to A340 These words contain the maximum value of the dif ferentiation flag numbers being used by differentia tion instructions Read only
36. The dielectric strength of the capacitor must be 200 to 300 V If the circuit is an AC circuit use a capacitor with no polarity The diode connected in parallel with the load changes energy accumulated by the coil into a current which then flows into the coil so that the current will be converted into Joule heat by the resistance of the inductive load This time lag between the moment the cir cuit is opened and the moment the load is reset caused by this method is longer than that caused by the CR method The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode must be at least 10 times as large as the circuit voltage value The forward current of the diode must be the same as or larger than the load current The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode may be two to three times larger than the supply voltage if the arc killer is applied to electronic circuits with low circuit voltages Diode method No Yes O E T Fp Power Eo supply Yes Yes Varistor method Inductive load The varistor method prevents the impo sition of high voltage between the con tacts by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor There is time lag between the moment the cir cuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the varistor in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to
37. occurred or the Output OFF Bit is ON Fatal Errors The CPU Unit will stop operating in OFF ON The indicators will all be OFF including FALS 007 RUN or MONITOR mode Red when there is a power interruption 11 2 2 Error Information There are basically four sources of information on errors that have occurred 1 2 3 The CPU Unit s indicators The Auxiliary Area Error Flags The Auxiliary Area Error Information Words The Auxiliary Area Error Code Word m CPU Unit Indicators D E Auxiliary Area Flags and Words EE PN ss UN r Error Flags Error Info r Error Code Word RUN Lit when the PC is in A400 RUN or MONITOR mode indicati Words providing L RUN TENE Flags indicating a O ERB ALM ERR ALM Flashing Non fatal error the type of error error informa 5 INH Lit Fatal error tion A4 i L L IPRPHL COM INH Lit when Output OFF Bit hee este has been turned ON PI See note EH PRPHL Lit when the CPU Unit is communicating through the peripheral port COMM Lit when the CPU Unit is communicating through iur ihe RS 232C port 2 A a Note When two or more errors occur at the same time the highest most serious error code will be stored in A400 Indicator Status and Error Conditions The following table shows the status of the CPU Units indicators for errors that have occurred in RUN or MONITOR mode
38. online editing effect on cycle time 247 Online Editing Flags 322 Online Editing Wait Flag 350 related flags bits 210 operating environment precautions Xvi operating modes description 240 effects of mode changes on counters 221 effects of mode changes on data areas 195 effects of mode changes on timers 220 operations allowed in each mode 240 operation checking 97 checking operation 94 CPU Unit 238 240 preparations 94 testing 95 101 output bits 199 output instructions execution times 251 Output OFF Bit 210 340 Output Units specifications 40 299 troubleshooting 292 Overflow Flag 232 overseeing processes 244 P Parameter Area 65 188 234 354 parts replacing parts 295 PC Setup 11 94 234 changing settings 100 coding sheets 355 error information 214 errors 283 overview 148 settings 149 PCs cooling 110 performance 3 Index peripheral devices See also Programming Devices peripheral port communications error 284 connecting a personal computer 37 related flags bits 218 331 settings 151 159 specifications 80 peripheral servicing 239 245 priority servicing 323 362 363 setting 154 163 Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 323 362 363 personal computer connecting 37 installing a Memory Card 74 ports See also peripheral port See also RS 232C port power consumption 55 Power Holding Time 269 power interruptions CPU operation for power interruptions 7
39. 2 Bit status controlled by multiple instruc tions Correct program so that each output bit is controlled by only one instruction 3 Faulty output circuit Replace Unit Output of a specific bit num ber does not turn ON indica tor lit 1 Faulty output device Replace output device 2 Break in output wiring Check output wiring 3 Loose terminal block screws Tighten screws Replace terminal block connector 5 Faulty output bit Replace relay or Unit 6 Faulty output circuit Replace Unit Output of a specific bit num ber does not turn OFF indi cator is not lit 1 Faulty output bit Replace relay or Unit 3 1 2 3 4 Faulty terminal block connector faulty 5 6 1 2 2 Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage current or residual voltage Replace external load or add dummy resis tor Output of a specific bit num ber does not turn OFF indi cator lit 1 Bit status controlled by multiple instruc tions Correct program 2 Faulty output circuit Replace Unit Output irregularly turns ON OFF 1 Low or unstable load voltage Adjust load voltage to within rated range 2 Bit status controlled by multiple instruc tions Correct program so that each output bit is controlled by only one instruction 3 Malfunction due to noise Protective measures against noise 1 Install surge sup
40. 9 18 Task Flags Programming Manual 4 2 3 Flags Related to Cyclic Tasks Specifications Section 2 1 Item Trace Memory Specification 4 000 words trace data 31 bits 6 words Reference Programming Manual 7 2 4 Tracing Data File Memory Function Specifications Constant cycle time Memory Cards Compact flash memory cards can be used MS DOS format EM file memory Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory MS DOS format OMRON Memory Cards with 8 MB 15 MB or 30 MB capacities can be used Specification 1 to 32 000 ms Unit 1 ms Programming Manual SECTION 5 File Mem ory Functions Reference 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time Programming Manual 6 1 1 Minimum Cycle Time Cycle time monitoring Possible Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long 10 to 40 000 ms Unit 10 ms 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time Programming Manual 6 1 2 Maximum Cycle Time Watch Cycle Time and 6 1 3 Cycle Time Monitoring I O refreshing Cyclic refreshing immediate refreshing refreshing by IORF 097 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time Programming Manual 6 1 6 I O Refresh Meth ods I O memory holding when changing operating modes Depends on the ON OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area SECTION 9 Memory Areas 9 2 3 Data Area Prop erties Programming Manual 6 4 1 Hot Start Cold Start Function Load OFF All outputs on Output Units c
41. B C RS 232C Port Value Hex A 00 No protocol Mode reception data volume 01 to FF Value Hex No protocol Mode end code setting None Specify the amount of data being received Yes Specify the end code End code is set to CF LF Value Hex No protocol Mode start code setting Address 166 A RS 232C Port Value Hex Maximum Unit No in NT Link Mode A Address 195L IL Il A Value Hex Scheduled interrupt time unit A 0000 10 ms 0001 1 0 ms 361 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix D Address 197001 A Address Value Hex Instruction Error Operation Continue operation A Address Value Hex Stop operation Minimum Cycle Time Cycle time not fixed Cycle time fixed 1 ms to 209 Cycle time fixed 32 000 ms Value Hex Watch Cycle Time A Address Default 1 000 ms 1 s 10 ms to 218 40 000 ms Value Hex Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time A Address Default 4 of the cycle time 00 ms 0 1 ms to 219 B A Value Hex 00 25 5 ms Slice Time for Peri
42. CS1W CN114 cable length 0 05 m Cable included with CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Console CQM1 PROO1 E Programming Console Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables CS1W CN114 Cable length 0 05 m EJ C200H PRO27 E Programming Console LCD area vom Mode selector switch X da ran Hom EL me 7 8 9 um d Operation keys Install taf 54 SO the CS1W KS001 E peleda t Key Sheet o 5t m A y VU m CS1W CN224 Cable length 2 0 m TER CS1W CN624 Cable length 6 0 m Casette jacks See note C200H PRO27 E goniec the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables 1W CN224 Cable length 2 0 m CT CS1W CN624 Cable length 6 0 m Cm mj Note The cassette jacks are not used with CJ series CPU Units 76 Programming Devices Section 3 3 3 3 2 CX Programmer Applicable PC CS CJ series CV series C200HX HG HE Z C200HS CQM1 CPM1 CPM1A SRM1 C1000H 2000H Personal computer DOS version OS Microsoft Windows95 or Windows NT 4 0 Connection method CPU Unit s peripheral port or built in RS 232C port Communications Peripheral bus or Host Link protocol with PC Offline operation Programming I O memory editing creating I O tables setting PC parameters printing program c
43. Check Output Wiring With the PC in PROGRAM mode force set and force reset output bits and verify that the corresponding outputs operate properly Force reset Check Input Wiring Activate input devices such as sensors and switches and verify that the corre sponding indicators on the Input Units light Also use the Bit Word Monitor operation in the Programming Device to verify the operation of the corre sponding input bits Input Unit 10 b Auxiliary Area Settings Make any required Auxiliary Area settings such as the ones shown below These settings can be made from a Programming Device including a Pro gramming Console or the CX Programmer or instructions in the program IOM Hold Bit A50012 Turning ON the IOM Hold Bit protects the contents of I O memory the CIO Area Work Area Timer Completion Flags and PVs Index Registers and Data Registers that would otherwise be cleared when the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa Retained Sz Rz Rz Operating mode changed IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup When the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON and the PC Setup is set to pro tect the status of the IOM Hold Bit at startup PC Setup address 80 bit 15 102 Examples 10 c Trial Operation Section 4 2 turned ON the contents of I O memory that would otherwise be cleared will be retained when the PC is turned on Re
44. Cleared A40115 Memory Error Flag Fatal error ON when an error occurred in mem ory or there was an error in auto matic transfer from the Memory Card when the power was turned ON CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The location where the error occurred is indicated in A40300 to A40308 and A40309 will be turned ON if there was an error during auto matic transfer at start up This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared The automatic transfer at start up error cannot be cleared without turning off the PC 1 Error 0 No error A40300 to A40308 A40309 A40202 Special I O Unit Setting Error Flag Non fatal error ON when an installed Special I O Unit does not match the Special I O Unit registered in the I O table The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The unit number of the Unit where the setting error occurred is indicated in A428 to A433 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Setting error detected 0 No setting error Cleared Cleared A428 to A433 333 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim Related Words Bits egi startup ing iu change A40203 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag Non fatal error ON when an installed C
45. If the system configuration will be changed at a later date changes to the pro gram can be minimized by reserving I O words in advance for future Unit changes or additions To reserve I O words change the I O table with CX Programmer The following procedure can be used to create and download I O tables The I O tables are first created offline on the CX Programmer and then down loaded from the CX Programmer to the CPU Unit Refer to the CX Program mer User Manual and the CX Server User Manual for details 1 Open the I O table window 2 Allocate the required Units to slots 3 Foreach slot for which unused words are to be reserved allocate a Dum my Unit 4 Check the I O tables 5 Go online with the CPU Unit and download the I O tables Downloading the I O tables will change the CPU Unit PC Setup setting to operating accord ing to use set I O tables You can first generate the I O tables automatically for the CJ series PC upload them to the CX Programmer and then edit them before downloading them again to the CPU Unit to same input time 8 1 5 O Allocation to Special I O Units 176 Each CJ series Special I O Unit is allocated ten words in the Special I O Unit Area CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 according the unit number set on the Unit Spe cial I O Units can be mounted to the CJ series CPU Rack or CJ series Expan sion Racks Refer to 2 4 I O Units for more details on the available Special I O Units I O Allocations Se
46. Normal or high capacity Controller Link Controller Link Unit Information system Ethernet Ethernet Unit Message communications between PC and computer 18 Control system Controller Link Controller Link Unit Information system Ethernet Ethernet Unit Comparison to CS series PCs Section 1 4 1 4 Comparison to CS series PCs Dimensions Height x width The CS series and CJ series PCs use the same architecture and are basi cally the same in terms of program structure tasks instruction system I O memory and other functionality They do differ however in that the CJ series PCs have a different Unit structure support different Units do not support Inner Boards have different Expansion Racks have a different I O allocation method etc These differences are outlined in the following table CJ series PCs 90 x 65 mm CS series PCs 130 x 123 mm Unit connections Connected to each other via connectors End Cover connected to right end to indi cate end of Rack Mounted to Backplanes Maximum I O capacity 1 280 I O points 5 120 I O points Maximum program capacity 60 Ksteps 250 Ksteps Maximum data memory DM and EM Areas combined 128 Kwords 448 Kwords Instructions system Same l O memory Same PC Setup Same Cyclic task functionality Same Interrupt tasks Power OFF interrupt task schedule inter rupt tasks
47. Relays Service Consumption GITW PAZOSR 55 Unit Current Consumption Section 2 6 2 6 2 Example Calculations Example 1 CPU Rack In this example the following Units are mounted to a CPU Rack with a CJ1W PA205R Power Supply Unit Quantity Voltage group 5 V DC 24 V DC CPU Unit l O Control Unit Input Units CJ1G CPU45 CJ1W IC101 CJ1W ID211 CJ1W ID231 CJ1W OC201 CJ1W DA041 CJ1W CLK21 Output Units Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit Current Consumption 0 910 A 0 020 A 0 080 x 2 0 090 A x 2 0 090 A x 2 0 120 A 0 350 A 1 92 A lt 5 0 A 24V DC 0 048 A x 2 0 096 lt 0 8 A Power Consumption 1 92 A x 5 V 0 096 A x 24 V 9 60 W 2 304 W 11 904 W lt 25 W Example 2 Expansion Rack In this example the following Units are mounted to a CJ series Expansion Rack with a CJ1W PA205R Power Supply Unit Quantity Voltage group 5 V DC 24 V DC I O Interface Unit CJ1W 11101 Input Units CJ1W ID211 Output Units CJ1W OD231 Current Consumption Group Current consumption 5V DC 0 130 A 0 080 Ax 2 0 140 A x 8 1 41 A x5 0 A 24V DC Power Consumption 1 41 Ax 5 V 7 05 W lt 25 W 56 Unit Current Consumption Section 2 6 2 6 3 Current Consumption Tables 5 V DC Voltage Group Current consumption A CPU Units including power CJ1G CPU45 0 910 See not
48. Self diagnosis User memory check 10 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes 10 2 1 Operating Modes The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program and are common to all tasks PROGRAM Programs are not executed and preparations such as creat ing I O tables initializing the PC Setup and other settings transferring programs checking programs force setting and force resetting can be executed prior to program execution Programs are executed but some operations such as online editing forced set reset and changes to present values in l O memory are enabled for trial operation and other adjust ments Programs are executed and some operations are disabled MONITOR RUN 10 2 2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode PROGRAM RUN and MONITOR are the three operating modes available in the CPU Unit The following lists status and operations for each mode Overall Operation I O refresh Program See note Stopped Executed External outputs OFF I O Memory Non holding areas Clear Holding areas Hold Executed Executed Controlled by pro gram Controlled by program Executed Executed 240 Controlled by pro gram Controlled by program CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 10 2 Programming Console Operations Monitor I O Monitor Transfer Program Check Create I O Memory Program PC to Programming Program Table Programming Device to PC De
49. The Condition Flags cannot be force set and force reset The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags although the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction Function Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect an instruction processing error to indicate that an instruction ended because of an error When the PC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error Instruction Error Operation program execution will be stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag A29508 will be turned ON when the Error Flag is turned ON Access Error Flag Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs The Illegal Access Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of memory that should not be accessed When the PC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error Instruction Error Operation program execution will be stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag A429510 will be turned ON when the Access Error Flag is turned ON Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera tion or a 1 is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol Math instructions Greater Than Flag Turned ON w
50. o COM2 comz cn2 QN OUTOO i to OUTI5 COM3 _ 9 COM3 I O word m 3 When wiring pay careful attention to the polarity The load may operate if the polarity is reversed Although the V and COM terminals of rows A and B of CN1 and CN2 are internally connected wire all points completely 311 Appendix A Specifications of Basic I O Units CJ1W OD212 Transistor Output Unit Terminal Block 16 Points Sourcing Circuit Configuration Rated Voltage 24 V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 20 4 to 26 4 V DC Maximum Load Current 0 5 A point 5 0 A Unit Maximum Inrush Current 0 1 mA max Leakage Current 1 5 V max ON Response Time 0 5 ms max OFF Response Time 1 0 ms max Load Short circuit Prevention Detection current 0 7 to 2 5 A Automatic restart after error clearance Refer to page 318 Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between the external terminals and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max No of Circuits 16 16 points common 1 circuits Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 100 mA max External Power Supply 20 4 to 26 4 V DC 40 mA min Weight 120 g max Y Output indicator Y ERR indicator E oygoo COMO V 1 9 OUT 5 ov When overcurrent is detected
51. 01 000001 14 000014 15 _ 000015 Position 4 32 point Transistor Output Unit Bit address 00 000400 01 000401 14 000414 15 000415 00 000500 01 000501 14 000514 15 000515 Section 8 1 Position 2 Position 3 16 point DC Input Unit 32 point DC Input Unit Bit address Bit address 00 000100 00 000200 01 000101 01 000201 14 000214 15 000215 00 000300 01 000301 14 000114 15 000115 14 000314 15 000315 Position 5 64 point Transistor Output Unit Bit address i 000600 15 000615 00 000700 15 000715 00 000800 15 000815 00 000901 15 000915 171 I O Allocations Section 8 1 Example 2 With the CJ series PCs Dummy Units are not required to reserve unused words Unused words are reserved by creating I O tables on the CX Program mer containing virtual Dummy Units and then downloading the I O tables to the CPU Unit Refer to 8 1 7 I O Table Registration for details The following example shows the I O allocation to 3 Basic I O Units in the CPU Rack with unused empty slot No Units actually connected From the left2 1 2 3 4 5 po CPU Rack z IN IN Open Open OUT g Q 16 pt 32 pt 16 pt 32 pt 32 pt e c S 0000 0001 0003 i 0004 0006 2 7 0002 0005 0007 Position to left Words Word
52. 243267 effects on data areas 195 information 217 342 momentary interruptions 267 Power OFF Detection Delay Time 155 164 power OFF interrupt task 155 164 power interrupts holding time 269 power OFF detection delay 269 Power OFF Detection Time 269 power OFF interrupts response time 249 power OFF processing 267 270 power supply checking 285 CPU processing for power interruptions 267 specifications 27 Power Supply Units 83 dimensions 84 emergency stop 108 grounding 128 wiring AC Units 127 precautions xiii applications xvi general xiv handling precautions 295 interlock circuits 109 operating environment xvi output surge current 139 output wiring 139 periodic inspections 294 safety xiv safety circuits 108 printing 105 377 Program Error Flag 332 program errors 280 351 program execution 244 PROGRAM mode 240 Programmable Terminals RS 232C connection example 368 programming 94 101 capacity 30 converting programs 267 error flag 332 errors 280 execution 244 instruction execution times 250 program capacity 30 program error information 213 program errors 351 remote programming 7 saving the program 105 See also tasks symbols 4 transferring the program 94 101 Programming Consoles 34 75 connecting 36 error messages 274 PC Setup coding sheets 355 peripheral servicing 239 See also Programming Devices Programming Devices 74 connecting 36
53. Aluminum foil tape 370 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E Not Connecting the Shield to the Hood FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables 2 Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath being careful not to damage the braiding e 40mm RS 2320 3 Use scissors to cut away the exposed braiding Ex 4 Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire mE 5 mm 5 Wrap electrician s tape over the top and end of the the cut sheath zzi Electrician s tape Soldering 1 Place heat shrinking tubes over all wires 2 Pre solder all wires and connector terminals 3 Solder the wires Soldering iron Heat shrinking tube inner dia 1 5 10 4 Move the heat shrinking tubes onto the soldered area and shrink them into place Heat shrinking tube 371 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E Assembling the Hood Assemble the connector hood as shown O FG Connection No FG Connection Aluminum foil tape Ground plate Connections to the CPU Unit Led Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before connecting or disconnecting communi
54. CPU Unit Unit A F External device Up to 32 ports are possible with serial por Standard Serial Communications with External Devices Note Messages can be transferred to and from standard serial devices with the protocol macro function according to preset parameter settings The proto col macro function supports processing options such as retries timeout moni toring and error checks Symbols that read and write data to the CPU Unit can be included in the com munications frames so data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit very easily OMRON components such as Temperature Controllers ID System Devices Bar Code Readers and Modems can be connected to a Serial Communica tions Unit with the standard system protocol It is also possible to change the settings if necessary The Serial Communications Unit must be purchased separately to take advantage of this function Transmit or receive data with just one instruction External device Multilevel Network Configurations Different network levels can be connected as shown in the following diagram The multilevel configuration provides more flexibility in networking from the manufacturing site to production management OA network Ethernet FA network Controller Link Open network DeviceNet CompoBus D Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Message communications possible amo
55. Error log Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log Information includes the error code error details and the time the error occurred Programming Manual 6 4 1 Error Log Serial communications Built in peripheral port Programming Device including Pro gramming Console connections Host Links NT Links Built in RS 232C port Programming Device excluding Pro gramming Console connections Host Links no protocol communications NT Links Serial Communications Unit sold separately Protocol mac ros Host Links NT Links 2 5 1 Serial Communi cations System Programming Manual 6 3 Serial Communica tions Functions Provided on all models Accuracy 30 s mo at 25 C accu racy varies with the temperature Note Used to store the time when power is turned ON and when errors occur Programming Manual 6 4 5 Clock Functions Power OFF detection time 26 10 to 25 ms not fixed 10 5 Power OFF Oper ation Specifications Section 2 1 Item Power OFF detection delay time Specification 0 to 10 ms user defined default 0 ms Reference Programming Manual 6 4 4 Power OFF Detection Delay Time Memory protection Held Areas Holding bits contents of Data Memory and Extended Data Memory and status of the counter Comple tion Flags and present values Note If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned ON and the PC Setup is set to maintain the IOM Hold Bit
56. L 316 DOUBLE GREATER THAN L 321 DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL L 326 DOUBLE COMPARE CMPL 060 Symbol Math Instructions DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH L 401 OUT CARRY DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT L 411 WITHOUT CARRY The SRCH 181 MAX 182 and MIN 183 instructions can output the PC memory address of the word with the desired value search value maximum or minimum to IRO In this case IRO can be used in later instructions to access the contents of that word The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONI TOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON the Index Registers won t be cleared when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the Index Registers won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is reset ON OFF gt ON Do not use Index Registers until a PC memory address has been set in the register The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used with out setting their values The values in Index Registers are unpredictable
57. RADIANS TO DEGREES ARC COSINE ARC TANGENT SQUARE ROOT EXPONENT LOGARITHM EXPONENTIAL POWER AJo vlv vvv W CO 260 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Table Data Processing Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction SET STACK Mnemonic Length ON steps See note execution time us Conditions Designating 5 words in stack area OFF execution time us Designating 1 000 words in stack area PUSH ONTO STACK FIRST IN FIRST OUT Designating 5 words in stack area Designating 1 000 words in stack area LAST IN FIRST OUT DIMENSION RECORD TABLE SET RECORD LOCATION GET RECORD NUMBER DATA SEARCH Searching for 1 word Searching for 1 000 words SWAP BYTES Swapping 1 word Swapping 1 000 words FIND MAXIMUM Searching for 1 word Searching for 1 000 words FIND MINIMUM Searching for 1 word Searching for 1 000 words SUM Adding 1 word Adding 1 000 words FRAME CHECK SUM Data Control Instructions For 1 word table length For 1 000 word table length When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction PID CONTROL Mnemonic Length
58. Too many differentiated instructions have been inserted or deleted during online editing After writing any changes to the program switch to PROGRAM mode and then return to MONITOR mode to continue editing the program A29512 Task error A task error has occurred The following conditions will generate a task error 1 There isn t an executable cyclic task 2 There isn t a program allo cated to the task Check A294 for the number of the task missing a program 3 The task specified in a TKON 820 TKOF 821 or MSKS 690 instruction doesn t exist Check the startup cyclic task attributes Check the execution status of each task as controlled by TKON 820 and TKOF 821 Check the relationship between task numbers and the program Make sure that all of the task numbers specified in TKON 820 TKOF 821 and MSKS 690 instructions have corre sponding tasks Use MSKS 690 to mask any I O or scheduled interrupt tasks that are not being used and that do not have pro grams set for them A29510 Illegal access error An illegal access error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop opera tion for an instruction error The following are illegal access errors 1 Reading writing a param eter area 2 Writing memory that is not installed 3 Writing an EM bank that is EM file memory 4 Writing to a read only area 5 Indirect DM EM address that is not in BCD when BCD mode is spec
59. connections 15 peripheral servicing 239 Windows 11 protocol macros 48 system configuration 47 R range instructions 9 record table instructions 10 refreshing I O refreshing 197 199 239 244 immediate refreshing 197 199 IORF 097 198 200 Registered I O Table 234 Relay Network Table 236 reserving I O words 176 response time settings 149 Restart Bits CPU Bus Units 209 peripheral port 218 RS 232C port 218 Special I O Units 209 Routing Tables 235 RS 232C port 378 Index communications error 285 connecting a personal computer 37 connection examples 365 368 pin arrangement 80 recommended wiring methods 368 related flags bits 218 330 settings 152 160 specifications 80 RUN mode 240 RUN output 127 specifications 27 S safety circuits 108 safety precautions xiv scheduled interrupts response time 249 time units 153 162 self maintaining bits 207 sequence control instructions execution times 252 serial communications communications information 218 protocols 44 See also communications system configuration 43 serial communications instructions execution times 262 setup initial setup 94 preparations for operation 94 short circuit protection 139 318 Special I O Unit Area 203 Special I O Units 31 data exchange 181 disabling cyclic refreshing 155 165 error information 216 errors 284 I O allocations 176 Initialization Flags 209 326 Restart Bits 209 34
60. even parity 2 stop bits and a baud rate of 9 600 bps 00 Host link 02 1 N mode NT Link 03 No proto col 04 Peripheral bus 05 Host link Default 0 This setting determines whether the RS 232C port will operate in host link mode or another serial communications mode Host link can be specified with 00 or 05 The Peripheral bus mode is for communications with Pro gramming Devices other than the Programming Console Note Communications will not be possible with PTs set for 1 1 mode NT Links 0 7 bits 1 8 bits Default 0 0 2 bits 1 1 bit Default 0 00 Even 01 Odd 10 None Default 00 These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or no protocol These settings are also valid only when the RS 232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1 PC Setup Baud rate bps 9 600 300 600 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 Default 00 Settings 00 and 06 through 0A are valid when the communica tions mode is set to peripheral bus When the communications mode is set to NT Link the settings are as follows 00 to 09 Hex Basic NT Link 0A Hex High speed NT Link When making the settings with the CX Programmer select 115 200 bps No protocol mode delay 0000 to 270F 0 to 99990 ms 10 ms units Default 0 This setting determines the delay from execution of TXD 236 until the d
61. max Serial Communications Unit One RS 232C port and one RS 422A 485 port CJ1W SCU41 25 words 0 to F Ethernet Unit 10Base T FINS commu CJ1W ETN11 25 words 0 to F nications socket service FTP server and mail communications 4 Units max CJ1W DRM21 25 words See note 1 DeviceNet Unit 0 to F DeviceNet remote I O 2 048 points Both master and slave functions Auto matic allocation possible without Configurator Note 1 Slave I O are allocated in DeviceNet Area CIO 3200 to CIO 3799 2 Some CJ series CPU Bus Units are allocated words in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area The system must be designed so that the number of words allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area does not exceed its capacity Refer to 2 7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity for details 42 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 2 5 Expanded System Configuration 2 5 1 Serial Communications System The CJ series system configuration can be expanded by using the following serial communications ports CPU Unit built in ports x 2 peripheral port and RS 232C port Serial Communications Unit ports x 2 RS 232C and RS 422A 485 1 2 3 1 Ifthe CPU Unit built in ports or Serial Communications Unit ports are used various protocols can be allocated such as Host Link and protocol macros 2 Upto 16 Serial Communications Units can be connected for one CPU Unit The system configu
62. no I O interrupt or external interrupt tasks Power OFF interrupt task schedule inter rupt tasks I O interrupt and external interrupt tasks Programming Devices CX Programmer versions 2 04 or later and Programming Consoles CX Programmer and Programming Con soles Instruction Basic instructions 0 08 us min 0 04 us min execution Special instruc time tions 0 12 us min 0 12 us min Overhead time 0 5 ms 0 5 ms Mounting DIN Track not mountable with screws DIN Track or screws Inner Boards Not supported Supported Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units Structure of allocations is the same Special I O Units 96 Units max restrictions on mounting positions CPU Bus Units 16 Units max CPU Rack mounting positions 10 Units max 11 Units or more will cause an error 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Rack mounting posi tions 10 Units max 11 Units or more will cause an error 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Racks One I O Control Unit required on CPU Rack and one l O Interface Unit required on each Expansion Rack Either C200H or CS series Expansion Racks can be connected without an I O Control Unit or I O Interface Units Maximum number of Expansion Racks 3 7 Maximum total cable length to Expansion Racks Maximum number of Units 40 80 SYSMAC BUS Remote I O Not supported Sup
63. output device s 2 Word Operand Just after the instruction is executed the ON OFF status of the 16 I O points allocated to the specified word will be output to the output device s In the following example CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator an external device connected to the output terminal of an Output Unit The ON OFF sta tus of CIO 000201 is output to the actuator just after IOUT 000201 is exe cuted adder symbol Mnemonic 000201 OUT 000201 CPU Unit Bit allocation Ze 000201 Output Unit Actuator When IORF 097 I O REFRESH is executed the ON OFF status of output bits in the specified range of words is output to their external devices This I O refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I O refreshing performed once each cycle The following IORF 097 instruction refreshes the status of all I O points in I O Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003 The status of input points is read from the Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units In this example the status of input points allocated to CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are output to the Output Unit CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are allo cated to Input Units IORF 0000 0003 cru P CIO 0002 Bita ocation Sack Unit Actuator CIO 0003 Output when IORF 097 is executed Data Link Area Limitations on Output Bits N
64. peripherals include CPU Bus Units Special I O Units the built in RS 232C port and the peripheral port Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode A power OFF interrupt task will be used 148 Power OFF Interrupt Task PC Setup Section 7 1 Cases when settings must be changed Setting s to be changed Power OFF Detection Delay Time Special I O Unit Cyclic Refreshing You want to extend the detection of a power interruption to 10 to 20 ms You want to execute IORF in an interrupt task You want to shorten the average cycle time when a lot of Special I O Units are being used You want to extend the I O refreshing interval for Special I O Units 7 1 2 PC Setup Settings Basic I O Unit Input Response Time Rack 0 Slot 0 Address in Programming Console Rack 0 Slot 1 Word Bit s Rack 0 Slot 2 Rack 0 Slot 3 Rack 0 Slot 4 Rack 0 Slot 5 Rack 0 Slot6 Rack 0 Slot 7 Rack 0 Slot 8 Rack 0 Slot 9 Rack 1 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 2 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 3 Slots 0 to 9 Settings Function Sets the input response time ON response time OFF response time for CJ series Basic I O Units The default setting is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 5 ms to 32 ms This value can be increased to reduce the effects of chattering and noise or it can be reduced to allow reception of shorter input pulses Related flags and
65. the ERR indicator will light and the corresponding flag in the Basic I O Unit Information Area A050 to A089 will turn ON 312 Specifications of Basic I O Units Terminal Connections Appendix A D D D D D D D D COM V 4 D D D 0 0 D D 24 V DC When wiring pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply The load may operate if the polarity is reversed CJ1W OD232 Transistor Output Unit MIL Connector 32 Points Sourcing Rated Voltage 24 V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 20 4 to 26 4 V DC Maximum Load Current 0 5 A point 2 0 A common 4 0 A Unit Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 1 5 V max ON Response Time 0 5 ms max OFF Response Time 1 0 ms max Load Short circuit Prevention Detection current 0 7 to 2 5 A Automatic restart after error clearance Refer to page 318 Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between the external terminals and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max No of Circuits 32 16 points common 2 circuits Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 150 mA max External Power Supply 20 4 to 26 4 V DC 70 mA min Weight 80 g max Accessories None Note The maxim
66. 0 08 Designating indirect IR 0 08 IOUT Increase compared to normal instruction 21 37 OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT Designating words 0 08 Designating indirect IR 0 08 IOUT NOT Increase compared to normal instruction 21 37 KEEP KEEP Designating words 0 08 Designating indirect IR 0 08 DIFFERENTI ATE UP DIFU Designating words 0 17 Designating indirect IR 0 17 DIFFERENTI ATE DOWN DIFD Designating words 0 17 Designating indirect IR 0 17 251 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us SET SET 1 0 21 Designating words 0 08 0 79 Designating indirect IR 0 08 ISET 228 2 121 37 Increase compared to normal instruction 0 21 RESET RSET 1 0 21 Designating words 0 08 0 79 Designating indirect IR 0 08 IRSET 2 21 37 Increase compared to normal instruction 0 21 MULTIPLE SETA 530 4 7 8 With 1 bit set 0 37 BIT SET 38 8 With 1 000 bit set MULTIPLE RSTA 531 4 7 8 With 1 bit reset 0 37 BIT RESET 38 8 With 1 000 bit reset Sequence Control When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length Instructions column in the foll
67. 12 BCD Read only A35308 to A35315 Year 00 to 99 BCD Read only A35400 to A35407 Day of the week 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday Read only Start up Time A510 and A511 These words contain the time in BCD at which the power was turned on The contents are updated every time that the power is turned on A51000 to A51007 Second 00 to 59 A51008 to A51015 Minute 00 to 59 A51100 to A51107 Hour 00 to 23 A51108 to A51115 Day of the month 00 to 31 Read write Power Interruption Time A512 and A513 These words contain the time in BCD at which the power was interrupted The contents are updated every time that the power is interrupted A51200 to A51207 Second 00 to 59 A51208 to A51215 Minute 00 to 59 A51300 to A51307 Hour 00 to 23 A51308 to A51315 Day of month 00 to 31 Read write Number of Power Interruptions Contains the number of times in binary that power has been interrupted since the power was first turned on To reset this value overwrite the current value with 0000 Read write Total Power ON Time Contains the total time in binary that the PC has been on in 10 hour units The data is stored is updated every 10 hours To reset this value over write the current value with 0000 Read write Network Communica tions Information Communications Port Enabled Flags A20
68. 16 point Output Unit CJ1W 0C211 16 point Output Unit Transistor Output Units with sinking outputs CJ1W OD211 16 point Output Unit CJ1W OD231 32 point Output Unit CJ1W OD261 64 point Output Unit Transistor Output Units with sourcing outputs 58 CJ1W OD212 16 point Output Unit CJ1W OD232 32 point Output Unit Note If the selected Unit is incorrect an I O Table Setting error will be generated I O Table Settings List Section 2 8 2 8 2 CJ series Special I O Units Unit name Unit type Number of Number of allocated words allocated Units Input Output Analog Input Unit CJ1W ADO81 SIOU Special I O Analog Output CJ1W DAO41 Unit Unit Temperature CJ1W TC001 Control Units CJ1W TC002 CJ1W TC003 CJ1W TC004 CJ1W TC101 CJ1W TC102 CJ1W TC103 CJ1W TC104 Position Control CJ1W NC113 Units CJ1W NC213 CJ1W NC413 CJ1W NC133 CJ1W NC233 CJ1W NC433 zx o NM Hs A PM Ale DM MyM PM NI NINI P AINS HIM OD HD OD OD ooo o Note Ifthe selected Unit the number of input words or the number of output words is incorrect a Special I O Unit Setup error will be generated 2 8 3 CJ series CPU Bus Units Unit name Unit type Number of Number of allocated words allocated Units Input Output Controller Link Unit CJ1W CLK21 Controller Link Unit
69. 16 points Sinking Terminal block 12 to 24 V DC 0 5 A CJ1W OD 1 1 outputs 16 outputs Fujitsu compatible connector 12 to 24 V DC CJ1W OD231 0 5 A 32 outputs See note 1 Fujitsu compatible connector 12 to 24 V DC CU1W OD261 0 3 A 64 outputs See note 1 Sourcing Terminal block 24 V DC 0 5 A 160utputs CJ1W OD212 outputs load short circuit protection MIL connector 24 V DC 0 5 A 320utputs CJ1W OD232 load short circuit protection See note 1 299 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A CJ1W ID211 24 V DC Input Unit Terminal Block 16 Points Circuit Configuration 300 Rated Input Voltage 24V DC 10 ee Input Impedance 3 3 KQ Input Current 7 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage ON Current 14 4 V DC min 3 mA min OFF Voltage OFF Current 5 V DC max 1 mA max ON Response Time 8 0 ms max Possible to set to between 0 and 32 ms in the PC Setup OFF Response Time 8 0 ms max Possible to set to between 0 and 32 ms using PC No of Circuits 16 16 points common 1 circuit Number of Simultaneously ON 100 simultaneously ON at 24 V DC Refer to the Points following illustration Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR ter minal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Con
70. 232C Port Specifications 00 0 02 0005 80 3 4 Power Supply Units 0 ee eee 83 3 4 1 Power Supply Units sso esen ia En A ERAR EE R eee 83 3 4 2 Components and Switch Settings 00 0 83 34 30 DIMENSIONS 3 se y ag a i A a ee eoe e 84 3 4 4 Power Supply Confirmation 84 3 5 I O Control Units and I O Interface Units 0 0000 84 3 5 1 Models ccc bch ese hts ob sib etapa ibe RE HERE deste 85 3 5 2 System Configuration 0 0 00 eee 85 3 5 3 Component Names 2 0 00 ee 85 37924 DIMENSIONS zc SR eR NAAT eels ton ed BERG ERU RA 86 3 6 CJ series Basic I O Units 0 eee 86 3 6 1 CJ series Basic I O Units with Terminal Blocks 86 3 6 2 C series 32 64 point Basic I O Units with Connectors 87 61 CPU Units Section 3 1 3 1 CPU Units 3 1 1 Models I O points Expansion Programming Data Memory LD instruction Racks DM EM processing time 1 280 3 max 60K steps 128K words 0 08 us CJ1G CPU45 30K steps 64K words CJ1G CPU44 3 1 2 Components LED Indicators YSMAC s TRE re s ERR DIP Switch Battery Compartment ORTROLLER 1 COI Inside the battery compartment Used for initial settings Memory Card Indicators MCPWR green Lit when power is supplied to Memory Card BUSY orange Lit when Memory Card is being accessed Peripheral Port Connected to Programming Devices such as a Programming Consol
71. 8 CS SG 9 9 Cl D sub 9 pin connector D SUB 9 pin connector Male connector on cable Female connector on cable The following connections are in Peripheral Bus serial communications mode CPU Unit Personal computer D Sub 9 pin connector D Sub 9 pin connector Male connector on cable Female connector on cable Applicable Connectors CPU Unit Connector ltem Mode Specifications XM2A 0901 9 pin male Used together One XM2S 0911 E 9 pin millimeter 0f each provided screws static resis With CPU Unit tant 81 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Personal Computer Connector Hem Model Specifications Plug XM2D 0901 9 pin female Used together Hood XM2S 0913 9 pin inch screws IBM PC AT or compatible j 9 pin male connector CS1 series CPU Unit r Plug XM2D 0901 9 pin female Hood XM2S 0913 Recommended cable Hood XM2S 0911 E Plug XM2A 0901 9 pin male X pU Provided with CPU Unit Recommended Cables Fujikura Ltd LL2464 AWG28 x 5P IFS RVV SB UL product AWG 28 x 5P IFVV SB non UL product Hitachi Cable Ltd UL2464 SB MA 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 UL product CO MA VV SB 5P x 28AWG 7 0 127 non UL product RS 232C Port Specifications Specification Communications method Half duplex Synchronization Start stop Baud rate 0 3 0 6 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbps See note Transmission distance 15 m max
72. A199 Error flag contents Error record Error flag contents Emp contents Error record 347 Auxiliary Area Appendix B The following data would be generated in an error record if a memory error error code 80F1 occurred on 1 April 1998 at 17 10 30 with the error located in the PC Setup 04 Hex The following data would be generated in an error record if an FALS error with FALS number 001 occurred on 2 May 1997 at 8 30 15 Error Codes and Error Flags Classification Error code System defined 80F1 Meaning Memory error Error flags A403 fatal errors 80C0 to 80C7 80CE 80CF I O bus error A404 80E9 Duplicate number error A410 A411 to 416 See note 3 80E1 Too many I O error A407 80E0 I O setting error 80F0 Program error A295 to 299 See note 4 809F Cycle time too long error 80EA Duplicate Expansion Rack number error A40900 to 40907 User defined C101 to C2FF fatal errors FALS instruction executed See note 1 User defined 4101 to 42FF non fatal errors FAL instruction executed See note 2 System defined 008B Interrupt task error A426 non fatal errors 009A Basic I O error A408 009B PC Setup setting error A406 0200 to 020F CPU Bus Unit error A417 0300 to 035F Special I O Unit error A418 to 423 See note 5 00F7 Battery error 0400 to 040
73. A40215 FAL Error Flag A360 to A391 Exe cuted FAL Number Flags Probable cause FAL 006 has been exe cuted in program Executed FAL Number Flags A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511 The error code in A400 will indicate the FAL number The leftmost digit of the code will be 4 and the right most 3 digits of the code will be from 100 to 2FF Hex and will correspond to FAL num bers 001 to 511 Possible remedy Correct according to cause indicated by FAL number set by user Interrupt Task error INTRPT ERR A40213 Interrupt Task Error Flag A426 Inter rupt Task Error Task Number PC Setup Set to Detect Interrupt Task Errors Attempted to refresh a Spe cial I O Unit s I O from an interrupt task with IORF 097 while the Unit s I O was being refreshed by cyclic I O refreshing dupli cate refreshing Check the program Either disable detection of interrupt task errors in the PC Setup address 128 bit 14 or cor rect the problem in the program Basic I O error DENSITY 1 0 ERR A40212 Basic I O Unit Error Flag A408 Basic 1O Unit Error Slot Number An error has occurred ina Basic I O Unit A408 contains the errant rack slot number Check the errant Unit for blown fuse etc A40210 PC Setup Error Flag A406 PC Setup Error Location There is a setting error in the PC Setup The location of the error is written to A406
74. Appendix B Read Write Area Set by User Classifi cation Initial set ting IOM Hold Bit Addresses Initial set ting Forced Status Hold Bit Error Log Reset Bit 340 Output OFF Bit Word Bit A50012 Function Turn this bit ON to preserve the status of the I O Mem ory when shifting from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa The I O Memory includes the CIO Area Transition Flags Timer Flags and PVs Index Reg isters Data Registers and the Current EM Bank Num ber If the status of the IOM Hold Bit itself is preserved in the PC Setup IOM Hold Bit Status the status of the I O Memory Area will be retained when the PC is turned ON or power is interrupted Settings 1 Retained 0 Not retained Status after mode change Retained Statusat startup See Function column See Function column Related Flags Settings PC Setup IOM Hold Bit Status setting A50013 Turn this bit ON to preserve the status of bits that have been force set or force reset when shifting from PROGRAM to MONITOR mode or vice versa Bits that have been force set or force reset will always return to their default status when shifting to RUN mode If the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit itself is pre served in the PC Setup Forced Status Hold Bit Status the status of force set and force reset bits will be retained when the PC is turn
75. CPU Bus Units Section 8 2 CMND The FINS command is transmitted when CMND 490 has been executed in the program Special I O Unit Initialization Disabling Special I O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Note CPU Unit Serial Communications Special I O Unit OR Communications CPU Unit FINS command transmission Special I O Units are initialized when the PC s power is turned on or the Units Restart Bit is turned ON The Unit s Special I O Unit Initialization Flag A33000 to A33515 will be ON while the Unit is initializing I O refreshing cyclic I O refreshing or refreshing by IORF 097 will not be performed for a Special I O Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON Ten words are allocated to each Special I O Unit in the Special I O Unit Area CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 based on the unit number set on the front of each Unit The data in the Special I O Unit Area is refreshed in the CPU Unit every cycle during I O refreshing just after execution of the END 001 instruction I O refreshing may take too long if too many Special I O Units are installed If I O refreshing is taking too much time the PC Setup can be set to disable cyclic refreshing for particular Special I O Units The Special I O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Disable Bits are in PC Setup addresses 226 to 231 If the I O refreshing time is too short the Unit s internal processing will not be able to keep pace the Special I O Unit Error Flag 440206 will be turne
76. CPU Racks Up to 10 I O Units can be mounted to each Expansion Rack and a total of 3 Expansion Racks can be connected The maximum number of I O Units that can be connected in one PC is thus 40 101 0 Units max I A vu E 2 CPU Rack E v o c g S 1 0 Control Unit See note 1 CS CJ series l OConnecting Cable S te 3 rus a eee 10m 12m End Cover CS CJ I O Connecting Cables E CJ series Expansion Cable Length Heck p CS1W CN313 0 3 m Total cable o CS1W CN713 0 7m length ki CS1W CN223 2m iem E CS1W CN323 3m 2 CS1W CN523 5m Expansion CS1W CN133 10m Racks f V O Interface Unit See note 2 CS1W CN133B2 12m B maximum ends I Gonnecing able I O Interface Unit See note 2 30 cm 70 cm 2 m 3m 5 m 10 m 12m F CJ series Expansion Rack D o 3 ily S Y 2 10 I O Units max Note 1 Connect the I O Control Unit directly to the CPU Unit Proper operation may not be possible if it is connected any other location 2 Connectthe I O Interface Unit directly to the Power Supply Unit Proper op eration may not be possible if it is connected any other location 3 The total length of CS CJ series I O Connecting cable between all Racks must be 12 m or less Maximum Expansion Racks Expansion pattem Rack Maximum No ot Racks Remarks CJ series CPU Rack with CJ series Expansion Racks 3 Racks Th
77. Error Flag A29510 This flag and the Access Error Flag AER will be Read only turned ON when an illegal access error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal access error No END Error Flag A29511 ON when there isn t an END 001 instruction in each Read only program within a task Task Error Flag A29512 ON when a task error has occurred The following Read only conditions will generate a task error 1 There isn t an executable cyclic task 2 There isn t a program allocated to the task Differentiation Overflow A29513 ON when the specified Differentiation Flag Number Read only Error Flag exceeds the allowed value Illegal Instruction Error A29514 ON when a program that cannot be executed has Read only Flag been stored UM Overflow Error Flag A29515 ON when the last address in UM user program Read only memory has been exceeded Program Address Where A298 and These words contain the 8 digit hexadecimal pro Read only Program Stopped A299 gram address of the instruction where program exe cution was stopped due to a program error A299 contains the leftmost digits Error Log Error Log Area A100 to When an error has occurred the error code error Read only Error Code A199 contents and error s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area Error Log Pointer A300 When an error occurs the Error Log Pointer is incre Read only mented by 1 to indicate the location where the next error reco
78. Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W OD231 Units with Sinking 12 to 24 V DC 0 5 A 320utputs Outputs Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W OD261 12 to 24 V DC 0 3 A 64 outputs Transistor Output MIL connector CJ1W OD232 Units with Sourcing 24 V DC 0 5 A 32 outputs load short circuit protec Outputs tion Note Either immediate refreshing or IORF instruction refreshing can be used for CJ series 32 64 point Basic I O Units with Connectors Part Names 32 point Units CJ1W LJD23L Model number gt Indicator Switch 1 2 Q Changes the 16 I O displayed on the I O indicators Setting Fujitsu connector MIL connector 1 Wd m Row A on connector Bottom of connector 2 Wd m 1 Row B on connector Top of connector l O indicators I O wiring connector 40 pin x 1 Unit with Fujitsu compatible Unit with MIL Connector Connector CJ1W L1D231 CJ1W L1D232 Connector ERR Connected to the connector on the next Unit 0123 Word m 4567 T 8 9 1011 me 1213 1415 Note Only the CJ1W OD232 has an ERR indicator for the load short circuit alarm 64 point Units CJ1W LID26L Indicator Switch 1 2 l O indicators _ Changes the 32 I O displayed on the I O indicators dou connector HE Setting Fujitsu connector 40 pin x 2 1 Wd m and m 1 CN1 2
79. H hardware specifications 27 Holding Area 207 Host Link System 45 49 IO checking 286 T O allocations 167 reserving words 176 I O Area 196 initializing 196 I O Bus error 278 I O Control Units 84 I O Interface Units 84 I O memory 65 188 addresses 353 areas 354 effects of operating mode changes 241 structure 189 I O refreshing 239 244 I O response time 248 Basic I O Units 209 calculating 248 I O table registering 94 98 178 I O Table Setting error 280 immediate refreshing input bits and words 197 output bits and words 199 increment instructions execution times 256 index registers 9 224 indicators 30 63 CPU Unit 30 63 375 error indications 273 indirect addressing DM Area 221 EM Area 223 index registers 224 inductive load surge suppressor 140 Initial Task Execution Flag 209 Initial Task Flag 349 Initial Task Startup Flag 321 initialization CPU Bus Units 326 CPU Unit 239 file memory 69 I O Area 196 input bits 197 input devices wiring 136 input instructions execution times 250 Input Units specifications 40 299 troubleshooting 291 inspection procedures 294 installation 94 96 107 control panels 112 DIN Track 122 environment 110 ambient conditions 110 cooling 110 fail safe circuits 108 precautions xvi 110 instruction execution times 250 267 instructions execution times 250 failure diagnosis 10 index registers 9 lo
80. Hexadecimal content Decimal equivalent 8000 to FFFF 32 768 to 1 0000 to 7FFF 0 to 32 767 The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONI TOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup If the IOM Hold Bit 450012 is ON the Data Registers won t be cleared when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the Data Registers won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is reset ON OFF gt ON Data Registers are local to each task For example DRO used in task 1 is dif ferent from DRO used in task 2 The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed read or written from a Programming Device Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register The reg ister s operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values The values in Data Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt task When a Data Register will be used in an interrupt task always set a value in the Data Register before using the register in that task Task Flags range from TKOO to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31 A Task Flag
81. I O Allocation Status A260 Indicates the current status of I O allocation Read only 0000 Hex Automatic I O Allocation at Startup BBBB Hex User set I O Allocations CPU Bus CPU Bus Unit Initialization A30200 to These flags correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15 A Read only Unit Flags Flags A30215 flag will be ON while the corresponding Unit is initial Bits izing after the power is turned ON or the Unit s Restart Bit in A501 is turned ON CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits A50100 to These bits correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15 Read write A50115 Turn a bit from OFF to ON to restart the correspond ing Unit Special I O Special I O Unit Initializa A33000 to These flags correspond to Special I O Units 0 to 95 Read only Unit Flags tion Flags A33515 A flag will be ON while the corresponding Unit is ini Bits tializing after the power is turned ON or the Unit s Restart Bit is turned ON Restart Bits A50200 to A50715 correspond to Units 0 to 95 Special I O Unit Restart A50200 to These bits correspond to Special I O Units 0 to 95 Read write Bits A50715 Turn a bit from OFF to ON to restart the correspond ing Unit Cycle First Cycle Flag A20011 This flag is turned ON for one cycle when program Read only Information execution starts the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN MONITOR Initial Task Execution Flag A20015 When a task is in executable status for the first Read only ti
82. ID261 0 012 ms nector 32 point DC Input Unit MIL connector CJ1W ID232 0 006 ms 16 point Relay Output Unit 8 points with inde CJ1W OC201 0 005 ms pendent commons 245 Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 Name 16 point Relay Output Unit Model l O refresh time per Unit CJ1W 0C211 0 005 ms 32 point Transistor Output Unit sinking outputs CJ1W OD231 0 008 ms 32 point Transistor Output Unit sourcing outputs CJ1W OD232 0 008 ms 64 point Transistor Output Unit sinking outputs CJ1W OD261 0 015 ms Typical Special I O Unit Refresh Times Analog Input Unit CJ1W AD081 l O refresh time per Unit Analog Output Unit CJ1W DA041 Temperature Control Unit CJ1W TC Increase in Cycle Time The increase in the cycle time will be the I O refresh times from the following Caused by CPU Bus Units table plus the refresh time required for specific Unit functions Controller Link Unit CJ1W CLK 21 Increase Remarks There will be an additional increase of 1 5 ms 0 001 x number of data link words See note There will be an additional increase of the event execution times when message services are used Serial Com munications Unit CJ1W SCU41 There will be an additional increase of up to the following time when a protocol macro is executed 0 001 ms x maximum number of data words sent or received 0 to 500 words See no
83. IR2 SET 5 IR2 When the operand is treated as a bit the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Reg ister specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit num ber In this example MOVR 560 sets the PC memory address of CIO 000013 0C000D Hex in IR2 The SET instruction adds 5 from bit 13 to this PC memory address so it turns ON bit CIO 000102 When an Index Register is used as an operand without a prefix the instruc tion will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself a two word or double value Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instruc tions shown in the following table Use these instructions to operate on the Index Registers as pointers Index Registers Index Register Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation Precautions Section 9 16 The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions although they can usually be used for indirect addressing Instruction group Instruction name Mnemonic Data Movement MOVE TO REGISTER MOVR 560 Instructions MOVE TIMER COUNTER PV TO REG MOVRW 561 ISTER DOUBLE MOVE DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE Table Data Processing SET RECORD LOCATION Instructions GET RECORD NUMBER Increment Decrement DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY L 591 Instructions DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY L 593 Comparison Instructions DOUBLE EQUAL L 301 DOUBLE NOT EQUAL lt gt L 306 DOUBLE LESS THAN L 311 DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL lt
84. Index Register temporary areas for each task For example if using IRO for both Task 1 and Task 2 IRO values are overwritten in the following way when switching tasks 229 Data Registers Section 9 17 At start of operation Timing Before executing first program address Value in Index Register 0 IRO is undefined Instruction executed IRO overwritten e g overwritten as A After END instruction executed Value in IRO A is copied to Task 1 IRO temporary area Before executing first program address IRO is undefined Instruction executed IRO overwritten e g overwritten as B After END instruction executed Value in IRO B is copied to Task 2 IRO temporary area Peripheral servicing When reading the value in IRO using the Programming Devices B is read Next cycle Task 1 Before executing first program address Value A which was copied to Task 1 s IRO temporary area is stored in IRO Instruction executed IRO overwritten e g overwritten as A After END instruction executed Value in IRO A is copied to Task 1 IRO temporary area Before executing lead program address Value in IRO B is copied to Task 2 IRO temporary area Instruction executed IRO overwritten e g overwritten as B After END instruction executed Value in IRO B is copied to Task 2 IRO temporary area Peripheral servicing When
85. Indicator CPU Non fatal Communications error Output OFF standby error Peripheral RS 232C Bit ON ON Flashing 273 Error Processing Section 11 2 Indicator CPU CPU Fatal Non fatal Communications error Output OFF error standby error error Peripheral RS 232C Bit ON 11 2 3 Error Processing Flowchart Use the following flowchart as a guide for error processing with a Program ming Console Error occurred during operation Is the POWER in dicator lit Check the Power Supply page 285 Is the RUN indica tor lit OFF ERR ALM indicator lit Connect the Programming Console Is the ERR ALM OFF indicator flashing Check I O page 287 Flashing and environmental conditions page 288 Connect the Programming Console Non fatal error Is the Programming displayed Console s display operating Yes Fatal error CPU Error WDT error 274 Error Processing Section 11 2 Fatal error Non fatal error Memory error Es d FAL error See note 1 See note 2 e Interrupt I O bus error Task error Unit Number ig x abu L Basic I O Duplication error error hed Rack Number i L PC Setup Duplication error error ee Too Many I O m o mdi Ss CS1 CPU Points err
86. Interface EIA RS 232C Protocol Host Link NT Link 1 N No protocol or Peripheral Bus Note Baud rates for the RS 232C are specified only up to 19 2 kbps The CJ Series supports serial communications from 38 4 kbps to 115 2 kbps but some com puters cannot support these speeds Lower the baud rate if necessary Protocol PC Setup and DIP Switch Settings Pin No 5 RS 232C port settings in PC Setup Default value NT Link No protocol Peripheral bus Host Link 0 Hex 2 Hex 3 Hex 4 Hex 5 Hex Host computer PT General purpose CX Programmer Host computer or Host Link NT Link external devices Peripheral bus CX Programmer No protocol Host Link CX Programmer not a Programming Console connected through the peripheral bus The Programming Device s communications parameters are detected automatically 82 Power Supply Units 3 4 Power Supply Units 3 4 1 Power Supply Units Power supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC allowable 85 to 264 V AC 50 60 Hz allowable 47 to 63 Hz Output 5Aat5 VDC 0 8 A at 24 V DC Total 25 W Power output RUN terminals output 3 4 2 Components and Switch Settings POWER Indicator I AC input Section 3 4 Model CJ1W PA205R Lit when 5 V are being output from the Power Supply Unit Weight 350 g max r External connection terminals
87. Internal Special I O Unit DM Area D20000 to D29599 100 words x 96 Units Used to set parameters for Special I O Units CPU Bus Unit DM Area D30000 to D31599 100 words x 16 Units Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 14 Data Memory DM Area EM Area 32K words per bank 3 banks max EO 00000 to E2 32767 max depending on model of CPU Unit Used as a general purpose data area for reading and writing data in word units 16 bits Words in the EM Area maintain their status when the PC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed The EM Area is divided into banks and the addresses can be set by either of the following methods Changing the current bank using the EMBC 281 instruction and set ting addresses for the current bank Setting bank numbers and addresses directly EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number of the first bank 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 15 Extended Data Memory EM Area Index Registers IRO to IR15 Store PC memory addresses for indirect addressing Index registers can be used independently in each task One register is 32 bits 2 words 9 16 Index Registers Programming Manual 6 2 Index Registers Task Flag Area 24 32 TK0000 to TK0031 Task Flags are read only flags that are ON when the corresponding cyclic task is executable and OFF when the corresponding task is not executable or in standby status
88. Link Note A TCP IP header must be attached to the FINS command for an Ethernet Net work and a Host Link header must be attached to the FINS command for a Host Link Network Supports Network Relay Up to three network levels including the local network can be bypassed to access other Racks Network 2 Network 1 Network 3 Access to CPU Unit Plus Other Devices on Racks The CPU Unit CPU Bus Units personal computers boards and other devices can be identified and specified using unit addresses Personal computer board 51 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 2 5 3 Communications Network System The following network systems can be configured when using CJ series Units Ethernet Message Communications Host computer to PC PC to PC or Host computer pe Ethernet Unit FTP Server Function Host computer to PC Transmission of files to Memory DP Card installed in CPU Unit SEHDESpretocd Socket Service Controller Link Unit Controller Link Simple Network configuration twisted pair cables optical fiber cables Data link and message communications Large capacity flexible and effective data links Message communications and large capacity data transmission Links between PC and personal computer Device Net Co
89. NT ALOO1 E Link Adapter CPU Unit Signa Pin Signal Signa Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin RS 232C Pin Signa name bo o30d No name name No RS 422A No name name No e No name FG 7 1 NC GRD 1 1 GRD NC 1 14 FG SD 2 SD SG 2 SG SD 2 SD RD 3 RD SDB 3 A 8 SDB RD 3 3 RD RS 4 RS SDA 4 4 SDA RS 4 4 R RS232C RS 232C b Interface Interface CS 5 cs RDB 5 T 5 RDB cs 5 5 CS 6 5V RDA 6 T U 6 RDA 5V 6 6 5V DR 7 DR CSB 7 1 7 CSB DR 7 7 DR ER 8 ER CSA 8 1 8 CSA ER 8 2 1 8 ER SG 9 SG SG 9 iv 9 SG RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 i D sub 9 pin connector D sub 9 pin DIP Switch Settings male connector Pin 1 ON Sv n PES Pin 3 OFF power 7 Pin 4 OFF Pin 5 OFF See note 2 Pin 6 ON DIP Switch Settings Pin 1 ON RE 2 ON ais erminating resistance Pin 3 OFF s NT AL001 E Link Adapter oompunications Board Unit Pin 4 OFF can rens B Sm E Pin Signal Signal Pin RS 232 Pin Signal Ein Bore No Bains name No SAN No Rane 1 GRD NC 1 n 1 FG 2 SG SD L 2 SD 3 SDB RD 3 3 RD Rg 232C 4 SDA RS 4 Ll 4 RS Interface 5 RDB cs 5 5 cs 6 RDA 5V 6 86 6 5V 7 csB DR 7 no 7 DR 8 CSA ER 8 8 ER SG 9 9 SG Bese erase D sub 9 pin connector DIP Switch Settings male Pin 1 ON Pin 2 ON terminating resistance Pin 3 OFF Pin 4 OFF Pin 5 OFF Pin 6 ON Note 1 We recommend using the followi
90. OFF response time will be 300 us maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays CJ1W ID232 DC Input Unit MIL Connector 32 Points Circuit Configuration Number of simultaneously ON points Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC 10 is Input Impedance 5 6 kQ Input Current 4 1 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage ON Current 19 0 V DC min 3 mA min OFF Voltage OFF Current 5 V DC max 1 mA max ON Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup OFF Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup No of Circuits 32 16 points common 2 circuits Number of Simultaneously ON Points 75 12 points common at 24 V DC Refer to the following illustration Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR ter minal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max Weight 70 g max Accessories None to e A4 IN15 ag ay 1000pF xe esee mer iL COMO 560 Q o SW Input indicator g ae 5 6 kQ Ei INOO Io ANN to 5 a INI5 3 AYR 1000 pF hal com COMI 560 Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs Ambient Temperature Characteristi
91. Program Write the program with the CX Programmer or a Programming Console Transferring the Program CX Programmer Only Introduction 10 11 12 Section 4 1 With the PC in PROGRAM mode transfer the program from CX Program mer to the CPU Unit Testing Operation a Checking I O Wiring Output wiring With the PC in PROGRAM mode force set output bits and check the status of the corresponding outputs Input wiring Activate sensors and switches and either check the status of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the corresponding input bits with the Programming Device s Bit Word Monitor operation b Auxiliary Area Settings As Required Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the follow ing Output OFF When necessary turn ON the Output OFF Bit A50015 Bit from the program and test operation with the outputs forced OFF Hot Start Set When you want to start operation switch to RUN mode tings without changing the contents of I O memory turn ON the IOM Hold Bit A50012 c Trial Operation Test PC operation by switching the PC to MONITOR mode d Monitoring and Debugging Monitor operation from the Programming Device Use functions such as force setting force resetting bits tracing and online editing to de bug the program Saving and Printing the Program Running the Program Switch the PC to RUN mode to run the program 95 Examples 4 2 Examples
92. Purpose Changing the program while it is being executed Function Use the online editing function from a Programming Device Several instruction blocks can be changed with CX Programmer Sampling I O Memory data Periodic sampling e Sampling at the end of each cycle Sampling at execution of TRSM 045 gt Data trace at regular intervals Data trace at the end of each cycle Data trace each time that TRSM 045 is executed Specifying the start up operating mode Set the PC Setup to specify the desired operating mode at start up Startup Mode Recording the time that power was turned on the last time that power was interrupted the number of power interruptions and the total PC on time These items are recorded automati cally in the Auxiliary Area Stopping the program for instruction execution errors Set the PC Setup so that instruction errors are treated as fatal errors Instruction Error Operation Manual Programming Manual W394 Reference 7 2 3 Online Editing 7 2 4 Data Tracing 6 4 Startup Settings and Mainte nance 6 4 5 Clock Functions 2 3 3 Checking Programs Programming monitoring the PC remotely Programming or monitor ing a PC on the network through Host Link Programming or monitor ing a PC through modems Host Link Network Gateway func tion Host Link through modems Programming monitoring PCs in ot
93. RECEIVE DELIVER COMMAND File Memory Instructions Instruction Mnemon READ DATA FILE FREAD column in the following table ic Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions 2 character directory file name in binary When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length OFF execution time us 73 character directory file name in binary 2 character directory file name in text format 73 character directory file name in text format WRITE DATA FILE Display Instructions Dodd nd N 2 character directory file name in binary 73 character directory file name in binary 2 character directory file name in text format 73 character directory file name in text format When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length steps See note DISPLAY MSG 046 3 MESSAGE Clock Instructions Instruction CALENDAR ADD ON execution time us 14 8 Conditions Displaying message OFF execution time us 0 29 11 8 Deleting displayed message When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Mnemonic Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions OFF execution time us CALENDAR SU
94. See also DeviceNet components CPU Unit 29 62 Power Supply Units 83 Condition Flags 232 connectors 132 connector pin arrangement 80 RS 232C connectors 370 contact protection circuit 316 control panels installation 112 Controller Link 53 conversion instructions execution times 258 cooling fan 110 Counter Area 221 counters execution times 252 CPU Bus Unit Area capacity 58 CPU Bus Units 31 data exchange 183 error information 216 errors 284 I O allocations 177 202 222 Initialization Flags 209 326 memory area 202 related flags bits 350 Restart Bits 209 341 setting area capacity 58 settings 236 setup errors 284 specifications 42 CPU Racks description 32 373 maximum current consumption 55 troubleshooting 289 CPU Unit 62 capabilities 30 components 29 62 connections 31 CPU errors 276 dimensions 66 DIP switch 30 64 indicators 30 initialization 239 operation 238 240 RS 232C port connections 365 CQMI PROOI E Programming Console 76 crimp terminals 128 CS1 Basic I O Units wiring 131 CS1 CPU Bus Unit Area 202 CS1 CPU Bus Units See also CPU Bus Units current consumption 55 tables 57 CX Programmer 77 99 peripheral servicing 239 cycle time computing 243 249 effects of online editing 247 errors 282 example calculations 247 flags 209 maximum cycle time 209 323 present cycle time 209 323 setting 154 162 Cycle Time Too Long Flag 216 332 D data ar
95. Set the PT communications settings for a 1 N NT Link Either one or up to eight PTs can be connected to each PC Expanded System Configuration 1 N Mode RS 232C LI 1 N Mode L y RS 4 Peripheral port RS 232C Unit RS 232C Yes Yes Yes Section 2 5 Applicable port Serial CPU Unit Communi cations See note 1 See note 2 RS 232C to RS 422 485 Conversion Adapter Note 1 Turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit and set the serial communications mode in the PC Setup for an NT Link 22A 485 2 Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit and set the serial communications mode in the qm PI i PT PC Setup for an NT Link Note 1 Protocol Macros The The PC can be connected to any PT port that supports 1 N NT Links It cannot be connected to the RS 232C ports on the NT30 or NT30C be cause these ports support only 1 1 NT Links The NT20S NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C can not be used if the CPU Unit s cycle time is 800 ms or longer even if only one of these PTs is connected The Programming Console functionality of a PT Expansion Function can be used only when the PT is connected to the RS 232C or peripheral port on the CPU Unit It cannot be used when connected to an RS 232C or RS 422A 485 port on
96. Setup operation for an instruction error Opera CPU Unit operation will stop and the tion when ERR ALM indicator will light when instruc this flag goes ON tion error The task number where the error has occurred will be stored in A294 and occurred the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 A29509 Indirect DM This flag and the Access Error Flag 1 Not BCD Cleared Cleared A294 EM BCD AER will be turned ON when an 0 Normal A298 Error Flag indirect DM EM BCD error has A299 occurred and the PC Setup has been PC Setup Set to stop operation an indirect DM Opera EM BCD error This error occurs tion when when the content of an indirectly instruc addressed DM or EM word is not tion error BCD although BCD mode has been has selected CPU Unit operation will occurred stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 A29510 Illegal This flag and the Access Error Flag 1 Illegal Cleared Cleared A294 Access AER will be turned ON when an access A298 Error Flag illegal access error has occurred and occurred A299 the PC Setup has been set to stop Normal con PC Setup operation an illegal access error dition Opera This error occurs when a region of tion when memory is access illegally CPU instruc Unit operation will stop and the ERR tion error ALM indic
97. Task Pro cessing Time in A440 and see if the Cycle Time Watch Time can be changed The cycle time can be reduced by divid ing unused parts of the program into tasks jumping unused instructions in tasks and disabling cyclic refreshing of Special I O Units that don t require fre quent refreshing System FALS error 282 SYS FAIL FALS C101 to C2FF A40106 FALS Error Flag FALS 007 has been exe cuted in the program The error code in A400 will indicate the FAL number The leftmost digit of the code will be C and the rightmost 3 digits of the code will be from 100 to 2FF Hex and will cor respond to FAL numbers 001 to 511 Correct according to cause indicated by the FAL number set by user Error Processing Section 11 2 Non fatal Errors System FAL error Program ming Console display SYS FAIL FAL Error code in A400 4101 to 42FF A non fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in RUN or MONITOR mode Power Supply Unit Indicator POWER ERR ALM pow por E Connect a Programming Console to display the error message The cause of the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary Area flags and words CPU Unit Indicators Errors are listed in order of importance When two or more errors occur at the same time the more serious error s error code will be recorded in A400 Flag and word data
98. The hood FG is also electrically connected to pin 1 FG but the connection resistance between the shield and the FG is smaller for the hood To reduce contact resistance between the hood FG and the FG connect the shield both to the hood FG and to pin 1 FG Power Supply Unit CPU Unit E SM x Shield and GR connected Ground to 1009 internally or less The hood will be grounded if the GR terminal is grounded 369 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E Wiring Connectors Use the following procedures to wire connectors Preparing the Cable Lengths for steps in the procedure are provided in the diagrams Connecting the Shield Line to the Hood FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables 2 Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath being careful not to damage the braiding ETE IL A eC QU RISSIE RESIES 40 mm RS 232C 3 Use scissors to cut away all but 10 mm of the exposed braiding ORO SIRER L 10 mm a 4 Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire 5 mm 5 Fold the braiding back over the end of the sheath Ss 6 Wrap aluminum foil tape over the top of the braiding for one and a half turns E
99. Unit will be refreshed in an interrupt task by IORF 097 sev eral Special I O Units are being used and you don t want to extend the cycle time or the cycle time is so short that the Special I O Unit s internal pro cessing can t keep up Special I O Units can be refreshed from the program with IORF 097 Takes effect at the start of opera tion 155 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 7 2 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Basic I O Unit Input Response Time IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup 156 The input response time can be set for Basic I O Units by Rack and Slot num ber Increasing this value reduces the effects of chattering and noise Decreasing this value allows reception of shorter input pulses but do not set the ON response time or OFF response time to less than the cycle time Pulses shorter than the input response time are not received Input such as a proximity switch Input bit Input response time Input response time The default setting for the input response time is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 to 32 ms When the input response time is set to 0 ms the only delay will be the delays in the Unit s internal elements For information on the Unit s inter nal elements refer to Appendix A Specifications of Basic I O Units and High density I O Units and check the input response time for the Unit that you are using The input response time settings are transferred
100. Using Auxiliary Bits Studying the cycle time Troubleshooting Manual Operation Manual Reference SECTION 2 Specifica tions and System Configura tion SECTION 8 I O Alloca tions and Data Exchange 5 2 3 Assembled Appear ance and Dimensions 5 2 Installa tion 3 1 2 Com ponents Appendix B Auxiliary Area and 9 10 Auxiliary Area 10 3 2 Cycle Time Overview 11 2 4 Error Messages Structured Programming 12 Standardizing programs as modules Developing a program with several programmers work ing in parallel Making the program easier to understand Program with tasks to divide the pro gram specify symbols and define local and global symbols Programming Manual W394 4 1 Tasks Creating step programs Use the step instructions Using BASIC like mne monic instructions to pro gram processes that are difficult to enter in the lad der diagram format such as conditional branches and loops Use the block programming instruc tions Instructions Reference Manual W340 Step Pro gramming Instructions Block Pro gramming Instructions Function Tables Section 1 3 Simplifying the Program Purpose Creating looped program sections Function Use FOR 512 and NEXT 513 or JMP 004 and JME 005 Manual Instructions Reference Manual W340 Reference Sequence Control Instructions Indirectly addr
101. VD Number of simultaneously ON points 26 32 points at 55 C 26 points at 55 C 10 L 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C Ambient Temperature Terminal Connections CN1 CN2 I O word m 1 B a lOword m I O word m 2 AB I O word m 3 LE pars ED EU pa 2 nn 10 te Lu oo gg sfs nu afs 22 LT 305 Appendix A Specifications of Basic I O Units The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same polarity be set for rows A and B e COMO COM1 COM2 and COM3 have two pins each Although they are internally connected wire all points completely Note The ON response time will be 20 us maximum and OFF response time will be 400 us maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays CJ1W OC201 Contact Output Unit Terminal Block 8 Points Circuit Configuration 306 Max Switching Capacity 2 A 250 V AC cos 1 2 A 250 V AC cos 0 4 2 A 24 V DC 16 A Unit Min Switching Capacity 1mA5V DC Service Life of Relay Electrical 150 000 operations 24 V DC resistive load 100 000 operations 240 V AC cos 0 4 inductive load Mechanical 20 000 000 operations Service life will vary depending on the connected load Refer to page 315 for information on service life according to the load Relay replacement NY 24W K IE Fujitsu Takamizawa Component Ltd Relays cannot b
102. a Serial Communications Unit A PT implementing Programming Console functionality and a PT imple menting normal PT functionality cannot be used at the same time When more than one PT is connected to the same PC be sure that each PT is assigned a unique unit number Malfunctions will occur if the same unit number is set on more than one PT The 1 1 and 1 N NT Link protocols are not compatible with each other i e they are separate serial communications protocols CX Protocol is used to create data transmission procedures protocols for general purpose external devices according to the communications speci fications half duplex or full duplex asynchronous of the general purpose external devices The protocols that have been created are then recorded in a Seri the al Communications Unit enabling data to be sent to and received from external devices by simply executing the PMCR 260 instruction in the CPU Unit Protocols for data communications with OMRON devices such as Temperature Controller Intelligent Signal Processors Bar Code Readers and Modems are supported as standard protocols See note 47 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 Note The standard protocols are provided with the CX Protocol and Serial Commu nications Unit Host computer Protocol CX Protocol or PSS Support S Ee software
103. accessed in word units only These words retain their content when the PC is turned on or the operat ing mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode Word D00000 D20000 t Special I O Unit Area 10 words Unit D29599 77s D30000 1X0 770000000007 0707070777 CPU Bus Unit Area 100 words Unit D31599 t D32767 The EM Area is a multi purpose data area that can be accessed in word units only These words retain their content when the PC is turned on or the operat 193 I O Memory Areas Timer Area Counter Area Condition Flags Clock Pulses Task Flag Area TK Index Registers IR Data Registers DR 194 Section 9 2 ing mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode The EM Area is divided into 32 767 word regions called banks The number of EM banks depends upon the model of CPU Unit with a maximum of 13 banks 0 to C Refer to 2 1 Specifications for details on the number of EM banks provided in each model of CPU Unit Word Word EO 00000 E2 00000 EO 32767 E2 32767 There are two timer data areas the Timer Completion Flags and the Timer Present Values PVs Up to 4 096 timers with timer numbers T0000 to T4095 can be used The same number is used to access a timers Completion Flag and PV Timer Completion Flags These flags are read as bits A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system when the co
104. allocated to a Basic I O Unit on an Expansion Rack because of the Expansion Rack s starting word setting 1 Duplication detected 0 No duplica tion Cleared Cleared A40113 A41700 to A41715 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Num ber Flags When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A40207 is turned ON and the bit in A417 corresponding to the unit number of the Unit where the error occurred is turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A40207 338 A41800 to A42315 Special I O Unit Error Unit Num ber Flags When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a Special I O Unit the Special I O Unit Error Flag A40206 will be turned ON Each bit corresponds to a unit num ber Bit 00 in A418 to bit 15 in A423 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95 The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash Bits A41800 to A42315 correspond to unit numbers 000 to O5F 0 to 95 The unit number of the Unit where the error occurred is indicated in A417 If the unit number of the Unit is uncertain none of the flags will be turned ON The flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1
105. and Condition Flags can be specified seamlessly with PC memory addresses It isn t necessary to specify the data area n addition to basic indirect addressing the PC memory address in an Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register auto incre mented or auto decremented These functions can be used in loops to Index Registers Section 9 16 read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one each time that the instruction is executed With the offset and increment decrement variations the Index Registers can be set to base values with MOVR 560 or MOVRW 561 and then modified as pointers in each instruction 1 0 Memory Set to a base value with MOVR 560 or MOVRW 561 Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I O memory and generate an Illegal Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers Refer to Appendix E Memory Map for details on the limits of PC memory addresses The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing I O memory with Index Registers IRLI represents an Index Register from IRO to IR15 Variation Function Syntax Example Indirect addressing The content of IRL is treated as LD IRO Loads the bit at the PC the PC memory address of a bit or memory address contained word in IRO Indirect addressing The constant prefix is added to the Constant IR LD 5 IRO Adds 5 to the contents
106. at the start of an interrupt task When an Index Register will be used in an interrupt task always set a PC memory address in the Index Register with MOVR 560 or MOVRW 561 before using the register in that task Each Index Register task is processed independently so they do not affect each other For example IRO used in Task 1 and IRO used in Task 2 are dif ferent Consequently each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers 227 Index Registers Section 9 16 Limitations when Using Index Registers It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed within the cycle from the Programming Devices CX Programmer or Pro gramming Console If using Index Registers with the same number to perform multiple tasks it is only possible with the Programming Devices to read the Index Register value for the last task performed within the cycle from the multiple tasks Nor is it possible to write the Index Register value from the Programming Devices It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host Link commands or FINS commands The Index Registers cannot share tasks between them Monitoring and Sharing Index Registers It is possible to monitor or share Index Registers as follows To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for each task or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link com mands or FINS commands write a program to store Index Regi
107. bps User defined settings Set the communications mode host link NT Link no protocol or peripheral bus and other settings such as the baud rate See notes 1 and 2 for details on no protocol mode Note 1 A no protocol transmission delay address 162 can be set in no protocol mode The operation of this delay is shown in the following diagram No protocol delay Delay Transmission TXD 236 Time 2 The following table shows the message formats that can be set for trans missions and receptions in no protocol mode The format is determined by the start code ST and end code ED settings From 1 to 256 bytes can be received in no protocol mode Start code setting End code setting None Yes CR LF None DATA DATA ED DATA CR LF Yes ST DATA ST DATA ED ST DATA CR LF 161 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Scheduled Interrupt Time Units Instruction Error Operation Minimum Cycle Time Watch Cycle Time 162 Note Note This setting determines the time units for the scheduled interrupt interval set tings Set the scheduled interrupt interval from the program with MSKS 690 This setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode p Scheduled Interrupt Time Units Interval Scheduled interrupt task This setting determines whether instruction execution errors are treated as non fa
108. con humidity and ensure that the ambi PC is in a control panel densation ent humidity remains within the allowed range Check that the PC is not in Not in direct sunlight Protect the PC if necessary direct sunlight Check for accumulation of No accumulation Clean and protect the PC if neces dirt dust salt metal filings sary etc Check for water oil or chemi No spray on the PC Clean and protect the PC if neces cal sprays hitting the PC sary Check for corrosive or flam No corrosive or flammable Check by smell or use a sensor mable gases in the area of the gases PC Check the level of vibration or Vibration and shock must Install cushioning or shock absorb shock be within specifications ing equipment if necessary Check for noise sources near No significant noise Either separate the PC and noise the PC sources source or protect the PC 294 Replacing User serviceable Parts Section 12 2 No Item Inspection Criteria Action Installation and Check that each Unit is con No looseness Press the connectors together wiring nected and locked to the next completely and lock them with the Unit securely sliders Check that cable connectors No looseness Correct any improperly installed are fully inserted and locked connectors Check for loose screws in No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phil external wiring lips head screwdriver Check crimp conne
109. contains 960 words with addresses ranging from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 Words in the Special I O Unit Area are allocated to CJ to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit Each Unit is allocated 10 words based on its unit number setting Data is exchanged with Special I O Units once each cycle during I O refresh ing which occurs after program execution The words can also be refreshed with IORF 097 Special I O Unit CPU Unit Special I O Unit Area 10 words Unit 203 Special I O Unit Area Forcing Bit Status Special I O Unit Area Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation 204 Section 9 6 Each Special I O Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number as shown in the following table Unit number Allocated words CIO 2000 to CIO 2009 CIO 2010 to CIO 2019 CIO 2020 to CIO 2029 CIO 2030 to CIO 2039 CIO 2040 to CIO 2049 CIO 2050 to CIO 2059 CIO 2060 to CIO 2069 CIO 2070 to CIO 2079 CIO 2080 to CIO 2089 CIO 2090 to CIO 2099 CIO 2100 to CIO 2109 CIO 2110 to CIO 2119 CIO 2120 to CIO 2129 CIO 2130 to CIO 2139 CIO 2140 to CIO 2149 CIO 2150 to CIO 2159 CIO 2160 to CIO 2169 CIO 2170 to CIO 2179 2 dqj o jOoj O1 BR OW PP HAH oO CIO 2950 to CIO 2959 The function of the 10 words allocated to a Unit depends upon the Special I O Unit being used For details refer to the Unit s Operation Manual Words in t
110. data links between PCs so that data can be shared without programming and FINS message communications between PCs which enable separate control and data transfer when required The Controller Link Network connections use either twisted pair cables or optical fiber cables Data links and message com munications are also possible between the PC and personal computer Data links enable large capacity and free allocations FINS message communica tions also allow large capacity data transfer Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit Control S Link upport Board Controller Link Free allocation Data link 53 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 DeviceNet is a multi vendor network consisting of multi bit control and infor mation systems and conforms to the Open Field DeviceNet specification Connecting a DeviceNet Master Unit to the network enables remote I O com munications between the PC and the Slaves on the network Remote l O communications enable large capacity I O and user set allocations Analog l O Terminals are used for the Slaves Message communications are possible between PCs and between the PC and DeviceNet devices manufactured by other companies DeviceNet CompoBus D DeviceNet Master Unit DeviceNet Master Unit DeviceNet Slaves Communications Network Overview Network Communications Device Ethernet Unit Function Communications Ethernet FINS message commu
111. error log just like system generated errors User defined error condition FAL 006 or FALS 007 error Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time between execution of FPD 269 and execution of a diagnostic output and finding which input is preventing an output from being turned ON i as FPD A ee Input preventing C diagnostic output 4 gt from going ON The error log contains the error code and time of occurrence for the most recent 20 errors user defined or system generated errors The CJ series PCs record information useful for maintenance such as the number of power interruptions and the total PC ON time Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Other Functions Data Trace Function Fixed Cycle Time Function I O Refreshing Methods Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode PC Setup Functions Windows based Support Software The content of the specified word or bit in O memory can be stored in trace memory by one of the following methods scheduled sampling cyclic sam pling or sampling at execution of TRSM 045 Specified address in O memory Trace memory A fixed minimum cycle time can be set to minimize variations in I O response times I O refreshing can be performed cyclically and immediately by programming the immediate refreshing variation of the instruction The CPU Unit can be set to execute peripheral servicing perio
112. for CJ series PCs By connecting an I O Control Unit to the CPU Rack and I O Interface Units to Expansion Racks up to 3 Expansion Racks can be connected The CPU Rack can contain up to 10 Units as can each of the 3 Expansion Racks enabling a total of up to 40 Units Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Two I O Allocation The need for Backplanes was eliminated enabling the following two methods Methods for allocating I O 1 Automatic I O Allocation at Startup I O is allocated to the connected Units each time the power is turned ON same as CQM1H PCs 2 User set I O Allocation If desired the user can set I O tables in the same way as for the CS series PCs The default setting is for automatic I O allocation at startup but the user can set the PC to automatically use I O tables to enable checking for Unit connec tion errors or to allocate unused words Allocate Unused Words The CX Programmer can be used to allocate unused words in I O tables for transfer to the CPU Unit This enables keeping words unallocated for future use or to enable system standardization modularization Structured Programming Division of the Program When the program is divided into tasks that handle separate functions control into Tasks systems or processes several programmers can develop these separate tasks simultaneously There can be up to 32 regular cyclically executed tasks and 256 interrupt tasks There are two types of interrupts
113. from a Pro gramming Device and two Racks have overlapping word allocations or a Rack s starting address exceeds CIO 0901 Bits 00 to 03 correspond to Racks 0 to 3 The corresponding flag will be cleared when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared 337 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim Related Words Bits a startup ing Eu change A41000 t O A41015 CPU Bus Unit Num ber Duplica tion Flags The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when an CPU Bus Unit s unit number has been dupli cated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light 1 Duplication detected 0 No duplica tion Cleared Cleared A40113 A41100 to A41615 Special I O Unit Num ber Duplica tion Flags The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corresponding flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special I O Unit s unit num ber has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit num bers 0 to F Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond to unit numbers 000 to O5F 0 to 95 CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The corresponding bit will also be turned ON when the Special I O Unit s words are also
114. has been restarted Retained Cleared A30200 to A30215 Special O Unit Restart Bits A502 to A507 A50200 to A50715 Turn these bits ON to restart initialize the Spe cial I O Unit with the corre sponding unit number Bits A50200 to A50715 corre spond to unit numbers 0 to 95 When a restart bit is turned ON the corresponding Special I O Unit Initializing Flag A33000 to A33515 will be turned ON Both the restart bit and initializing flag will be turned OFF automatically when initial ization is completed 0 to 1 Restart 1 to 0 Restart completed Turned OFF by the system when the Unit has been restarted Retained Cleared A33000 to A33515 Differenti ate Moni tor Com pleted Flag Trace Trig ger Moni tor Flag Busy Flag AS50809 ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been established during execu tion of differentiation moni toring This flag will be cleared to 0 when differentiation mon itoring starts 1 Monitor con dition estab lished 0 Not yet established Retained Cleared A50811 ON when a trigger condi tion is established by the Trace Start Bit A50814 OFF when the next Data Trace is started by the Sampling Start bit A50815 1 Trigger con dition estab lished 0 Not yet established or not tracing Retained A50812 ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has been complete
115. indirect IR COMPLE MENT Reversing words Reversing indirect IR 259 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps el d Instruction DOUBLE COMPLE MENT Special Math Instructions Length steps See note ui l When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length execution time us 0 67 Reversing words Section 10 4 OFF execution time us 1 29 Reversing indirect IR column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us BINARY ROOT ROTB 620 3 530 7 0 29 BCD SQUARE ROOT ROOT 072 3 514 5 0 29 ARITHMETIC PRO APR 069 4 32 3 Designating SIN and COS 0 37 CESS 78 3 Designating line segment approximation FLOATING POINT FDIV 079 4 176 6 0 37 DIVIDE BIT COUNTER BCNT 067 4 22 1 Counting 1 word 0 37 When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length ON steps execution See note time us Floating point Math Instructions OFF execution time us Instruction Mnemonic Conditions FLOATING TO 16 BIT FLOATING TO 32 BIT 16 BIT TO FLOATING 32 BIT TO FLOATING FLOATING POINT ADD FLOATING POINT SUB TRACT FLOATING POINT DIVIDE FLOATING POINT MULTI PLY A A DEGREES TO RADIANS
116. instruction sending a FINS command to the local CPU Unit FREAD FWRIT instructions Program replacement using the control bit in the Aux iliary Area Easy backup operation Read only Memory Card Detected Flag A34315 ON when a Memory Card has been detected OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected Read only Number of Items to Transfer A346 to A347 These words contain the number of words or fields remaining to be transferred 8 digit hexadecimal Read only Accessing File Data Flag A34314 ON while file data is being accessed Read only EM File Memory Format Error Flag A34306 ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank allocated for file memory Read only EM File Memory Starting Bank A344 Contains the starting bank number of EM file mem ory bank number of the first formatted bank Read only File Deletion Flags A39506 The system automatically deleted the remainder of an EM file memory file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred Read only A39507 The system automatically deleted the remainder of a Memory Card file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred Read only Memory Card Start up Transfer Error Flag A40309 ON when automatic transfer at start up has been selected and an error occurs during automatic trans fer An error will occur if there is a transfer error the specified file do
117. may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory Mem ory Card or EM file memory to the I O area CIO of the CPU Unit using a peripheral tool Otherwise the devices connected to the output unit may mal function regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another node or changing contents of the I O memory area Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in injury Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction XV Operating Environment Precautions 4 4 Operating Environment Precautions Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to dust espe
118. of the leftmost and rightmost bytes in the words Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Range specified in the instruction Data Search find maximum find minimum etc Record table Instructions Record table instructions operate on specially defined data tables The record table must be defined in advance with DIM 631 which declares the number of words in a record and the number of records in the table Up to 16 record tables can be defined Record tables are useful when data is organized in records As an example if temperatures pressures or other set values for various models have been combined into a table the record table format makes it easy to store and read the set values for each model The SETR 635 can be used to store the first address of the desired record in an Index Register Index Registers can then be used to simplify complicated processes such as changing the order of records in the record table search ing for data or comparing data Record 2 Table Set values for model A Record 2 Temperature setting Pressure setting Time setting Troubleshooting Functions Failure Diagnosis FAL 006 and FALS 007 Failure Point Detection FPD 269 Error Log Functions Maintenance Functions 10 The FAL 006 and FALS 007 can be used to generate a non fatal or fatal error when the user defined conditions are met Records of these errors are stored in the
119. off If the I O Hold Bit is turned ON the outputs from the PC will not be turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode Make sure that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs When opera I O Area Input Bits Normal I O Refreshing Immediate Refreshing 1 2 3 Section 9 3 tion stops for a fatal error including those produced with the FALS 007 instruction all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the inter nal output status will be maintained A bit in the I O Area is called an input bit when it is allocated to an Input Unit Input bits reflect the ON OFF status of devices such as push button switches limit switches and photoelectric switches There are three ways for the status of input points to be refreshed in the PC normal I O refreshing immediate refreshing and IORF 097 refreshing The status of I O points on external devices is read once each cycle after pro gram execution In the following example CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1 an external switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit The ON OFF status of switch 1 is reflected in CIO 000101 once each cycle Ladder symbol Mnemonic 000101 LD 000101 Ar CPU Unit Input Unit Bit allocation Swith1 gt L se _ i CIO 000101 When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by inpu
120. on the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly Do not short the battery terminals or charge disassemble heat or incin erate the battery Do not subject the battery to strong shocks Doing any of these may result in leakage rupture heat generation or ignition of the battery Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or oth erwise subjected to excessive shock Batteries that have been subjected to shock may leak if they are used UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced technicians Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries After connecting Power Supply Units CPU Units I O Units Special I O Units or CPU Bus Units together secure the Units by sliding the sliders at the top and bottom of the Units until they click into place Correct oper ation may not be possible if the Units are not securely properly Be sure to attach the end cover provided with the CPU Unit to the rightmost Unit CJ series PCs will not operate properly if the end cover is not attached Conformance to EC Directives Applicable Directives Concepts Note EMC Directives Low Voltage Directive EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products
121. regis tered I O tables and actual I O I O setting error occurs fatal error With out Backplanes and due to the physical connection method it is essentially impossible for a Unit to fall off or for an empty position to be created Discrepan cies between the registered I O tables and actual I O are thus considered to be far more serious I O verify error occurs non fatal error Setting first word on each Rack Supported Supported Startup Mode when a Program ming Console is not mounted and the PC Setup is set to use operat ing mode specified on the Pro gramming Console RUN mode PROGRAM mode Serial communications ports One peripheral port and one RS 232C port Serial com Peripheral port Same Peripheral bus Programming Console Host Link 1 N NT Link munications RS 232C port modes Same Peripheral bus Host Link 1 N NT Link no protocol Communications commands FINS commands Host Link commands Index registers Same Diagnostic functions Same Error log function Same Debugging functions Same Force set reset differential monitor data traces instruction error traces I O response time setting func tions Same Battery 20 CPM2A BAT01 CS1W BAT01 SECTION 2 Specifications and System Configuration This section provides tables of standard models Unit specifications system configurations and a comparison betwee
122. removing the Memory Card If the I O Hold Bit is turned ON the outputs from the PC will not be turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode Make sure that the exter nal loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs When operation stops for a fatal error including those produced with the FALS 007 instruction all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places xvii Application Precautions xviii 5 where the power supply is unstable An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short cir cuiting may result in burning Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input volt age Excess voltages may result in burning Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the maximum switching capacity Excess voltage or loads may result in burning Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests Not
123. running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera tion Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Changing the operating mode of the PC Force setting force resetting any bit in memory Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the con tents of the DM Area HR Area and other data required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit Doing either of these may break the cables Conformance to EC Directives 6 6 6 1 6 2 Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines Doing so may break the cables When replacing parts be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in malfunc tion or damage When transporting or storing circuit boards cover them in antistatic mate rial to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage temperature Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your bare hands There are sharp leads and other parts
124. setting The expected results will not be achieved and the Interrupt Task Error Flag A40213 will be turned ON if IORF 097 is executed in an interrupt task during normal I O refreshing Special I O Unit CPU Unit These settings determine whether or not data will be exchanged with the 10 words allocated to each Special I O Unit in the Special Special I O Unit Area during cyclic I O V Unit refreshing Area 165 SECTION 8 I O Allocations and Data Exchange This section describes I O allocations to Basic I O Units and CPU Bus Units and data exchange with CPU Bus Units 8 1 8 2 VO Allocations ete e tte tea ede ue 8 1 1 Basic VO Units leseseeeeeeeee e 8 1 2 TO Allocation to Basic I O Units 000 8 1 3 Allocating the First Word for Each Rack 8 1 4 Reserving I O Words for Expected Changes 8 1 5 TO Allocation to Special I O Units 0004 8 1 6 I O Allocation to CPU Bus Units 00 0 8 1 7 I O Table Registration 00 0 eee eee eee 8 1 8 Procedures for Registering I O Tables Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units eee 822 1 Special VO UNDIS evectus RD AR A eo See ee SEE 8 2 2 CPU Bus Units i440 Risa be eh NEU Te ee Re TS 168 169 170 175 176 176 177 178 181 181 181 183 167 I O Allocations Section 8 1 8 1 I O Allocations In CJ series PCs part of the I O mem
125. status when power to the PC is turned ON the con tents of the CIO Area the Work Area part of the Auxil iary Area timer Completion Flag and PVs Index Registers and the Data Registers will be saved for up to 20 days 9 2 3 Data Area Prop erties Sending commands to a Host Link computer FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by executing Network Communications Instructions from the PC 2 5 2 Systems Remote programming and monitoring Host Link communications can be used for remote program ming and remote monitoring through a Controller Link Sys tem or Ethernet network 2 5 3 Communications Network System Programming Manual 6 4 7 Remote Program ming and Monitoring Three level communications Host Link communications can be used for remote program ming and remote monitoring from devices on networks up to two levels away Controller Link Network Ethernet Network or other network 2 5 2 Systems Storing comments in CPU Unit I O comments can be stored in the CPU Unit in Memory Cards or EM file memory Programming Manual 5 1 5 Applications CX Programmer User Manual I O Comments Program check Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction and instruction errors CX Programmer can also be used to check programs Programming Manual 2 3 Checking Programs Control output signals RUN output Th
126. tasks affected by changes have to be modified when there are changes such as changes in specifications Several consecutive program lines can be modified with online editing The amount the cycle time is extended during online editing has been reduced Change Program When separate tasks have been programmed for different production models Arrangement Easily the task control instructions can be used to switch the program quickly from production of one model to another Step Control and Block The step control and block programming instructions can be used to control Programming repetitive processes that are difficult to program with ladder programming alone Comments Several types of comments can be added to the program to make it easier to understand including Rung comments and I O comments Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Port specific Protocol Macros Create Protocol Macros for All Ports Protocol macros can be used to create versatile communications functions for any of the PC s communications ports The communications functions can have host link NT Link or protocol macro configurations and can be directed to RS 232C and RS 422 485 ports on any of the Units All together a CPU Unit can support a maximum of 32 ports In addition up to 16 ASCII Units can be connected The ASCII Units can be used to create pro tocol functions with BASIC programs Host Computer Programming Device Serial Communications
127. the load or something else that caused an over current to flow Replace Unit Not all inputs turn OFF Input circuit is faulty Replace Unit Specific bit does not turn ON 1 Input device is faulty Replace input devices 2 Input wiring disconnected Check input wiring 3 Terminal block screws are loose Tighten screws Replace terminal block connector 5 Too short ON time of external input Adjust input device 6 Faulty input circuit Replace Unit 4 Faulty terminal block connector contact 7 Input bit number is used for output instruction Correct program Specific bit does not turn OFF 1 Input circuit is faulty Replace Unit 2 Input bit number is used for output instruction Correct program Input irregularly turns ON OFF 1 External input voltage is low or unstable Adjust external input voltage to within rated range 2 Malfunction due to noise Take protective measures against noise such as 1 Increase input response time PC Setup 2 Install surge suppressor 3 Install insulation transformer 4 Install shielded cables between the Input Unit and the loads 3 Terminal block screws are loose Tighten screws 4 Faulty terminal block connector contact Replace terminal block connector Error occurs in units of 8 points or 16 points i e for the same common Tight
128. the process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time See note Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used and the conditions when the instruction is executed The top line for each instruction in the following table shows the minimum time required to process the instruction and the necessary execution conditions and the bottom line shows the maximum time and execution conditions required to process the instruction The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length steps column The number of steps required in the user program area for each of the CJ series instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps depending upon the instruction and the operands used with it The number of steps in a pro gram is not the same as the number of instructions Program capacity for CS CJ series PCs is measured in steps whereas pro gram capacity for previous OMRON PCs such as the C series and CV series PCs was measured in words Basically speaking 1 step is equivalent to 1 word The amount of memory required for each instruction however is differ ent for some of the CS CJ series instructions and inaccuracies will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PC is converte
129. the C200H High density I O Units and CS series I O Units with connectors to make them compatible Available Connectors Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable CJ series 32 and 64 point I O Units with Fujitsu compatible Connectors Applicable Units CJ1W ID231 Input Unit 24 V DC 32 inputs CJ1W ID261 Input Unit 24 V DC 64 inputs CJ1W OD231 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs 32 outputs CJ1W OD261 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs 64 outputs Applicable Cable side Connectors Connection OMRON set Fujitsu parts Solder type C500 CE404 Socket FCN 361J040 AU Connector bar FCN 360C040 J2 Crimped C500 CE405 Socket FCN 363J040 Connector bar FCN 360C040 J2 Contacts FCN 363J AU Pressure welded C500 CE403 FCN 367J040 AU CJ series 32 and 64 point I O Units with MIL Connectors Applicable Units Model Specifications CJ1W ID232 Input Unit 24 V DC 32 inputs CJ1W OD232 MIL connector Transistor Output Unit with Sourcing Outputs 32 outputs 132 Wiring Section 5 3 Applicable Cable side Connectors Connection Pins OMRON set Daiichi Denko Industries part Pressure welded 40 XG4M 4030 T FRC5 A040 3T0S a We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 or AWG 28 0 2 mm to 0 08 mm Use cable with external wire diameters of 1 61 mm max Wiring Procedure 1 2 3 1 Check that each Unit is installed sec
130. the GR terminal when testing insulation and dielectric strength Testing the insulation and dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the GR terminals connected will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit 2 Supported only when mounted to CPU Rack CPU Unit Components and Functions Section 2 2 2 2 CPU Unit Components and Functions 2 2 1 CPU Unit Components LED Indicators Refer to following table Slider Memory Card Indicators Secures the next Unit MCPWR green Lit when power is supplied to Memory Peripheral Port Card Connected to Programming Devices BUSY orange Lit when such as a Programming Console or Memory Card is being host computers Refer to 3 1 CPU accessed Units for details Memory Card Power je Supply Switch Press the power supply switch aa to disconnect power before Te removing the Memory Card Also press the Memory Card a Power Supply Switch to perform an easy backup operation RS 232C Port Connected to Programming Devices excluding Programming Consoles Host Computers general purpose external devices Programmable Terminals and other devices Refer to 3 1 CPU Units for details PERIFHERAL o Memory Card Connector Connected to the next Unit Memory Card Connector Connects the Memory Memory Card Eject Button Press the eject button to remove the Memory Card from
131. the Internal I O Area or other unused words in the CIO Area It is possible that these words will be assigned to new functions in future versions of CJ series CPU Units so the program may have to be changed before being used in a new CJ series PC if CIO Area words are used as work words in the program Words in the Work Area can be used only in the program they cannot be used for I O exchange with external I O terminals No new functions will be assigned to this area in future versions of CJ PCs so use this area for work words and bits before any words in the CIO Area Word 15 0 Bit W000 W511 Words in the Holding Area can be used only in the program These words retain their content when the PC is turned on or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode I O Memory Areas Auxiliary Area AR Temporary Relay Area TR Data Memory Area DM Extended Data Memory Area EM Section 9 2 ord 45 0 Bit H000 511 The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used to monitor and control PC operation This area is divided into two parts A000 to A447 are read only and A448 to A959 can be read or written Refer to 9 10 Auxiliary Area for details on the Auxiliary Area Word 15 0 Bit A000 A447 A448 A959 The TR Area contains bits that record the ON OFF status of program branches The TR bits are used with mnemonics only The DM Area is a multi purpose data area that can be
132. the following wiring methods for RS 232C especially in environment prone to noise 1 Use shielded twisted pair cable for communications cables The following RS 232C cables are recommended UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS RVV SB UL approved Fujikura Ltd AWG28x5P IFVV SB not UL approved UL2464 SB MA 5Px28AWG 7 0 127 UL approved Hitachi Cable Ltd CO MA VV SB 5Px28AWG 7 0 127 not UL approved 2 Use a twisted pair cable for each signal line and SG signal ground to connect the CPU Unit to a communications partner Also bundle all the SG lines at the Unit and at the other device and connect them together 3 Connect the shield line of the communications cable to the hood FG of the RS 232C connector at the Unit Also ground the protective earth GR terminal of the Power Supply Units on the CPU Rack and the CJ series Expansion Racks to a resistance of 100 Q or less The following example shows connecting 368 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E SD SG RD SG RS SG and CS SG for Serial Communications Mode using a twisted pair cable using the peripheral bus Actual wiring SG signal line External device SG signal lines bundled together Note The hood FG is internally connected to the protective earth GR terminal on the Power Supply Unit through the CPU Rack or CJ series Expansion Rack FG can thus be connected by connecting the pro tective earth GR terminal on the Power Supply Unit
133. the number of I O points 2 The maximum number of Units that can be connected is 40 3 Some CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to an Expansion Rack 2 3 Basic System Configuration CJ series CPU Rack A CJ series CPU Rack can consist of a CPU Unit a Power Supply Unit Basic I O Units Special I O Units CPU Bus Units and an End Cover A Memory Card is optional An I O Control Unit is required to connect an Expansion Rack 31 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 CJ series Expansion A CJ series Expansion Rack can be connected to the CPU Rack or other CJ Racks series Expansion Racks An Expansion Rack can consist of an I O Interface Unit a Power Supply Unit Basic I O Units Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units and an End Cover 1 0 Units CPU Rack Basic I O Units Special Power Supply Unit CPU Unit I O Control Unit I O Units CPU Bus Units Memory Card End Cover i I O Units Expansion Rack Basic I O Units Power Supply Unit Special I O Units CPU Bus Units End Cover 2 3 1 CJ series CPU Rack A CJ series CPU Rack consists of a CPU Unit a Power Supply Unit various l O Units and an End Cover Up to 10 I O Units can be connected I O Control Unit See note Power Supply Unit CPU Unit End Cover PROGR I
134. to FFFFFFFF 0 to 429 496 729 5 ms 0 1ms units after mode change startup ing flags set tings Present Cycle Time These words contain the present cycle time in 8 digit hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A265 and the rightmost 4 digits in A264 0 to FFFFFFFF 0 to 429 496 729 5 ms Program Execution Time Prior ity Periph eral Servicing Time Total of all slice times for program execution and all slice times for peripheral servicing A267 A266 Upper bytes Lower bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex 0 0 to 429 496 729 5 ms 0 1 ms increments Cleared Cleared Task Num ber when Program Stopped This word contains the task number of the task that was being executed when program execution was Stopped because of a program error A298 and A299 contain the program address where program execution was stopped Normal tasks 0000 to 001F task 0 to 31 Interrupt tasks 8000 to 80FF task 0 to 255 Cleared Cleared 323 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim Related Words Bits egi startup ing a Set change A29508 Instruction This flag and the Error Flag ER will 1 Error Flag Cleared Cleared A294 Processing be turned ON when an instruction ON A298 Error Flag processing error has occurred and 0 Error Flag A299 the PC Setup has been set to stop OFF PC
135. to the Basic l O Units when the PC is turned ON When the Units settings are changed they are stored in A220 to A259 Actual Input Response Times for Basic I O Units When the settings in the PC Setup have been changed with the PC in PROGRAM mode the PC Setup settings will differ from the actual settings in the Units In this case the values in A220 to A259 can be checked to see the input response times actually set in the Units The IOM Hold Bit A50012 can be turned ON to retain all of the data in I O Memory when the CPU Units operating mode is switched between PRO GRAM mode and RUN MONITOR mode When the PC is turned on the IOM Hold Bit itself will be cleared OFF unless it is protected with this PC Setup setting If the IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is ON the status of the IOM Hold Bit will be protected when the PC is turned on If this setting is ON and the IOM Hold Bit itself is ON all data in l O memory will be retained when the PC is turned on Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected the IOM Hold Bit will be cleared whether this setting is ON or OFF OFF 0 IOM Hold Bit cleared at start up of I O memory OFF of I O memory Non retained parts Power NON Non retained parts Cleared ode switch Retained Power on Not retained IOM Hold Bit 1 IOM Hold Bit 0 4 Not retained when ON OFF power is turned on ON 1 IOM Hold Bit protec
136. to the Memory Card Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for three seconds Restoring from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit To read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit turn ON the PC power This operation is given priority over automatic transfer pin 2 is ON when power is ON Verifying contents of Memory Card Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for three seconds 64 Always OFF Note The following data cannot be overwritten when pin 1 is ON All parts of the user program programs in all tasks All data in the parameter area such as the PC Setup and I O table When pin 1 is ON the user program and parameter area will not be cleared when the memory clear operation is performed from a Programming Device omron SYSMAC CJ1G CPU44 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER 87654321 CPU Units Section 3 1 Note The language displayed for the CJ series CPU Units is not set on the DIP switch but rather is set using Programming Console keys 3 1 3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map The memory of CJ series CPU Units is configured in the following blocks Memory Parameter Area and I O Memory Area See Note 1 Refer to Appendix E Memory Map for details on the memory User memory Ladder programs The memory block and user memory block have battery back up using the CPM2A BATO1 Battery Set If the battery voltage is low the data in these areas will be erased
137. using an an air conditioner Install surge pro tectors or other noise reducing equipment at noise sources Is noise being controlled Check the struc ture of the panel and the installa tion site Is the installation environment okay See note Yes Note Check for corrosive gases flammable gases dust dirt salts metal dust direct light water oils and chemicals 288 Troubleshooting Racks and Units 11 3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units CPU Racks and Standard Expansion Racks Symptom POWER indicator is not lit PCB short circuited or damaged Section 11 3 Replace Power Supply Unit 1 Error in program Correct program 2 Power line is faulty Replace Power Supply Unit RUN output does not turn ON RUN indicator lit CJ1W PA205R Internal circuitry of Power Supply Unit is faulty Replace Power Supply Unit Serial Communications Unit or CPU Bus Unit does not operate or malfunc tions Bits do not operate past a certain point Error occurs in units of 8 points I O bit turns ON All bits in one Unit do not turn ON 1 The I O Connecting Cable is faulty 2 The I O bus is faulty Replace the I O Connecting Cable Replace the I O Control Unit or I O Interface Unit 289 Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11 3 CJ Long distance Expansion Racks Symptom CPU Unit won t operate No response to Programmin
138. vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 5 Installation and Wiring eere 5 1 5 2 Fail safe Ci Installation TCUIS A7 S oA ook o bei E UR ar eR afe SECTION 6 DIP Switch Settings 2 5 52 uc mr PR nmn 6 1 6 2 Overview Details SECTION 7 PC Setup i253 casi ser en I WR enses Vc PVP RIDES 7 1 PC Setup 7 2 Explanations of PC Setup Settings 00 0 ee eee eee SECTION 8 T O Allocations and Data Exchange VO Allocations eve beg EUDev 9ekbc bue sere rk eid Ebnerqs pP RI re 8 2 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units 8 1 SECTION 9 Memory Areas oaa cuc neo Ra wer tuv pev ep db ERES 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 18 Introduction rere pe y eme pee e Eee ee eee i e e Ree EE I O Memory Areas eee tere ein Se de Geeta bie bee oe sey I O Area Data Tam ATCase bee beni bane gle tpe eg heed qtio iie ed CPU BussUnit Area ook tts tit ea ohh ee ak at oie he tae Se Special I O Umit Area e Rae bee Bet bias eC M et in BRAY DeviceNet Area 0 ehh hn Internal T OPA rea 15 cere 4 ences rece eue ur epe eR AERE RAE UU Holding Areas 4s acne yes fee fae Fe EE OL Es NER PI RU en Ud ded Auxiliary Area iib rues RADU Ia REP S UR Ud ORA ea e SO ea de e eg TR Tempo Timer Area rary Relay Mea ee cst kv eus epe ER ely tud bu ed Ria be edu Counter Area 2x duo OREL Pe AE NUDO
139. will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable RUN status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn t been executed INI or is in standby WAIT status These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks only they do not reflect the sta tus of interrupt tasks The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases regardless of the status of the IOM Hold Bit 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONI TOR mode or vice versa 2 The PC s power supply is cycled The Task Flags cannot be force set and force reset 231 Condition Flags Section 9 19 9 19 Condition Flags Summary of the Condition Flags Error Flag These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution In earlier PCs these flags were in the SR Area The Condition Flags are specified with labels such as CY and ER or with symbols such as P_Carry and P_Instr_Error rather than addresses The sta tus of these flags reflects the results of instruction execution but the flags are read only they cannot be written directly from instructions or Programming Devices CX Programmer or Programming Console Note The CX Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with P All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks so the sta tus of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error occurred
140. word 0000 to 0002 Hex Bank 0 to C2 Hex Retained Retained Written when EM file for matting is performed PC Setup EM File Memory Function Setting and EM File Mem ory Start ing Bank setting Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Words Bits Name Number of Remaining Words to Transfer Function These words contain the 8 digit hexadecimal number of words remaining to be transferred by FREAD 700 or FWRIT 701 When one of these instructions is executed the number of words to be trans ferred is written to A346 and A347 While the data is being transferred the value in these words is decre mented A326 contains the rightmost 4 digits and A347 contains the leftmost 4 digits Check the content of these words to determine whether or not the planned number of words have been transferred successfully Settings Data remain ing in transfer Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Cleared Write tim ing Written as FREAD or FWRIT is being exe cuted Decre mented as data is actually trans ferred Related flags set tings A35100 to A35107 A35108 to A35115 A35200 to A35207 A35208 to A35215 A35300 to A35307 A35308 to A35315 A35400 to A35407 Calendar Clock Area These words contain the CPU Unit s internal clock data in BCD The clock can be set from a Programm
141. words A220 to A259 Actual input response times for Basic I O Units New setting s effective ness Takes effect at startup IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup 0 Cleared 1 Retained Default 0 This setting determines whether or not the status of the IOM Hold Bit 450012 is retained at star tup When you want all of the data in I O Memory to be retained when the power is turned on turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this set ting to 1 ON A50012 IOM Hold Bit Takes effect at startup 0 Cleared 1 Retained Default 0 This setting determines whether or not the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit A50013 is retained at startup When you want all of the bits that have been force set or force reset to retain their forced status when the power is turned on turn ON the Forced Status Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 ON A50013 Forced Status Hold Bit Takes effect at startup 149 Item Startup Mode Address in Programming Console Word Bit s Settings PRON Programming Console s mode switch PRG PRO GRAM mode MON MONI TOR mode RUN RUN mode Default PRCN Function This setting determines whether the Startup Mode will be the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch or the mode set here in the PC Setup If this setting is PRCN and a Programming Console isn t c
142. 0 Q to improve noise resistance and prevent electric shock GR Ground terminal Ground this terminal to less than 100 Q to prevent electric shock 128 Wiring Section 5 3 To help prevent electrical shock ground the ground terminal GR with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q using a 14 gauge wire minimum cross sectional area of 2 mm e The line ground terminal LG amp is a noise filtered neutral terminal If noise is a significant source of errors or electrical shocks are a problem connect the line ground terminal to the ground terminal and ground both with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q The ground wire should not be more than 20 m long The following grounding configurations are acceptable The CJ series PCs are designed to be mounted so that they are isolated separated from the mounting surface to protect them from the effects of noise in the installation environment e g the control panel Control panel 1 Control panel 2 GR terminal GR terminal on CPU Rack on Expansion Rack 2 GR crossover GR termina on Expansion Rack 1 GR terminal on Expansion Rack 3 Do not ground multiple control panels separately but connect the GR terminals of each Rack and ground to a resistance of less than 100 Q Do not share a ground line with other equipment CJ series
143. 004 000005 AND 000002 s OUT 000003 i THES di LD TRO NETT cd AND 000004 OUT 000005 In this example a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch point without a separate execution condition Instruction Operand 000000 LD 000000 OUT TRO AND 000001 OUT 000002 LD TRO OUT 000003 A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the instruction block 000000 000001 Instruction Operand C LD 000000 OUT 000001 000002 NE OUT 000002 000000 Instruction Operand f 000001 fip 000000 OUT 000001 000002 000003 AND 000002 s OUT 000003 The 4 096 timer numbers T0000 to T4095 are shared by the TIM TIMH 015 TMHH 540 TTIM 087 TIMW 813 and TMHW 815 instruc 219 Timer Area Section 9 12 tions Timer Completion Flags and present values PVs for these instructions are accessed with the timer numbers The TIML 542 and MTIM 543 instructions do not use timer numbers When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data the timer number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer When a timer number is used in an operand that requires word data the timer number accesses the PV of the timer Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary as normally open and normally closed condit
144. 00N 100 cm PFP 100N2 100 cm Secure the DIN Track to the control panel using M4 screws separated by 210 mm 6 holes or less and using at least 3 screws The tightening torque is 1 2 N m PFP 100N2 DIN Track 4 5 1000 PFP 100N 50N DIN Track 7 340 15 3540 3 2740 15 15 5 p PFP 50N dimensions are given in parentheses DIN Track End Plates 2 required Model number PFP M ini 123 Installation Section 5 2 5 2 7 Connecting CJ series Expansion Racks CS CJ series I O Connecting Cables are used to connect the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks CS CJ series I O Connecting Cables The CS Cu series I O Connecting Cables have connectors with a simple lock mechanism are used to connect the CPU Rack to an Expansion Rack or to connect two Expansion Racks i Model number Cable length CS1W CN313 0 3m CS1W CN713 0 7m CS1W CN223 2m CS1W CN323 3m CS1W CN523 5m CS1W CN133 10m CS1W CN133B2 12m Install the Racks and select I O Connecting Cables so that the total length of all I O Connecting Cables does not exceed 12 m The following diagram shows where each I O Connecting Cable must be connected on each Rack The Rack will not operate if the cables aren t connected properly The up direction is towards the CPU Unit and down is away from the CPU Unit CPU Rack
145. 01 to 42FF correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 2FF 0 to 511 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 FALS 006 error occurred 0 FALS 006 not executed Cleared Cleared Written when error occurs A360 to A391 A400 A403 A40300 to A40308 Memory Error Loca tion When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag A401 15 is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A40300 User program A40304 PC Setup A40305 Registered I O Table A40307 Routing Table A40308 CPU Bus Unit Settings When a memory error occurs the CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The corresponding flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A40115 335 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim related Words Bits aner startup ing pi da change A40309 Memory Card Start up Transfer Error Flag ON when automatic transfer at start up has been selected and an error occurs during automatic transfer An error will occur if there is a transfer error the specified file does not exist or the Memory Card is not installed This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared by turning the power off The error cannot be cleared without tur
146. 1 24 V DC 16 inputs Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID231 24 V DC 32 inputs See note MIL connector CJ1W ID232 24 V DC 32 inputs See note Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID261 24 V DC 64 inputs See note Note The cable side connector is not provided with Units equipped with cables Purchase the cable separately see page 132 or use an OMRON Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit or I O Terminal see page 135 Basic Output Units Specifications Number Mountable Racks of bits C series CJ series allocated cpy Rack Expansion Racks Relay Output Units Terminal block 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A CJ1W OC201 8 points independent contacts Terminal block 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A CJ1W 0C211 16 points Sinking Terminal block 12 to 24 V DC 0 5 A CJ1W OD 1 1 outputs 16 outputs put Units Fujitsu compatible connector 12 to 24 V DC CGJ1W OD231 0 5 A 32 outputs See note 1 Fujitsu compatible connector 12 to 24 V DC CU1W OD261 0 3 A 64 outputs See note 1 Sourcing Terminal block 24 V DC 0 5 A 160utputs CJ1W OD212 outputs load short circuit protection MIL connector 24 V DC 0 5 A 320utputs CJ1W OD232 load short circuit protection See note 1 Note 1 The cable side connector is not provided with Units equipped with cables Purchase the cable separately see page 132 or use an OMRON Con nector Terminal Block Conversio
147. 1 Instruction being exe cuted 0 Instruction not being exe cuted Retained Cleared Written when file memory instruc tion is executed A34314 Accessing File Data Flag ON while file data is being accessed Use this flag to prevent two file mem ory instructions from being executed at the same time The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins 1 File being accessed 0 File not being accessed Retained A34315 Memory Card Detected Flag ON when a Memory Card has been detected OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected 1 Memory Card detected 0 Memory Card not detected Retained Written when Memory Card is inserted or the power is turned ON 328 EM File Memory Starting Bank Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory bank number of the first formatted bank All EM banks from this starting bank to the last bank in EM are formatted for use as file memory To convert the EM Area for use as file memory first set the PC Setup s EM File Memory Function setting to 1 set the PC Setup s EM File Mem ory Starting Bank setting 0 to 2 and then format the EM Area from a Programming Device The PC Setup s EM file memory set tings won t agree with the actual set tings unless the EM Area is formatted after the PC Setup s EM file memory settings have been changed In that case the actual set tings can be determined with this
148. 1 setup errors 284 specifications 41 words allocated to Special I O Units 203 222 special math instructions execution times 260 specifications 21 communications 55 CS1 CPU Bus Units 42 CS1 Special I O Units 41 functions 25 general 27 Input Units 40 Output Units 40 299 performance 22 peripheral port 80 RS 232C port 80 Special I O Units 41 stack instructions 9 execution times 261 stack processing execution times 261 standby errors 277 standby operating errors 277 startup mode setting 150 158 Step Flag 321 step instructions execution times 262 subroutine instructions execution times 262 subroutines execution times 262 Support Software See also personal computer switch settings 96 CPU Unit 64 peripheral port 80 Power Supply Units 83 RS 232C port 82 See also DIP switch symbol math instructions execution times 256 system configuration 21 basic 31 Host Link 45 NT Link 46 serial communications 43 T task control instructions execution times 266 Task Error Flag 325 Task Flags 231 tasks description 4 instruction execution times 266 related flags bits 209 See also interrupt tasks Task Flags 231 terminal blocks 131 text strings instruction execution times 265 instructions 9 Timer Area 219 timers execution times 252 Too Many I O Points error 279 Index TR Area 219 tracing data tracing 11 See also data tracing troubleshooting 271 overv
149. 1 024 characters String Compari LD AND 670 4 86 2 Comparing 1 character with 1 charac 86 2 son Instructions OR 671 lt gt 4 ter lt gt lt 672 lt 4 28 1 ms Comparing 2 047 characters with 28 1 ms lt gt gt 673 lt 4 2 047 characters 674 gt 4 675 gt 4 Task Control Instructions TASK ON TKON When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the distil table sein ial Length steps See note eih time us 26 3 OFF execution time us 0 21 TASK OFF 266 TKOF a 26 3 0 21 Power OFF Operation Guidelines on Converting Program Capacities from Previous OMRON PCs Section 10 5 Guidelines are provided in the following table for converting the program capacity unit words of previous OMRON PCs SYSMAC C200HX HG HE CVM1 or CV series PCs to the program capacity unit steps of the CS CJ series PCs Add the following value n to the program capacity unit words of the previ ous PCs for each instruction to obtain the program capacity unit steps of the CS CJ series PCs CS CJ steps a words of previous PC n Instructions Variations Value of n when Value of n when converting from converting from C200HX HG HE to CV series PC or CS CJ CVM1 to CS CJ Basic OUT SET RSET instructions or KEEP 011 1 Other instructions 0 Upward Differentiation None Im
150. 1 3 Initialization The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the power is turned ON or the operating mode is changed switched between RUN or MONITOR mode and PROGRAM mode e Check I O e Create a table of actual Units I O allocations Compare the I O table and the actual Units 239 CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 10 2 Clear the non holding areas of I O memory Perform the following for the IOM Hold Bit and PC Setup IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup IOM Hold Bit 450012 Auxiliary bit PC Setup setting IOM Hold Bit Status at Star tup Clear OFF Programming Console Hold ON address Word 80 bit 15 Clear OFF At power ON Clear At mode change Clear Hold ON At power ON Clear At mode change Hold At power ON Hold At mode change Hold Canceling Forced Set Reset The following is performed for the Force Status Hold Bit and PC Setup Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup Forced Status Hold Bit A50013 Clear OFF Hold ON At power ON Clear At power ON Clear At mode change Clear At mode change Hold At power ON Hold At mode change Hold Auxiliary bit PC Setup setting Forced Status Hold Bit Sta tus at Startup Programming Console address Word 80 bit 14 Clear OFF Hold ON If an autoboot program is present on the Memory Card that is inserted the program will be loaded automatically
151. 1 ms units Default 00 This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 218 is set to 1 Takes effect at the start of opera tion Can t be changed during opera tion Time Slice for Instruction Execution Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode Time Slice for Peripheral Servicing 00 05 to FF Hex Default 00 Hex 00 Disable priority servicing 05 to FF Time slice for instruc tion execution 5 to 255 ms in 1 ms increments 00 to FF Hex Default 00 Hex 00 Disable priority servicing 01 to FF Time slice for periph eral servicing 0 1 to 25 5 ms in 0 1 ms increments A266 and A267 Units Ports for Priority Servicing 154 00 10 to 1F 20 to 2F E1 FC FD Hex Default 00 Hex 00 Disable priority servicing 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit num ber 10 Hex 20 to 2F CJ series Special I O Unit unit number 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD Peripheral port Takes effect at the start of opera tion Can t be changed during opera tion PC Setup Section 7 1 Item Power OFF Interrupt Task Address in Programming Console Power OFF Detection Delay Time Word Bit s Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default 0 Function When this setting is set to 1 the power OFF interrupt task will be executed when power is inter rupted Related flags and words 00 to 0A 0 to 10 ms 1 ms u
152. 19 0 V DC min 3 mA min OFF Voltage OFF Current 5 V DC max 1 mA max ON Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup OFF Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup No of Circuits 64 16 points common 4 circuits Number of Simultaneously ON 50 16 points common at 24 V DC Refer to the Points following illustrations Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR ter minal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max 304 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Weight 110 g max Accessories None Circuit Configuration A lt INI5 d COMOC 1000pF COMO Nob sy 5009 to S macer INI Input indicator SMcang COMI Lp leircuit COM 5 amp 6ko f moo to Internal circuits ON1 Uu A4 INIS L riga coM26 1000 pF an M il com2 INOO 560 Q to By IN15 o COM3 Internal circuits CN2 Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs Ambient Temperature Characteristic 64 points 64 points 64 points at25 C at 35 C 70 voltage 20 4 VDC 60 50 40 Input voltage 24 VD 45 points at 55 C l 30 Input voltage 26 4
153. 2 ON when there was an overrun error Bit 13 ON when there was a timeout error Bits 14 and 15 Not used B a Bit 11 ON when there was a B See Function column Instruc tion Info Macro Area Out put Words A604 to A607 After the subroutine speci fied in MCRO 099 has been executed the results of the subroutine are trans ferred from A604 through A607 to the specified desti nation words output parameter words Output data 4 words Communi cations Periph eral Port Settings Changing Flag Communi cations 344 RS 232C Port Set tings Changing Flag A61901 ON while the peripheral port s communications set tings are being changed This flag will be turned ON when STUP 237 is exe cuted and it will be turned OFF after the settings have been changed 1 Changing 0 Not chang ing Retained A61902 ON while the RS 232C port s communications set tings are being changed This flag will be turned ON when STUP 237 is exe cuted and it will be turned OFF after the settings have been changed 1 Changing 0 Not chang ing Retained Cleared Auxiliary Area Appendix B Classifi Name Addresses Function Settings Status Statusat Write Related cation Word Bit after startup timing Flags or mode Settings change Communi Communi A620 A62001 The corresponding flag wi
154. 200 V insert the varistor between the con tacts Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following diagram This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is opened However when the contacts are closed the contacts may be welded due to the current charged in the capacitor DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads If appropriate arc killers are used however DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads Inductive load Power supply 317 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Load Short circuit Protection for CJ1W OD212 OD232 Output Units As shown below normally when the output bit turns ON OUT the transistor will turn ON and then output cur rent lout will flow If the output lout is overloaded or short circuited exceeding the detection current Ilim the output current lout will be limited as shown in Figure 2 below When the junction temperature Tj of the output transistor reaches the thermal shutdown temperature Tstd the output will turn OFF to protect the tran sistor from being damaged and the alarm output bit will turn ON to light the ERR indicator When the junction temperature Tj of the transistor drops down to the reset temperature Tr the ERR indicator will be automati cally reset and the output curr
155. 200 to A20207 ON when a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR can be executed with the corre sponding port number Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports O to 7 Read only Communications Port Completion Codes A203 to A210 These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding port numbers when network instruc tions SEND RECV CMND or PMCR have been executed Words A203 to A210 correspond to com munications ports 0 to 7 Read only Communications Port Error Flags A21900 to A21907 ON when an error occurred during execution of a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 Read only 217 Auxiliary Area Function Peripheral Port Com munications Information Name Peripheral Port Communi cations Error Flag Address A39212 Section 9 10 Description ON when a communications error has occurred at the peripheral port Access Read only Peripheral Port Restart Bit A52601 Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port Read write Peripheral Port Settings Change Bit A61901 ON while the peripheral port s communications set tings are being changed Read write Peripheral Port Error Flags A52808 to A52815 These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the peripheral port Read write Peripheral Port PT Com munications Flags A3
156. 57 When program replace ment starts the program file name will be stored in ASCII File names can be specified up to eight char acters in length excluding the extension File names are stored in the following order A654 to A657 i e from the lowest word to the highest and from the highest byte to the lowest If a file name is less than eight characters the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining word will be filled with spaces 20 Hex Null characters and space characters can not be used within file names Example File name is ABC OBJ Retained Cleared Auxiliary Area Appendix B Note In CJ series PCs the following flags are provided in a special read only area and can be specified with the labels given in the table These flags are not contained in the Auxiliary Area Flag area Condition Code Area Error Flag Meaning Turns ON when an error occurs in processing an instructions indi cating an error end to the instruction Access Error Flag Turns ON when an attempt is made to access an illegal area The status of this flag is maintain only during the current cycle and only in the task in which it occurred Carry Flag Turns ON when there is a carry or borrow in a math operation when a bit is shifted into the Carry Flag etc Greater Than Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is greater than when a value exceeds a specifi
157. 6 flo 00000 TOS e The Memory Card will eject from the compartment 4 Remove the Memory Card cover when a Memory Card is not being used Note 1 Never turn OFF the PC while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card 2 Never remove the Memory Card while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card Press the Memory Card power supply switch and wait for the BUSY indicator to go OFF before removing the Memory Card In the worst case the Memory Card may become unusable if the PC is turned OFF or the Memory Card is removed while the Card is being accessed by the CPU 3 Never insert the Memory Card facing the wrong way If the Memory Card is inserted forcibly it may become unusable 73 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Installing the Memory Card into a Personal Computer HMC AP001 Memory Card Adapter 4 Memory Card Personal computer PC card slot c Note When a Memory Card is inserted into a computer using a Memory Card Adapter it can be used as a standard storage device like a floppy disk or hard disk 3 3 Programming Devices There are 2 types of Programming Devices that can be used Any of three models of Hand held Programming Consoles or the CX Programmer which is operated on a Windows computer The CX Programmer is usually used to write the programs and a Programming Console is then used to change the operating modes edit the programs and monitor a limited number of points The fol
158. 67 EM Area bank 0 20000 to 27FFF E1 00000 to E1 32767 EM Area bank 1 28000 to 2FFFF E2 00000 to E2 32767 EM Area bank 2 Appendix D PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Use the following coding sheets when setting the PC Setup from a Programming Console Address 10 8ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2ms 4ms 8ms 16 ms 32 ms 8ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2ms 4ms 8ms 16 ms 32 ms 355 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console 356 Address 11 Appendix D 8ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2ms 4ms 8ms 16 ms 32 ms Address Value Hex Rack 0 Slot 3 I O Response Time 8 ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 8 ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms Value Hex Rack 7 Slot 9 I O Response Time 8 ms No filter 0 5 ms 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix D Address 80 Address Value Hex IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup Retained Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup Retaine
159. 86 Error Processing Section 11 2 LS1 LS2 000002 000003 START 000500 LL Indicator o 000500 normal NO Check terminal voltage of 000500 with tester Replace terminal Replace fuse Monitor ON OFF block connector status of 000500 with Programming Device ABNORMAL ABNORMAL wiring correct NORMAL NORMAL Disconnect external wiring and check ter minal voltage of 000500 with tester Units with internal fuse NORMAL ABNORMAL Voltage normal Check output de Unit with Replace Output vice SOL1 out fuse Unit NO Indicators o inputs 000002 000003 normal Check terminal voltages of 000002 and 000003 with tester YES Check terminal voltages of 000002 and 000003 with tester Terminal screws loose NORMAL ABNORMAL ABNORMAL Remove external NORMAL wiring and mount Dummy Input Unit yes to check rA N wiring correct E Correctly wire Operation OK Tighten Replace terminal block connector NORMAL Replace Input Unit Check LS1 and LS2 Return to START Replace Input Unit 287 Error Processing Section 11 2 Environmental Conditions Check C Environmental conditions check Is the ambien temperature below 55 C Consider using a fan or cooler Is the ambient temperature above 0 C heater s the ambient humidity between 10 and 90 Consider
160. 89 FAL FALS flags 213 fatal errors 277 flags 232 Input Units 291 memory error flags 214 non fatal 283 Output Units 292 PC Setup errors 214 programming error flags 213 settings 153 Special I O Units 216 status after fatal errors 195 troubleshooting 271 273 288 user programmed errors 272 Ethernet 53 execution times 250 267 Expansion I O Racks troubleshooting 289 Expansion Racks description 38 maximum number allowed 38 F fail safe circuits 108 failure diagnosis instructions execution times 264 FAL Error Flag 213 FAL errors 283 flag 335 FALS Error Flag 213 FALS errors 282 flag 332 fatal errors 277 fatal operating errors 277 features 3 overview 2 file management overview 8 file memory 67 converting EM Area to file memory 224 file names 67 initializing 69 instruction execution times 263 related flags bits 211 212 file memory instructions execution times 263 file names 67 FINS commands 49 50 182 184 FINS messages 50 First Cycle Flag 209 321 349 flags table 321 floating point math instructions execution times 260 Index flowchart environmental conditions check 288 error processing flowchart 274 I O check 287 overall CPU operation 238 PC cycle 243 power supply check 285 Forced Status Hold Bit 209 340 functionality 12 G general specifications 27 Greater Than Flag 232 Greater Than or Equals Flag 232 grounding 128
161. 9400 to A39407 The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is communicating with a PT in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 Read only Peripheral Port PT Prior ity Registered Flags A39408 to A39415 The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 Read only RS 232C Port Com munications Information RS 232C Port Communi cations Error Flag A39204 ON when a communications error has occurred at the RS 232C port Read only RS 232C Port Restart Bit AS52600 Turn this bit ON to restart the RS 232C port Read write RS 232C Port Settings Change Bit A61902 ON while the RS 232C port s communications set tings are being changed Read write RS 232C Port Error Flags AS52800 to A52807 These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the RS 232C port Read write RS 232C Port Send Ready Flag No protocol mode A39205 ON when the RS 232C port is able to send data in no protocol mode Read only RS 232C Port Reception Completed Flag No protocol mode A39206 ON when the RS 232C port has completed the reception in no protocol mode Read only RS 232C Port Reception Overflow Flag No protocol mode A39207 ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the RS 232C port in no protocol mode
162. 96 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD 222 00 Peripheral port Not used A Unit Port for Priority Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number 0 to 15 10 Hex 20 to 7F CPU Special I O Unit unit number 0 to 96 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD Peripheral port 363 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix D Address Value Hex Power OFF Interrupt Power OFF Detection Task Delay Time Disabled Enabled Address Special I O Unit Cyclic Refreshing 0 Yes 1 No Unit number 11 10 7 Addresses 227 through 231 are the same as 226 364 Appendix E Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Connection Examples The wiring diagrams for connecting to the RS 232C port are provided in this appendix In actual wiring we rec ommend the use of shielded twisted pair cables and other methods to improve noise resistance Refer to Rec ommended Wiring Methods later in this appendix for recommended wiring methods Connections to Host Computers Note Connections to a computer running the CX Programmer are the same as those shown here 1 1 Connections via RS 232C Port
163. A40400 to A40407 I O Bus Error Rack Number A40408 to A40415 Note 1 Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting Units to each other 121 Installation Section 5 2 2 Always turn OFF the power supply to the entire system before replacing a Unit 3 A maximum of 10 I O Units can be connected to a CPU Rack or an Expan sion Rack If 11 or more I O Units are connected and I O overflow error will occur and the PC will not operate in either RUN or MONITOR mode If this occurs The I O Overflow Flag 440111 will turn ON and A40713 to A40715 I O Overflow Details 2 will turn ON 5 2 6 DIN Track Installation Use the following procedure to install a CJ series PC on DIN Track 1 2 3 1 Release the pins on the backs of the CJ series Units DIN Track mounting pins J 4 2 Fit the back of the PC onto the DIN Track by inserting the top of the track and then pressing in at the bottom of the PC as shown below DIN Track mounting pins 4 Install a DIN Track End Plate on each end of the PC To install an End Plate hook the bottom on the bottom of the track rotate the Plate to hook 122 Installation DIN Track and Accessories Section 5 2 the top of the Plate on the top of the track and then tighten the screw to lock the Plate in place End Plates Use the DIN Track and DIN Track End Plates shown below DIN Track Model numbers PFP 50N 50 cm PFP 1
164. AC DC Characteristic If the load is a relay or solenoid there is a time lag between the moment the cir cuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the surge protector in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the surge protector between the contacts Required element The capacitance of the capacitor must be 1 to 0 5 uF per contact current of 1 A and resistance of the resistor must be 0 5 to 1 Q per contact voltage of 1 V These values however vary with the load and the characteristics of the relay Decide these values from experi ments and take into consideration that the capacitance suppresses spark dis charge when the contacts are sepa rated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load when the circuit is closed again The dielectric strength of the capacitor must be 200 to 300 V If the circuit is an AC circuit use a capacitor with no polarity Diode method O C Inductive load The diode connected in parallel with the load changes energy accumulated by the coil into a current which then flows into the coil so that the current will be converted into Joule heat by the resistance of the inductive load This time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset caused by this method is longer than that caused by the CR method The reversed diel
165. B BCL 417 4 18 8 0 37 TRACT WITH CARRY SIGNED BINARY 420 4 0 58 Constant x constant gt word 0 37 MULTIPLY 2 62 Indirect IR x indirect IR gt 0 37 indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED L 421 4 11 19 0 37 BINARY MULTIPLY UNSIGNED BINARY U 422 4 0 58 Constant x constant word 0 37 ere 2 62 Indirect IR x indirect IR gt 0 37 indirect IR DOUBLE UNSIGNED UL 423 4 10 63 0 37 BINARY MULTIPLY BCD MULTIPLY B 424 4 12 8 0 37 DOUBLE BCD MULTI BL 425 4 35 2 0 37 PLY SIGNED BINARY 430 4 0 83 Constant constant word 0 37 DIVIDE 2 87 Indirect IR indirect IR gt 0 37 indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED L 431 4 9 8 0 37 BINARY DIVIDE 257 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE Constant constant gt word Indirect IR indirect IR gt indirect IR DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE BCD DIVIDE DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE Conversion Instructions Instruction column in the following table Mnemonic Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions To a word after converting to a con stant When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length OFF execution time us To a word after converting to indirect IR
166. BTRACT HOURS TO SECONDS SECONDS TO HOURS CLOCK ADJUSTMENT 263 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Debugging Instructions TRACE MEMORY TRSM SAMPLING Failure Diagnosis Instructions Instruction FAILURE ALARM Section 10 4 When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Code Length ON Conditions steps execution eee note time us OFF execution time us 120 0 1 06 ms Sampling 1 bit and 0 words Sampling 31 bits and 6 words When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table ON executio n time us Mnemonic Length Conditions steps See note OFF execution time us Recording errors Deleting errors in order of priority Deleting errors all errors Deleting errors individually SEVERE FAILURE ALARM FAILURE POINT DETECTION Other Instructions Instruction SET CARRY No message output Executing Initializing Executing Initializing Message output When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Mnemonic ON execution time us OFF execution time us Length Conditions steps See note CLEAR CARRY SELECT EM BANK EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE TIME Block Prog
167. C or from the PC to the personal computer Reading Writing EM File Memory Files Using Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Console 1 2 3 70 Data transfer direction Between CPU Unit and EM file memory File name and extension does OBJ tok OM kkk STD Program files Data files Parameter files 1 Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file memory in the PC Setup File Memory Section 3 2 2 Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device 3 Name the data in the CPU Unit and save in the EM file memory using the Programming Device 4 Read the EM file memory files to the CPU Unit using the Programming De vice Reading Writing Data Files in EM File Memory Using FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 File name and extension Data transfer direction Data files doter OM Between CPU Unit and EM file memory 1 2 3 1 Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file memory in the PC Setup 2 Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device 3 Using the FWRIT 701 instruction name the specified area in I O memory with a file name and save in the EM file memory 4 Using the FREAD 700 instruction read the I O memory files from the EM file memory to the I O memory in the CPU Unit Note The following files can be transferred between EM file memory and the CX Programmer File name and extension Data transfe
168. CJ series CS1G H CPUL IL EV1 CJ1G CPU Programmable Controllers Programming Manual Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS CJ series PCs SYSMAC CS CJ series CQM1H PROO1 E C200H PRO27 E CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Consoles Operation Manual Provides information on how to program and operate CS CJ series PCs using a Program ming Console SYSMAC CS CJ series CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CJ1G CPU CS1W SCB21 41 CS1W SCU21 CJ1W SCU41 Communications Commands Reference Manual Describes the C series Host Link and FINS communications commands used with CS CJ series PCs SYSMAC WS02 CXPLILI E CX Programmer User Manual SYSMAC WS02 CXP CX Server User Manual Provide information on how to use the CX Pro grammer a programming device that supports the CS CJ series PCs and the CX Net con tained within CX Programmer SYSMAC CS CJ series CS1W SCB21 41 CS1W SCU21 CJ1W SCU41 Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units Operation Manual Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit and Boards to perform serial communica tions with external devices including the usage of standard system protocols for OMRON prod ucts SYSMAC WS02 PSTC1 E CX Protocol Operation Manual Describes the use of the CX Protocol to create protocol macros as communications sequences
169. CJ1W OC201 8 pt relay output CJ1W OC211 16 pt relay output lt 27 Y RI Lc PERRO be i G Tale ale 90 Ire Td X G9 EO IO wal le s a E T 64 point Basic I O Units 32 point Basic I O Units Fujitsu compatible Connector MIL Connector CJ1W ID261 64 pt input CJ1W ID232 32 pt input CJ1W OD261 64 pt output CJ1W OD232 32 pt output Note Refer to individual Unit operation manuals for the dimensions of CJ series Special I O Units and CJ series CPU Bus Units 119 Installation Section 5 2 5 2 4 CJ series Unit Weights Model number CJ series Power Supply Unit CJ1W PA205R 350 g min CJ series CPU Units CJ1G CPU45 200 g min See note CJ1G CPU44 200g min See note I O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 70 g min I O Interface Unit CJ1W II101 130 g min See note CJ series Basic I O Units Input Units CJ1W ID21 1 110 g min CJ1W ID231 70 g min CJ1W ID232 70 g min CJ1W ID261 110 g min Output Unit
170. Cable p 2 XW2Z D Fujitsu connector Connecting Cable XW2Z D Fujitsu connector Two sets required Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2C 20G5 IN16 Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2C 20G5 IN16 135 Wiring Section 5 3 Connecting to I O Terminals The following Connecting Cables and I O Terminals are required to connect to terminal blocks CJ series 32 point Basic I O Units CJ series 64 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID231 Input Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W ID261 Input Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W OD231 Output Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W OD631 Output Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W ID232 Input Unit MIL connector CJ1W OD232 Output Unit MIL connector Connecting Cable G79 ILIC for Input Unit Fujitsu connector Connecting Cable G79 OL IC G79 ILIC for Output Unit Fujitsu connector for Input Unit Fujitsu connector G79 ILIC L D1 Two sets G79 OLIC for Input Unit MIL connector required for Output Unit Fujitsu connector G79 OLIC L D1 E A for Output Unit MIL connector Input Terminals Input Terminals G7TC ID16 Gre IRIG G7TC IA16 7TC IA16 i Output Terminals Output Terminals T G7TC OC16 G7TC OC16 G70D SOC16 L G70D SOC16 G70D FOM16 G70D FOM16 G70D ZOC16 4 Relays G70D ZOC16 3 Relays CJ1W OD232 only x
171. Console Appendix D Address 147LILII A Peripheral Port Value Hex Host link Unit No A Address 150LILII A Peripheral Port Value Hex NT Link Mode Maximum Unit No A Address 160 TA B RS 232C Port Value Hex Data bits Stop bits Value Hex Communications mode Default Rightmost 2 digits ignored Host link NT link No protocol Peripheral bus Host link 359 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix D Address 16101 A RS 232C Port 9 600 bps 300 bps 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps Note Set 0000 to 0009 Hex for standard NT Links and 000A Hex for high speed NT Links Address 162LL1 A RS 232C Port 0 ms 10 ms to 99 990 ms Address 163L ILILILI A RS 232C Port Value Hex Host link Unit No 360 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Address 164 Appendix D Value Hex No protocol Mode Start Code Address 165 A
172. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting resetting Counter Completion Flags I O Memory Areas Section 9 2 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas The data areas in the I O Memory Area are described in detail below CIO Area It isn t necessary to input the CIO acronym when specifying an address in the CIO Area The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges such as I O refreshing with various Units Words that aren t allocated to Units may be used as work words and work bits in the program only Word 45 o Bit CIO 0000 I O Area CIO 0079 CIO 0080 Not used See note 1 CIO 0999 CI O 1000 Data Link Area CIO 4499 CIO 1200 Internal I O Area CIO 1499 CIO 1500 CPU Bus Unit Area 25 words Unit CIO 1899 CIO 1900 Not used See note 2 CIO 1999 CIO 2000 Special Unit Area 10 words Unit CIO 2959 ClO 0960 Not used See note 2 ClO 3199 CIO 3200 CIO 3799 CIO 3800 DeviceNet Area Internal I O Area CIO 6143 Note 1 Itis possible to use CIO 0080 to CIO 0999 for I O words by making the ap propriate settings for the first words on the Racks Settings for the first words on the Racks can be made using the CX Programmer to set the first Rack addresses in the I O table The settings range for the first Rack ad dresses is from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900 2 The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled Not used may be used in pro gramming as work bits In the future howe
173. Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A40206 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim Related z after startup ing flags set Words Bits mode tings change A42600 t O A42611 Interrupt Task Error Unit Num ber An attempt was made to refresh a Special I O Unit s I O from an inter rupt task with IORF 097 while the Unit s I O is being refreshed by cyclic I O refreshing duplicate refreshing A42600 to A42611 contain the Spe cial I O Unit s unit number These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared Unit number 000 to 05F 0 to 95 Cleared Cleared A40213 A42615 A42615 Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag When A40213 the Interrupt Task Error Flag is ON this flag indicates the cause of the error The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash 1 Duplicated refreshing Cleared Cleared A40213 A42600 to A42611 A42700 to A42715 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags When an CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs A40203 and the bit in this word corresponding to the Unit s unit number are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash 1 Setting error 0 No setting error Cleared Cleared Written w
174. Expansion Rack power Supply CPU Unit Power U 1 O Interface Unit nr Supply Unit Down Down IZISIIS IIl The following diagram shows examples of proper Rack connections Con nect the simple lock connectors to the I O Control Unit on the CJ series CPU Rack and the I O Interface Unit on the CJ series Expansion Rack 124 Installation Section 5 2 Note The top and bottom of the connector are different Be sure the connector is facing the correct direction before connecting it Power CPU Unit l O Control Unit Supply Unit Ay E I CPU Rack 8 8 8 I O Interface Unit I O Connecting Cable Power Supply Unit l Expansion Rack Total cable I O Interface Unit l O Connecting Cable length 12 m max Power Supply Unit 8 8 li Expansion Rack E e I O Interface Unit l O Connecting Cable Power Supply Unit 9 8 e Expansion Rack 8 e I O Control Unit CPU Rack Simple lock connector Expansion Rack Simple lock connector Expansion Rack Connecting the Simple Locking Connectors Press the tabs on the end of the connector and insert the connector until it locks in place The PC will not operate properly if the connector isn t inserted completely 1 When using an I O Connecting Cable with a locking connector be sure
175. F CPU Bus Unit setup error A427 0500 to 055F Special I O Unit setup error Note 1 C101 to C2FF will be stored for FALS numbers 001 to 511 2 4101 to 42FF will be stored for FAL numbers 001 to 511 3 The contents of the error flags for a duplicate number error are as follows A428 to 433 See note 5 Bits 0 to 7 Unit number binary 00 to 5F Hex for Special I O Units 00 to OF Hex for CPU Bus Units Bits 8 to 14 All zeros Bit 15 Unit type 0 for CPU Bus Units and 1 for Special I O Units 4 Only the contents of A295 is stored as the error flag contents for program errors 5 0000 Hex will be stored as the error flag contents 348 Auxiliary Area Appendix B A20011 First Cycle Flag Execution started V 1oycle A20015 Initial Task Flag A20015 will turn ON during the first time a task is executed after it has reached executable status It will be ON only while the task is being executed and will not turn ON if following cycles Executable status 1 E Executed lt 1 cycle gt i i i Instruction Network communications in struction executed for port 0 za z A20200 0 FE Me The program is designed so that CMND 490 will be executed only when A20200 is ON 349 Auxiliary Area Appendix B A300 Error Record Pointer A100 A101 A102 A103 A104 i A300 TE Error record 1 Points to the next record to be used Example A100
176. File Write Error Flag ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is write pro tected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file memory The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins or data is written successfully 1 Write not possible 0 Normal con dition Retained Cleared Written when file data is written A34310 File Read Error ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction file is damaged or data is corrupted The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins or data is read suc cessfully 1 Read not possible 0 Normal con dition Retained Cleared Written when file data is read A34311 File Missing Flag ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn t exist or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that doesn t exist The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins or data is read suc cessfully 1 Specified file or directory is missing 0 Normal con dition Retained Cleared Written when file data is read A34313 File Memory Operation Flag ON while any of the following opera tions is being executed OFF when none of them are being executed CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local CPU Unit FREAD FWRIT instructions Program replacement using the con trol bit in the Auxiliary Area Easy backup operation The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins
177. I O Units Words are allocated to Basic I O Units based on the slot position left to right and number of words required The words are allocated consecutively and empty slots are skipped Words in the I O Area that aren t allocated to Basic l O Units can be used only in the program Bits in the I O Area can be force set and force reset The contents of the I O Area will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation 3 The I O Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the I O Area will be retained if FALS 007 is exe cuted If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON the contents of the I O Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit 450012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the I O Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled All I O bits including outputs will retain the status that they had before the PC was turned
178. I101 Supply Unit REDE l O Interface Unit 1 Component Names CJ1W IC101 I O CJ1W 11101 1 0 Control Unit Interface Unit E A 101 d OUT IN Output connector for F Input connector for TO aaa Cable VO Connecting Cable bein V O Connecting Cable D Oyo 85 CJ series Basic I O Units 3 5 4 Dimensions CJ1W IC101 I O Control Unit CJ1W 11101 1 0 Interface Unit Section 3 6 Note Attached the enclosed cover to the I O Connecting Cable connector on the I O Interface Unit when it is not being used to protect it from dust 3 6 CJ series Basic I O Units 3 6 1 Classification Basic Input Unit with Terminal Block DC Input Units Specifications 24 V DC 16 inputs CJ series Basic I O Units with Terminal Blocks Number of bits allocated CJ1W ID21 1 Basic Output Units with Terminal Blocks 86 Relay Output Units 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A 8 outputs independent contacts CJ1W OC201 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A 16 outputs CJ1W 0C211 Transistor Out put Unit with Sinking Outputs 12 to 24 V DC 0 5 A 16 outputs CJ1W OD211 Transistor Out put Unit with Sourcing Out puts 24 V DC 0 5 A 16 outputs load sh
179. IMS Uo n m MET UU 1 2 Special Features and Functions lsleeseeeeeee ne 1 3 Function Tables i iehueeReODERRED dpb erty dt UE Ree bees 12 1 4 Comparison to CS series POS siruri nnna e ce ee 19 SECTION 2 Specifications and System Configuration 21 2 Specificallons ee izecsetue d ropes SD UP NEP URS as le utet 22 2 2 CPU Unit Components and Functions 0 0 0 eee e 29 2 3 Basic System Configuration 0 0 eee e 31 2 4 VO UMIS osse ee Ue Se ie EER SSR Peas eS ep PERE e B EEG 40 2 5 Expanded System Configuration 0 0 2 0 0 c eee cee eee eae 43 2 6 Unit Current Consumption 0 00 eee ene 55 2 7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity 58 2 8 J O Table Settings Last sice estiss a Wee ese vem ems iow ee ates 58 SECTION 3 Nomenclature Functions and Dimensions 61 321 CPU nttss2i isa Ree Ba oa Raa aN Sy kid HEN SCR C eg EE es Ba ota 62 3 2 File Memory cub eb e eeebU eR UHR SER Heder DIU Et eed 67 3 3 Programming Devices 1p RE UR RE RC Ret e hg as 74 3 4 Power Supply Units E vec baeee th desk wae Seg tae RPSL Ue ee 83 3 5 TO Control Units and I O Interface Units 0 0 00 cece cee eens 84 3 6 CyJ series Basic I O Units 2 0 cee eee e nen ences 86 SECTION 4 Operating Procedures i v Lo yer E vrswe 93 2 1 Introductio xx eiu CREE IER eR ERE Ae e AER 94 4 2 BXAMpleSavs avisrtn we sath yeah feeb b DU EXBUUC E SER uM EUER De 96
180. Macro Area Input Words A600 to A603 When MCRO 099 is executed it copies the input data from the specified source words input parame ter words to A600 through A603 Read write Macro Area Output Words A604 to A607 After the subroutine specified in MCRO 099 has been executed the results of the subroutine are transferred from A604 through A607 to the specified destination words output parameter words Read write TR Temporary Relay Area Section 9 11 9 11 TR Temporary Relay Area Examples Note 9 12 Timer Area The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TRO to TR15 These temporarily store the ON OFF status of an instruction block for branch ing TR bits are useful when there are several output branches and interlocks cannot be used The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions OUT instructions OUT TRO to OUT TR15 store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point TR bits cannot be changed from a Programming Device In this example a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly con nected to a branch point nnus XT Instruction Operand oo0000 TR 000002 000003 LD 000000 gt O X OR 000001 000001 i 000
181. NCEPIS see educat etos e RC E CR RR xix 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives 00 0 0000005 XX 6 4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods XX xiii Intended Audience 1 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent Personnel in charge of installing FA systems Personnel in charge of designing FA systems Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities 2 General Precautions NWARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this m
182. Net Unit Words are allocated to Slaves using fixed allocations according to fixed allo cation settings 1 2 and 3 One of these fixed areas is selected Fixed Allocation Area 1 Output Area master to slaves CIO 3200 to CIO 3263 Input Area slaves to master CIO 3300 to CIO 3363 Fixed Allocation Area 2 CIO 3400 to CIO 3463 CIO 3500 to CIO 3563 Fixed Allocation Area 3 CIO 3600 to CIO 3663 CIO 3700 to CIO 3763 The following words are allocated to the DeviceNet Unit when the remote I O slave function is used with fixed allocations Fixed Allocation Area 1 Output Area master to slaves CIO 3370 Input Area slaves to master CIO 3270 Fixed Allocation Area 2 CIO 3570 CIO 3470 Fixed Allocation Area 3 CIO 3770 CIO 3670 Bits in the DeviceNet Area can be force set and force reset There are two ways to allocated I O in DeviceNet networks Fixed allocations according to node addresses and user set allocations With fixed allocations words are automatically allocated to the slave in the specified fixed allocation area according to the node addresses With user set allocations the user can allocate words to Slaves from the following words CIO 0000 to CIO 0235 CIO 0300 to CIO 0511 CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 W000 to W511 H000 to H511 D00000 to D32767 E00000 to E32767 banks 0 to 2 205 Internal I O Area DeviceNet Area Section 9 8 For
183. O Area Specification 1 280 CIO 000000 to CIO 007915 80 words from CIO 0000 to CIO 0079 The setting of the first word can be changed from the default CIO 0000 so that CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 can be used I O bits are allocated to Basic I O Units Link Area 3 200 200 words CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 words CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units in Controller Link Systems CPU Bus Unit Area 6 400 400 words CIO 150000 to CIO 189915 words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 CPU Bus Unit bits store the operating status of CPU Bus Units 25 words per Unit 16 Units max Special I O Unit Area 15 360 960 words CIO 200000 to CIO 295915 words CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 Special I O Unit bits are allocated to Special I O Units 10 words per Unit 96 Units max Note Special I O Units are I O Units that belong to a spe cial group called Special I O Units Examples CJ1W AD081 Analog Input Unit DeviceNet Area 9 600 600 words CIO 320000 to CIO 379915 words CIO 3200 to CIO 3799 DeviceNet bits are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Unit remote I O communications when the master function is used with fixed alloca tions Outputs CIO 3200 to CIO 3263 Inputs ClO 3300 to CIO 3363 Outputs CIO 3400 to CIO 3463 Inputs CIO 3500 to CIO 3563 Outputs CIO 3600 to CIO 3663 Inputs ClO 3700 to CIO 3763 Fixed allocation setting 1 Fixed allocation setting 2
184. O Table Routing Table and CPU Bus Unit settings Programming Device Parameter Area t I O Memory Areas Section 9 2 9 2 I O Memory Areas 9 2 1 I O Memory Area Structure The following table shows the basic structure of the I O Memory Area External Bit Word Access Change Statusat I O alloca access access E from startup tion Read Write Pro or mode gram change ming Device I O Area 1 280 CIO 0000 Basic I O Cleared bits 80 to Units See words CIO 0079 Note 3 See note 1 Data Link 3 200 CIO 1000 Data link Cleared Area bits 200 to See words CIO 1199 note 3 CPU Bus 6 400 CIO 1500 CPU Bus Unit Area bits 400 to Units words CIO 1899 Special I O 15 360 CIO 2000 Special I O Unit Area bits 960 to Units words CIO 2959 DeviceNet 9 600 CIO 3200 DeviceNet Cleared Area bits 600 to Compo See words CIO 3799 Bus D note 3 Master fixed allo cations Internal I O 37 504 CIO 1200 Areas bits to 2 344 CIO 1499 words CIO 3800 4 800 to bits 300 CIO 6143 words Work Area 8 192 W000 to Cleared bits 512 W511 words Holding Area 8 192 H000 to OK OK Main bits 512 H511 tained words Auxiliary Area 15 360 A000 to A000 to A000 to Varies bits 960 A959 A447 A447 from words No No address to A448 to A448 to A959 Agsg address OK OK TR Area 16 bits TRO to OK OK No Cleared TR15 DM Ar
185. O Units 10 max Basic I O Units Special I O Units CPU Bus Units Memory Card 32 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 Note The I O Control Unit is required only to connect an Expansion Rack It must be connected next to the CPU Unit Remarks CJ series CPU Rack Configuration CJ series CPU Unit CJ series Power Supply Unit One of each Unit required for every CPU Rack Refer to the following table for details on applicable models CJ series Basic I O Units CJ series Special I O Units CJ series CPU Bus Units A total of up to 10 Units can be connected An error will occur if 11 or more Units are connected End Cover CJ1W TERO 1 Must be connected to the right end of the CPU Rack One End Cover is provided with the CPU Unit A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected Memory Card Install as required Refer to the following table for details on applicable models I O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 Required to connect an Expansion Rack Must be connected next to the CPU Unit 33 Basic System Configuration Units Name CJ series CPU Units Model CJ1G CPU45 Section 2 3 Specifications I O bits 1 280 Program capacity 60K steps Data Memory 128K words DM 32K words EM 32K words x 3 banks CJ1G CPU44 I O bits 1 280 Program capacity 30K steps Data Memory 64K words DM 32K words EM 32K words x 1 banks
186. OFF i Memory Replace A65015 Program replacement 1 Program Retained Cleared Card ment Start starts when the Replace replaced opera Bit ment Start Bit is turned ON a tions if the Program Password M A651 is valid A5A5 Hex Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit dur ing program replacement When the power is turned ON or program replace ment is completed the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in error It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Programming Device PT or host com puter pleted or after power is turned ON 345 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Classifi cation Memory Card opera tions Name Program Password Addresses Word Bit Function Type in the password to replace a program A5A5 Hex Replacement Start Bit A65015 is enabled Any other value Replace ment Start Bit A65015 is disabled When the power is turned ON or program replace ment is completed the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in error Settings Status after mode change Retained Statusat startup Cleared Write timing Related Flags Settings Memory Card opera tions 346 Program File Name A654 to 6
187. PC Other equipment Ground Ground 100 Q or less 100 Q or less CJ series PC Other equipment Ground Ground 100 Q or less 100 Q or less Do not share the PC s ground with other equipment or ground the PC to the metal structure of a building The configuration shown in the following diagram may worsen operation 129 Wiring Crimp Terminals Section 5 3 CJ series PC Other equipment The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3 5 self raising terminals with screws Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0 8 Ne m Use crimp terminals M3 5 having the dimensions shown below ee ORI o4 dd max my max A Y 5 5 3 2 Wiring CJ series Basic I O Units with Terminal Blocks 1 0 Unit Specifications Electric Wires Note Crimp Terminals Wiring 130 Double check the specifications for the I O Units In particular do not apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switch ing capacity for Output Units Doing so may result in breakdown damage or fire When the power supply has positive and negative terminals be sure to wire them correctly The following wire gauges are recommended Terminal Block Connector 18 terminal AWG 22 to 18 0 32 to 0 82 mm The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient temperature and insulation thickness
188. PCs m Method I O tables are created by the user and written to the CPU Unit m Procedure Create the I O tables from a Programming Device or create them on the CX Programmer and downloaded them to the CPU Unit Thereafter this method will then be used whenever the CPU Unit is turned ON There are three spe cific methods that can be used to achieve this Create the I O tables from a Programming Console or CX Programmer Edit the I O tables on the CX Programmer and download them to the CPU Unit Transfer a parameter file STD to the CPU Unit including automatically writing the file from a Memory Card at startup Once implemented this method will be used until the I O tables are deleted from the CPU Unit using the CX Programmer m Unit Check When this method is used the registered I O tables are compared with the actual I O at startup If they do not agree A40110 will turn ON to indicate an l O setting error and operation will not be possible 179 I O Allocations Section 8 1 m User Procedures for Creating I O Tables Creating I O Tables Editing and Downloading I O Tables CX Programmer Cee Programmer Programming Console Units connected when power is turned ON are registered in CPU Unit Co Oooo OR nann Oooo Oooo Edited I O tales Operation performed to ack create I O tables 00 16pt Input Unit Down 01 16pt Input Dummy loading 02 32pt Output
189. PU Bus Unit does not match the CPU Bus Unit registered in the I O table The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The unit number of the Unit where the setting error occurred is written to A427 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Setting error detected 0 No setting error Cleared Cleared A40204 Battery Error Flag Non fatal error ON if the CPU Unit s battery is dis connected or its voltage is low and the Detect Battery Error setting has been set in the PC Setup The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash This flag can be used to control an external warning light or other indica tor to indicate that the battery needs to be replaced This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error A42615 PC Setup Detect Battery Error A40206 Special I O Unit Error Flag Non fatal error ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a Special I O Unit including an error in the Special I O Unit itself The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The Special I O Unit where the error occurred will stop operating and the unit number of the Unit where the data exchange error occurred is indi cated in A418 through A423 This f
190. Peripheral Port Unit Unit port Com Computer Serial Model Length Cable notes puter port communications mode CPU Units Built in D Sub 9 pin Peripheral Bus or CJ1W CN118 XW2Z periph male Host Link XW2Z 200S CV S CV eral port 500S CV models use a static resis tant connector Using a CQM1 CIF01 02 Cable for a Peripheral Port Unit port Computer Serial Cable notes port communications mode CPU Units Built in D Sub 9 pin Host Link CJ1W CN114 periph male CQM1 CIF02 eral port 78 Programming Devices Using a RS 232C Cable for a IBM PC AT or Compatible Unit Unit port Com puter Computer port Serial communications mode Section 3 3 Model Length Cable notes CPU Units Built in RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female DOS D Sub 9 pin male Host Link XW2Z 200S V XW2Z 500S V 2m 5m Serial Communi cations Units RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female DOS D Sub 9 pin male Host Link XW2Z 2008 V XW2Z 500S V 2m 5m Communications Modes when Connecting a CX Programmer to a CJ series CPU Unit Serial communications mode Characteristics Peripheral Bus High speed communications are possible Conse quently connecting via a peripheral bus is recom mended when using a CX Programmer Only 1 1 connection is possible When using a CJ series CPU Uni
191. Power OFF Interrupts and Scheduled Interrupts Task Earlier program PES Task s Task When a new program is being created standard programs can be combined as tasks to create an entire program Standard programs SN Program ABC Program ABD Task 1 A Task 2 B Task 3 C Using Symbols Arbitrary symbols names up to 32 characters that are independent of I O ter minal allocations can be used in programming Standard programs created with symbols are more general and easier to reuse as tasks in different pro grams Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Symbols specified for bit address swt VALVE Global and Local Symbols I O names are handled as symbols which can be defined as global symbols Supported which apply to all of the programs in all tasks or as local symbols which apply to just the local task When the symbols are defined you can choose to have the local symbols allocated to addresses automatically Improve Overall System The response performance of the system can be improved by dividing the Response Performance program into a system management task and tasks used for control and exe cuting only those control tasks that need to be executed Simplify Program Modification Debugging is more efficient when the job of modifying and debugging the tasks can be divided among several individuals Program maintenance is easier because only the
192. RXD 235 The default setting is the maximum value of 256 bytes Max Unit Number in NT Link Mode 0 to 7 Default 0 This setting determines the high est unit number of PT that can be connected to the PC in NT Link mode Related flags and words A61902 RS 232C Port Set tings Changing Flag New setting s effective ness Takes effect the next cycle Also can be changed with STUP 237 Scheduled Units Interrupt Time 0 10 ms 1 1 0 ms Default 0 This setting determines the time units used in scheduled interrupt interval settings This setting cannot be changed during operation Takes effect at the start of opera tion Instruction Error Operation 0 Continue 1 Stop Default 0 This setting determines whether instruction errors instruction pro cessing errors ER and illegal access errors AER are treated as non fatal or fatal errors When this setting is set to 1 CPU Unit operation will be stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned ON even when the AER Flag is turned ON for an indirect DM EM BCD error Related Flags A29508 Instruc tion Processing Error Flag A29509 Indirect DM EM BCD Error Flag A29510 Illegal Access Error Flag A29508 A29509 A29510 If this setting is set to 0 these flags won t be turned ON even if an instruc tion error occurs Takes effect at the start of opera tion 153
193. SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G CPUL I Programmable Controllers Operation Manual Produced April 2001 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property NDANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury NWARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of in
194. Section 1 3 Connecting Program ming Devices Purpose Connecting a Programming Console Function Connect to the peripheral port with pin 4 of the CPU Unit s DIP switch OFF Connecting a Programming Device e g the CX Pro grammer Connect to the peripheral port with pin 4 of the CPU Unit s DIP switch OFF or with pin 4 ON and the communica tions mode set to peripheral bus under Peripheral Port settings in the PC Setup Connect to the RS 232C port with pin 5 of the CPU Unit s DIP switch ON or with pin 5 OFF and the communica tions mode set to peripheral bus under RS 232C Port settings in the PC Setup Connecting a host com puter Connect to the RS 232C port or peripheral port Set the communica tions mode to host link in the PC Setup Connecting a PT Connect to the RS 232C port or peripheral port Set the communica tions mode to NT Link in the PC Setup Set the PT communications settings for a 1 N NT Link Connecting a standard serial device to the CPU Unit no protocol mode Connect to the RS 232C port Set the communications mode to no protocol in the PC Setup Manual Operation Manual Reference 3 3 Pro gramming Devices 2 5 Expanded System Configura tion Turning OFF all outputs on basic Output Units and High density Output Units a type of Special I O Unit Turn ON the Output OFF Bit A50015
195. System Be sure to follow the instructions carefully Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction resulting in very dangerous situations 5 1 5 2 5 3 Fail safe Circuits Installation 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 4 CjJ series Unit Weights 5 2 5 5 2 6 DIN Track Installation 5 2 7 Wiring 5 3 1 Power Supply Wiring 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 Connecting I O Devices 5 3 5 Reducing Electrical Noise Installation and Wiring Precautions 0 00 ee ee Installation in a Control Panel 20 0 0 cee eee eee Assembled Appearance and Dimensions 4 Connecting PC Components 0 0 0 0 00 0c ee eee Wiring CJ series Basic I O Units with Terminal Blocks Wiring I O Units with Connectors 0 000000 108 110 110 112 114 120 120 122 124 127 127 130 131 136 140 107 Fail safe Circuits Section 5 1 5 1 Fail safe Circuits Supply Power to the PC before Outputs Managing PC Errors Managing Output Malfunctions Emergency Stop Circuit 108 Note Be sure to set up safety circuits outside of the PC to prevent dangerous condi tions in the event of errors in the PC or external power supply If the PC s power supply is turned on after the controlled system s power sup ply outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momentarily To prevent any malfunction add an external cir
196. TC ID16 G7TC IA16 64 point 24 V DC Input Unit G7TC ID16 G7TC IA16 Type Input Block Input voltage output type Input 24 V DC Output Relay Input 100 200 V AC Output Relay Section 3 6 Required for connection 1 Connecting Cable and 2 I O Terminals Input 24 V DC Output Relay Input 100 200 V AC Output Relay 2 Connecting Cables and 4 I O Terminals 32 point Transistor Out put Unit with Sinking Outputs G7TC OC16 Output Block Input 24 V DC Output Relay G70D SOC16 Output Termi nal Slim Input 24 V DC Output Relay G70D FOM16 Output Termi nal Input 24 V DC Output MOS FET G70A ZOC16 3 Relays Relay Terminal Socket NPN Relays 1 Connecting Cable and 2 I O Terminals 64 point Transistor Out put Unit with Sinking Outputs Units with MIL Connectors Basic I O Unit Model number Specifications 32 point 24 V DC Input Unit Connecting Cable G7TC OC16 Output Block Input 24 V DC Output Relay G70D SOC16 Output Termi nal Slim Input 24 V DC Output Relay G70D FOM16 Output Termi nal Input 24 V DC Output MOS FET G70A ZOC16 3 Relays Relay Terminal Socket Relays V O Terminal 2 Connecting Cable and 4 I O Terminals Required for Model number G7TC ID16
197. U Bus Units are stored in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit Refer to 9 21 Parameter Areas for details The CPU Bus Units are allocated the required number of works for settings from this area There is a limit to the capacity of the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area of 10 752 bytes 10 Kbytes The system must be designed so that the number of words used in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by all of the CPU Bus Units not exceed this capacity If the wrong combination of Units is used the capacity will be exceeded and either Units will operate from default settings only or will not operate at all The following table shows the number of bytes required in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by each Unit Any Unit with a usage of 0 does not use the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area at all Model number CJ1W CLK21 CJ1W SCU41 Classification CPU Bus Units Capacity in bytes Controller Link Unit Serial Communica tions Unit Ethernet Unit DeviceNet Unit CJ1W ETN11 CJ1W DRM21 2 8 I O Table Settings List The setting contents when editing I O tables with CX Programmer are as shown below 2 8 1 CJ series Basic I O Units Number of allocated words Input Output Number of allocated Units Unit name Unit type CJ1W ID211 DC Input Units 16 point Input Unit CJ1W ID231 32 point Input Unit CJ1W ID232 32 point Input Unit CJ1W ID261 64 point Input Unit Relay Output Units CJ1W OC201
198. Unit Registered I O tables Rack 01 Registered I O tables Transferring Parameter File to CPU Unit File memory Memory oa eile Card or EM Area Registered I O tables Checking l O Allocation Status The I O allocation status can be checked in A260 If A260 contain 0000 Hex automatic I O allocation at startup is being used If A260 contains BBBB Hex user set I O allocations are being used Address Name contents A260 I O Allocations Status 0000 Hex Automatic I O Allocation at Startup BBBB Hex User set I O Allocation Changes in I O Allocation Status Default setting Automatic I O Allocation at Startup Automatic I O Allocation a Venues I O tables are created every time power is turned ON based on Units actually connected in PC V O tables deleted from CPU Unit Usable gre norverified using the CX Programmer I O tables created from Programming Device I O tables downloaded from CX Programmer Parameter file STD transferred to CPU Unit User set I O Allocations Operation is performed according to the I O tables A260 BBBB Hex transferred to the CPU Unit using one of the above three methods The registered I O tables are verified against the I O Units that are actually connected in the PC You cannot return to automatic I O allocation at startup by using the Program ming Console To return to automation I O allocation the I O tables must be delete
199. Unit Special I O Unit Area 10 words Unit DM Area Each Special I O Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of D20000 to D29599 100 words x 96 Units These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the Special I O Unit When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system the Restart Bits for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units Special I O Unit CPU Unit DM Area for Special I O Units 100 words Unit restarted Transferred each cycle and when necessary There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allo cated to each Unit The timing of data transfers depends on the model being used 1 2 3 1 Data transferred when the PC is turned ON 2 Data transferred when the Unit is restarted 3 Data transferred when necessary Some models transfer data in both directions from the DM Area to the Unit and from the Unit to the DM Area See the Unit s Operation Manual for details on data transfers FINS Commands The CMND 490 instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a FINS command to the Special I O Unit Special I O Unit CPU Unit CMND FINS com The FINS command is trans mand mitted when CMND 490 has transmis been executed in the program sion FINS commands can be transmitted to Special I O Units in other PCs in the network not just the local PC 182 Data Exchange with
200. User program A40304 PC Setup A40305 Registered I O Table A40307 Routing Table A40308 CPU Bus Unit Settings Startup Memory Card A40309 ON when an error occurs in automatically transfer Read only Transfer Error Flag ring a file from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit at startup including when a file is missing or a Memory Card is not mounted PC Setup PC Setup Error Flag A40210 ON when there is a setting error in the PC Setup Read only Error Non fatal error Information PC Setup Error Location A406 When there is a setting error in the PC Setup the Read only location of that error is written to A406 in 4 digit hexadecimal The location is given as the address set on the Programming Console Interrupt Interrupt Task Error Flag A40213 ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in Read only Task Error Non fatal error the PC Setup is set to Detect and one of the follow Information ing occurs IORD 222 or IOWR 223 in a cyclic task are com peting with IORD 222 or IOWR 223 in an interrupt task IORD 222 or IOWR 223 was executed in an inter rupt task when I O was being refreshed Interrupt Task Error Cause A42615 Indicates the status of the Interrupt Task Error Flag Read only Flag A40213 Interrupt Task Error Unit A42600 to Contains the Special I O Unit s unit number when an Read only Number A42611 attempt was made to refresh a Special I O Unit s I O from an interrupt task wit
201. VERVIEW es E 2 1 2 Special Features and Functions sssesleleee eese 3 1 2 1 Special Features 0 eee eee eee 3 1 2 2 Versatile Functions 1 0 0 0 e EE E ee eens 8 123 Function Tables co Rae Shas oh SAG A ae aman a We PUER DR 12 1 3 1 Functions Arranged by Purpose 00005 12 1 3 2 Communications Functions Serial Network 18 1 4 Comparison to CS series PCs 0 00 eee eee 19 Overview Section 1 1 1 1 Overview Same Advanced Performance as CS series PCs Basic instructions 0 08 us Special instructions 0 12 us Same high speed CPU bus as CS Series Large data memory 128 Kwords Program compatibility with CS series PCs Protocol Macro Function Serves Multiple Ports Up to 32 ports can be connected Serial Communications Units The CJ series PCs are very small sized Programmable Controllers that fea ture high speed and advanced functions with the same architecture as the CS series PCs Only 90 x 65 mm H x D for mounting in small spaces in machines and on the same DIN Track as components contributing to machine downsiz ing increased functionality and modularization Basic instructions executed at 0 08 us min and special instructions at 0 12 us min Support the DeviceNet open network and protocol macros for serial com munications to enable information sharing in machines Machine to machine connections with Controller Link and h
202. WAIT condition satisfied WAIT condition not satisfied ONE CYCLE AND WAIT NOT WAIT NOT relay num ber WAIT condition satisfied WAIT condition not satisfied COUNTER WAIT CNTW Default setting Normal execution HIGH SPEED TIMER WAIT TMHW Default setting Normal execution Loop Control LOOP Loop Control LEND exe cution condi tion LEND condition satisfied LEND condition not satisfied Loop Control LEND relay number LEND condition satisfied LEND condition not satisfied Loop Control LEND NOT relay num ber LEND condition satisfied LEND condition not satisfied TIMER WAIT Text String Processing Instructions Instruction Mnemonic TIMW Default setting column in the following table Length steps ON execution Normal execution Conditions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length OFF execution See note time us time us MOV STRING MOV 664 3 84 3 Transferring 1 character 0 29 7 27 ms Transferring 2 046 characters CONCATE 656 4 167 8 1 character 1 character 0 37 NATE STRING 7 42 ms 2 046 characters 1 character GET STRING LEFT 652 4 94 3 Retrieving 1 character from 2 charac 0 37 LEFT ters 7 36 ms Retrieving 2 046 characters from 2 047 characters 265 Instruction Execution T
203. Wd m 2 and m 3 CN2 Connector Connected to the connector on the next Unit Unit with Fujitsu compatible Connector CJ1W L1D261 Wodmor 9 1224597 m 2 8 9 10111213 1415 cases ET d E or m 3 8 9 10 111213 1415 88 CJ series Basic I O Units Section 3 6 Dimensions 32 point Units 40 pin x 1 Units with Fujitsu compatible Connector CJ1W ID231 32 point Input Unit CJ1W OD231 32 point Output Unit 112 5 a E Units with MIL Connector CJ1W ID232 32 point Input Unit CJ1W OD232 32 point Output Unit 64 point Units 40 pin x 2 CJ1W ID261 32 point Input Unit with Fujitsu compatible Connector CJ1W OD261 32 point Output Unit with Fujitsu compatible Connector e 112 5 66 a 89 CJ series Basic I O Units Section 3 6 Connecting to Connector Terminal Block Units The CJ series 32 64 point Basic I O Units can be connected to Connector Terminal Block Conversion Units as shown in the following table Units with Fujitsu compatible Connectors Basic I O Unit Specifications 32 point 24 V DC Input Unit Connecting Cable Connector Termina
204. XR REND UE A CER NES Data Memory DM ATe8s iu RR ER ROC RR NRI Re ap RO HR REOR Ae UR Extended Data Memory EM Area 2 cee cent e Index Registerssci eoe C e te eae fn Data Registers s esee RS eee RS REP ea Gate els Gudea aa Task Flags 107 108 110 127 143 145 147 148 156 167 168 181 187 188 189 196 201 202 203 205 206 207 208 219 219 221 221 223 224 230 231 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 19 Condition Flags teme eere IP oes BAe ead UE ees 232 9 20 Clock Pulses 55 6 ss EE Ge EN nU woh Ceo s eR rede bebe UR ee 233 9 2 Parameter Areas zanat o x EIU a a wa ee ee ed Te 234 SECTION 10 CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time 237 10 1 CPU Unit Operation err e Aa E ER FERRE EE oot Sa Ee S BEAT 238 10 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes lsssseseleeee rerne r rererere 240 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time lseeseseeeee III 243 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps 0 0 0 0 0000000 250 1055 Power OFF Operation ves vest RE Fe SEES ee SR D e PC RE 267 SECTION 11 Troubleshooting 22e oer hu 271 WAST Error E09 rcl e OR sock eda URS CR IRAE eL HR Rr dee 272 11 2 Error Processing is Lope ete SEU IRE HERE ENT Pb eee ERES 273 11 3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units 289 SECTION 12 Inspection and Maintenance 293 12 1 spections ere tc tire rie o EP DH NEM De Seb eee oa bes 294 12 2 Replacing User servicea
205. a Basic I O Unit The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The location of the error will be written to A408 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A408 A40213 Interrupt Task Error Flag Non fatal error ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in the PC Setup is set to Detect and an interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I O refreshing of a Special I O Unit This flag will also be turned ON if an attempt is made to refresh a Special 1O Unit s I O from an interrupt task with IORF 097 while the Unit s I O is being refreshed by cyclic I O refresh ing duplicate refreshing The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Interrupt task error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A426 PC Setup Detect Interrupt Task Errors set ting A40215 FAL Error Flag Non fatal error ON when a non fatal error is gener ated by executing FAL 006 The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The bit in A360 to A391 that corre sponds to the FAL number specified in FALS 006 will be turned ON and the corresponding error code will be written to A400 Error codes 41
206. a counter number is used in an operand that requires word data the counter number accesses the PV of the counter It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are count ing simultaneously If two or more counter instructions use the same counter number an error will be generated during the program check but the counters will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be reset Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag Mode PC startup Reset Input CNR 545 Interlocks change IL ILC COUNTER CNT PV 0000 Maintained Maintained Maintained REVERSIBLE Flag gt OFF COUNTER CNTR 012 COUNTER WAIT CNTW 814 Counter Completion Flags can be force set and force reset Counter PVs cannot be force set or force reset although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force setting resetting the Completion Flag There are no restrictions in the order of using counter numbers or in the num ber of N C or N O conditions that can be programmed Counter PVs can be read as word data and used in programming 9 14 Data Memory DM Area The DM Area contains 32 768 words with addresses ranging from D00000 to D32767 This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word Dat
207. a in RAM can be delayed by ensuring that the CPU Unit power is not turned OFF until the battery has been replaced 1 The PC Setup must be set to detect a low battery error Detect Low Bat tery If this setting has not been made the BATT LOW error message will not appear on the Programming Console and the Battery Error Flag A40204 will not go ON when the battery fails 2 The battery will discharge faster at higher temperatures e g 4 days at 40 C and 2 days at 55 C Use the CPM2A BATO 1 Battery Set Be sure to install a replacement battery within 2 years of the production date shown on the battery s label Production Date OMRON CPM2A BAT01 01 04 Manufactured in April 2001 Use the following procedure to replace the battery when the previous battery has become completely discharged You must complete this procedure within five minutes after turning OFF the power to the CPU Unit to ensure memory backup 1 Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit or If the CPU Unit has not been ON turn it ON for at least five minutes and then turn it OFF Note If power is not turned ON for at least five minutes before replacing the battery the capacitor that backs up memory when the battery is removed will not be fully charged and memory may be lost before the new battery is inserted 2 Open the compartment on the upper left of the CPU Unit and carefully draw out the battery 3 Remove the battery connector Connect the new b
208. a in the DM Area is retained when the PC s power is cycled or the PC s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly the status of these bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions TST 350 and TSTN 351 Bits in the DM Area cannot be force set or force reset Indirect Addressing Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways binary mode and BCD mode 221 Data Memory DM Area Section 9 14 Binary mode Addressing 2D When a character is input before a DM address the content of that DM word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that binary address The entire DM Area D00000 to D32767 can be indi rectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF D00100 0100 D00256 Address actually used BCD mode Addressing xD When a x character is input before a DM address the content of that DM word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that BCD address Only part of the DM Area D00000 to D09999 can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999 XxD00100 0100 D00100 Address actually used DM Area Allocation to Parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units for Special I O Units functions such as initial Unit settings The timing for data transfers is different for these Units but may occur at
209. ace OFF when the next time the Sampling Start Bit A50815 is turned from OFF to ON Trace Trigger Monitor Flag A50811 ON when a trigger condition is established by the Read write Trace Start Bit A50814 OFF when the next Data Trace is started by the Sampling Start bit A50815 210 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function File Mem ory Informa tion Name Memory Card Type Address A34300 to A34302 Description Indicates the type of Memory Card if any installed Access Read only Memory Card Format Error Flag A34307 ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a for matting error has occurred Read only File Transfer Error Flag A34308 ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory Read only File Write Error Flag A34309 ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is write protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file memory Read only File Read Error A34310 ON when a file could not be read because of a mal function file is damaged or data is corrupted Read only File Missing Flag A34311 ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn t exist or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that doesn t exist Read only File Memory Operation Flag A34313 ON while any of the following operations is being executed OFF when none of them are being exe cuted CMND
210. al I O Units and CJ series CPU Bus Units as shown in the following diagram CJ series Basic I O Units CJ series CPU Unit CJ series Special I O Units CJ series CPU Bus Units 2 2 4 Data Communications CPU Unit Data Communications Data exchange during cyclic servicing allocations Event service data communications IORD IOWR instruction Not provided O refreshing using IORF instruction CJ series Basic I O Units According to I O allocations Words are allocated in order according to the position the Unit is mounted I O refreshing CJ series Special I O Units CJ series Unit No allocations Special I O Unit Area CIO 10 words Unit Special I O Unit Area DM 100 words Unit Yes Not available for some Units Yes Not available for some Units CJ series CPU Bus Unit Area Not provided No CPU Bus Units CIO 25 words Unit CJ series CPU Bus Unit Area DM 100 words Unit CPU Unit Connections Racks to which Unit can be mounted CJ series CPU CJ series Expan Rack sion Racks Yes Maximum number of Units on CPU Racks and Expansion Racks 40 See Note 1 40 See Note 2 16 CJ series Basic I O Units Yes CJ series Special I O Units CJ series CPU Bus Units Yes See Note 3 Note 1 The maximum number of Units on CPU Rack and Expansion Racks is 40 There are other restrictions for
211. an ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the above mentioned applica tions 3 Safety Precautions NWARNING NWARNING xiv The CPU Unit refreshes I O even when the program is stopped i e even in PROGRAM mode Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the status of any part of memory allocated to I O Units Special I O Units or CPU Bus Units Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unex pected operation of the loads connected to the Unit Any of the following oper ation may result in changes to memory status e Transferring I O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming Device Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device Force setting resetting bits from a Programming Device e Transferring I O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to the CPU Unit e Transferring I O memory from a host computer or from another PC on a network Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Safety Precautions NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING NWARNING Z Caution Z Caution Z Caution Z Caution 3
212. an be turned OFF when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN MONITOR or PROGRAM mode Programming Manual 6 5 2 Load OFF Func tion and 7 2 3 Online Editing Input response time setting Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I O Units The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence of noise and chattering or it can be decreased to detect shorter pulses on the inputs 10 3 5 I O Response Time Programming Manual 6 6 1 I O Response Time Settings Mode setting at power up Possible By default the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if a Programming Console is not connected 7 1 2 PC Setup Set tings Programming Manual 1 2 Operating Modes and 1 2 3 Startup Mode 25 Specifications Section 2 1 Item Memory Card functions Specification Automatically reading pro Possible grams autoboot from the Memory Card when the power is turned ON Reference 3 2 File Memory Programming Manual SECTION 5 File Mem ory Functions 5 1 3 Files and 5 2 2 CMND Instruction Program replacement during Possible PC operation Programming Manual 5 2 3 Using Instruction in User Program Format in which data is stored in Memory Card User program Program file format PC Setup and other parame ters Data file format I O memory Data file format binary format text format or CSV format Programming Manual 5 1 File Memory Functions for which Memory Card read write
213. and 31 mm When computing the width of a Rack the number of 20 mm Units is n Name Medemumber Untwidh l O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 32 point Basic I O Units CJ1W 1D231 ID232 CJ1W OD231 OD232 When computing the width of a Rack the number of 30 mm Units is m Model number Unit width I O Interface Unit CJ1W 11101 16 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID21 1 CJ1W OD 211 OD212 CJ1W OC201 OC21 1 64 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID261 CJ1W OD261 Analog I O Units CJ1W AD081 DA041 Controller Link Unit CJ1W CLK21 Serial Communications Unit CJ1W SCU41 Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN11 W 80 Power Supply Unit 62 CPU Unit 20 x n 31 x m 14 7 End Cover mm Example Two 32 point Basic I O Units and eight 31 mm Units W 156 7 Required Units 20 x 2 31 x 8 444 7 mm Installation Dimensions Unit mm DIN Track A PFP 100N2 PFP 100N PFP 50N 68 8 Installation Height The installation height of the CJ series CPU Rack and Expansion Racks var ies from 81 6 to 89 0 depending on the I O Units that are mounted When a Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Console is con nected however even greater height is required Allow sufficient depth in the control panel containing the PC 115 Installation Section 5 2 Approx 100 to 150 mm
214. and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max No of Circuits 32 16 points common 2 circuits Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 140 mA max Fuse None External Power Supply 10 2 to 26 4 V DC 30 mA min Weight 70 g max Accessories None Note The maximum load currents will be 2 0 A common and 4 0 A Unit if a pressure welded connector is used 309 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Circuit Configuration ow te p esti OUTOO i ZIR og r i to js Seed 4 9 OUT15 if cl sage a Rs gt COMO 2 Output COMO ig indicator i jo sw Q iS o i E 2 1E O V o outoo i YK i to i B i oo pee OUT15 5 COMI i COMI Terminal Connections O word m 1 B I O word m w 20 20 7 COM1 19 19 COMO O 15 18 18 15 ji O 14 17 14 D 13 16 13 t t D 12 15 12 D t t D 17 14 ti t t O 10 13 10 O 1 0 12 12 501 t 0 70 115 0 4 V 10 V COM1 9 COMO ad 0O e mO t D 6 7 6 O 1 1 0 4 6 O 12 to 24 V DC Os O 12 to 24 V DC 0O 4 mO 0O mO O 2 O D z 1 rj D 9 6
215. andard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit Model number XW2B 40G5 Specifications Standard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 RM Slim M3 screw terminal block built in breeder resistor 2 Connecting Cable and 2 Conversion Units Required for connection 1 Connecting Cable and 1 Conversion Unit XW2C 20G5 IN16 16 point input common M3 5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable and 2 Conversion Units 32 point Transistor Output Unit XW2B 40G5 Standard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable and 1 Conversion Unit 90 XW2D 20G6 1016 Slim M3 screw terminal block built in breeder resistor 1 Connecting Cable and 2 Conversion Units CJ series Basic I O Units Connecting to I O Terminals The CJ series 32 64 point Basic I O Units can be connected to I O Terminals as shown in the following table Units with Fujitsu compatible Connectors Basic I O Unit Specifications 32 point 24 V DC Input Unit Connecting Cable I O Terminal Model number G7
216. any of the three following times 1 2 3 1 Transfer data when the PC s power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted 2 Transfer data once each cycle 3 Transfer data when required Refer to the Unit s operation manual for details on data transfer timing Special I O Units D20000 to D29599 Each Special I O Unit is allocated 100 words based on unit numbers 0 to 95 Refer to the Unit s Operation Manual for details on the function of these words Special I O Unit CPU Unit Data trans DM Area for Special I O Unit 100 words Unit necessary CPU Bus Units D30000 to D31599 Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words based on unit numbers 0 to F Refer to the Unit s Operation Manual for details on the function of these words With some CPU Bus Units such as Ethernet Units initial settings must be registered in the CPU Unit s Parameter Area this data can be registered with a Programming Device other than a Programming Console 222 Extended Data Memory EM Area Section 9 15 Special I O Unit CPU Unit Data trans ferred to the CS1 Special A unit when the DM Area for CS1 CPU Bus Units PC Sate j on or the Unt 100 words Unit Or sd Data trans ferred to the CPU Unit at cyclic refresh ing or when necessary 9 15 Extended Data Memory EM Area Specifying EM Addresses Indirect Addressing 1 2 3 The EM Area is divided into 13 banks 0 to 2 that each contain 32 768 words EM Area addre
217. aring 2 indirect IR addresses 0 29 ICMP 020 7 42 36 Increase compared to normal instruction 0 42 DOUBLE CMPL 060 3 0 46 Comparing 2 constants 0 46 COMPARE 1 67 Comparing 2 indirect IR addresses 0 29 SIGNED CPS 114 3 6 5 0 29 BINARY ICP COMPARE ICPS 114 7 442 36 Increase compared to normal instruction 0 42 253 Mnemonic Code ON Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE Length steps See note execution time us Conditions OFF execution time us TABLE COMPARE MULTIPLE COMPARE UNSIGNED BLOCK COMPARE Data Movement Instructions Instruction Mnemonic When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Transferring a constant to a word OFF execution time us Transferring indirect IR to indirect IR Increase compared to normal instruc tion DOUBLE MOVE Transferring a constant to a word Transferring indirect IR to indirect IR MOVE NOT Transferring a constant to a word Transferring indirect IR to indirect IR DOUBLE MOVE NOT Transferring a constant to a word Transferring indirect IR to indirect IR MOVE BIT MOVE DIGIT MULTIPLE BIT TRANS FER Transferring 1 bit
218. as well as the gauge of the conductor The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3 self raising terminals with screws Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0 5 N m Use crimp terminals M3 having the dimensions shown below t 6 2 mm max Susa zi en W Ww 55 Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has been completed This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter from entering the Unit during wiring procedures Remove the label after wir ing has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling Wiring Section 5 3 During wiring After wiring Remove the label li ne albany RIN Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced In addition make sure that the I O indicators are not covered by the wiring Do not place the wiring for I O Units in the same duct or raceway as power lines Inductive noise can cause errors in operation Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0 5 N m The terminals have screws with 3 5 mm diameter heads and self raising pressure plates Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below Screw 3 5 mm screw with self raising pressure plate Terminal Blocks The I O Units are equipped with removable terminal blocks The lead wires do not have to be removed from the terminal b
219. ata is actually transmitted from the specified port CPU Unit s Unit Number in Host Link Mode 00 to 1F 0 to 31 Default 00 This setting determines the CPU Unit s unit number when it is con nected in a 1 to N N 2 to 32 Host Link A61902 RS 232C Port Set tings Changing Flag Takes effect the next cycle Also can be changed with STUP 237 PC Setup Section 7 1 RS 232C Port Settings Continued Item No protocol Mode Address in Programming Console Word Bit s Settings 00 to FF Default 00 Function Start code Set this start code only when the start code is enabled 1 in bits 12 to 15 of 165 00 to FF Default 00 End code Set this end code only when the end code is enabled 1 in bits 8 to 11 of 165 0 None 1 Code in 164 Default 0 Start code setting A setting of 1 enables the start code in 164 bits 8 to 15 0 None 1 Code in 164 2 CR LF Default 0 End code setting With a setting of 0 the amount of data being received must be specified A setting of 1 enables the end code in bits 0 to 7 of 164 A setting of 2 enables an end code of CR LF 00 256 bytes 01 to FF 1 to 255 bytes Default 00 Set this value only when the end code setting in bits 8 to 11 of 165 is O None This setting can be used to change the amount of data that can be transferred at one time by TXD 236 or
220. ation CPU Bus Units are initialized when the PC s power is turned on or the Unit s Restart Bit is turned ON The Unit s CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flag A30200 to A30215 will be ON while the Unit is initializing Cyclic I O refreshing will not be performed for aCPU Bus Unit while its Initial ization Flag is ON 185 SECTION 9 Memory Areas This section describes the structure and functions of the I O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas 9 Introductions 5 Atoka Sp CU dtu ede Sea ace ex RR 188 9 2 J OMemory Areas operis iene eene eiae n 189 9 2 1 I O Memory Area Structure 00 00 0202 ee eee 189 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 191 9 2 3 Data Area Properties 0 0 0 0c eee ene 195 9 3 J O Area tn Sic et eec ep eg E RERO eade pets 196 9 4 D ta Link Area sene a a ae a a a hh m ere 201 925 CPU Bus Unit ATEa wee cowards E A ieee sae EE E D 202 9 6 Special UO Unit Area s eR regm eh R RR 203 9 7 DeyiceNet Area eeu ce ER VARIES 205 9 8 Internal VO Area exstet TAOS PERS PAS ILU RUPEE A 206 9 9 Holding Area c4 iube be RED ait be deta Tete RG Tale 207 9 10 Auxiliary Areas cocer ah ee eb aye eA ee obeyed eee eee 208 9 11 TR Temporary Relay Area 1 eee eee 219 9 12 Tamer Area each ie rne ERE roa eee PX Sante aa wea ues 219 9 13 Counter ATea conocen t IT be tte pie Pa Sa ee oe Ee SOS 221 9 14 Data Memory DM Area lesse e 221 9 15 Extended Data Memory EM Area 0 eee ee
221. ator will light when this flag has goes ON occurred The following operations are consid ered illegal access 1 Reading writing the system area 2 Reading writing EM File Memory 3 Writing to a write protected area 4 Indirect DM EM BCD error in BCD mode The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 324 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim foes z after startup ing ags set Words Bits mode tings change A29511 No END Error Flag ON when there isn t an END 001 instruction in each program within a task CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 1 No END 0 Normal con dition Cleared Cleared A29512 Task Error Flag ON when a task error has occurred The following conditions generate a task error There isn t even one regular task that is executable started There isn t a program allocated to the task The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 1 Error 0 Normal A29513 Differentia tion Over flow Error Flag The allowed value for Differentiation Flags whi
222. attery place it into the compartment and close the cov er 297 Replacing User serviceable Parts Section 12 2 298 NWARNING The battery error will automatically be cleared when a new battery is inserted Never short circuit the battery terminals never charge the battery never dis assemble the battery and never heat or incinerate the battery Doing any of these may cause the battery to leak burn or rupturing resulting in injury fire and possible loss of life or property Also never use a battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subject to shock It may leak UL standards require that batteries be replaced by experienced technicians Always place an experienced technician in charge or battery replacement Appendix A Specifications of Basic I O Units Basic Input Units Specifications Number of bits allocated DC Input Units Terminal block CJ1W ID211 24 V DC 16 inputs Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID231 24 V DC 32 inputs See note MIL connector CJ1W ID232 24 V DC 32 inputs See note Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID261 24 V DC 64 inputs See note Basic Output Units Specifications Number of bits allocated Relay Output Units Terminal block 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A CJ1W OC201 8 points independent contacts Terminal block 250 V AC 24 V DC 2 A CJ1W OC211
223. ause of the error is eliminated 000A to 009F hexadecimal Cleared Cleared Written when error occurs A40210 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim foes z after startup ing ags set Words Bits mode tings change A40700 to A40712 Too Many l O Points Details The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I O Points Error are listed below The 3 digit binary value in A40713 to A40715 indicates the cause of the error values 0 to 5 cor respond to causes 1 to 6 below The 13 bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indicates the details the excessive value or the duplicated unit number CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light 1 The number of I O points will be written here when the total number of I O points set in the I O Table excluding Slave Racks exceed the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit 2 The number of Racks will be writ ten here when the number of Expansion Racks exceeds the maximum The relevant value will be written here A40700 to A40712 when the error occurs These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared 0000 to 1FFF hexadecimal Cleared Cleared Written when error occurs A40111 A40713 to A40715 A40713 to A40715 Too Many O Points Cause The 3 digit binary value of these bits indicates the cause of the Too Many I O Poi
224. be cleared even when the memory clear operation is performed from a Programming Device 2 The auto detect goes through baud rates in the following order Program ming Console Peripheral bus at 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps and 145 Details Section 6 2 115 200 bps Programming Devices that aren t in peripheral bus mode and devices in peripheral bus mode operating at 51 200 bps will not be detect ed 3 The auto detect operation goes through baud rates in the following order Peripheral bus at 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps and 115 200 bps Programming Devices that aren t in peripheral bus mode and devices in peripheral bus mode operating at any other speeds will not be detected 4 When pin 2 is ON and the power is turned ON any I O Memory file AU TOEXEC IOM ATEXECLIL IOM refer to Section 12 will also be trans ferred automatically Both the program AUTOEXEC OBJ and the parameter area AUTOEXEC STD must exist in the Memory Card I O Memory files AUTOEXEC IOM ATEXECLILI IOM are optional DIP switch PC Setup settings settings Peripheral port settings RS 232C port settings Address 144 bits 8 to 11 Address 160 bits 8 to 11 Default NT Link Peripheral HostLink Default NT Link No protocol Peripheral Host Link 0 bus 4 0 bus 4 Programming Console or CX Programmer in peripheral bus mode Auto detect connected device s baud rate Host PT CX Pro H
225. be turned OFF when the error is cleared A40109 Program ON when program contents are 1 Error Cleared Cleared A294 Error Flag incorrect 0 No error A295 Fatal error CPU Unit operation will stop and the A298 and ERR ALM indicator on the front of A299 the CPU Unit will light The task num ber where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 The type of program error that occurred will be stored in bits 8 to 15 of A295 Refer to the description of A295 for more details on program errors This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared A40110 1 O Setting ON when a Basic I O Unit registered 1 Error Cleared Cleared Error Flag in the I O Table does not match the o No error Fatal error Basic I O Unit actually installed in the PC Valid only when user set I O allocations are being used i e when A260 is BBBB Hex CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared A40111 Too Many l ON when the number of I O points 1 Error Cleared Cleared O Points being used in Basic I O Units 0 No error Flag exceeds the maximum allowed for i Fatal error the PC CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared
226. between the tops of the Racks and any other objects e g ceiling wiring ducts structural supports devices etc to Section 5 2 provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units Input duct Output duct K 200mmmin 2 Z elZ 2 lt lt 2 2222ZZZDZDDZID 2 e ue lc 7 2 2 ST CPU Rack 2 2 2 Breakers a fuses A Z 2 7 Z e Cie 2 A Y a 2 ra EX 2 a 2 5 T Expansion Rack z 2 g 2 5 2 Macc A Power z AAT 2 equipment ie ea Z such as 2 5 transformers a and magnetic 2 relays 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 7 7 2 2 2 P e LR V e 2 zt 2 2 A 7 Fuses relays timers etc NOT heat generating equip 5 i ment power equipment etc Terminal blocks for PC 5 2 3 Assembled Appearance and Dimensions The CJ series Units including the Power Supply Unit the CPU Unit and I O Units are connected to each other and an End Cover is connected to the right end 114 Terminal blocks for power equipment Power duct NNANNANNWNWMWWWWNNANANANWNWMWMWWMWWNNANANANANNMWMWMWWNWNNNANANNWMWMWWWWWNANANANAWMW Installation Section 5 2 Dimensions Unit mm BEN NOT 90 35 4 w 65 EERERRE Other than the CPU Units and Power Supply Unit CJ series Units come in two widths 20 mm
227. ble Parts 00 0 eee ccc e 295 Appendices A Specifications of Basic I O Units 0 0 cc cece eee 299 B Auxiliary Area oc hsa teat tee ace Be Lan bea Roos Ma tal oaias Sos 321 C Memory Map of PC Memory Addresses 00 0 0 e eee 353 D PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console sees 355 E Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit 0 0 0000 365 Index er c IO Revision History s25 4oi0cs040 esha eui lu taut SOL ix About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the CJ1G CPU CPU Units for CJ series Programmable Controllers PCs and includes the sections described on the following page Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you under stand information provided before attempting to install or use CJ1G CPU CPU Units in a PC Sys tem SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G CPU Programmable Controllers Operation Manual Contents Provides an outlines of and describes the design installation maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series PCs This manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1G H CPUL IL EV1 CJ1G CPU Programmable Controllers Programming Manual This manual describes programming and other methods to use the functions of the CS CJ series PCs SYSMAC CS
228. ble so that it is at 3 1 4 Dimensions CJ1H CPU 2 7 Y E OMRON SYSMAC RUNo CJIG CPU44 ERR ALMo PROGRAMMABLE PRPHL i CONTROLLER Como PERIPHERAL 62 73 9 66 File Memory 3 2 File Memory Note 3 2 1 General use Files Files Transferred Automatically at Startup Section 3 2 For CJ series CPU Units the Memory Card and a specified part of the EM Area can be used to store files All user programs the I O Memory Area and the Parameter Area can be stored as files File memory Memory Card Memory capacity 8 Mbytes HMC EF861 15 Mbytes HMC EF171 30 Mbytes HMC EF371 48 Mbytes HMC EF571 EM file memory Bank 1 EM file 4 memory The maximum capac ity of the CPU Unit s EM Area e g the maximum capacity for The specified bank set in the PC Setup to the last bank of the EM Area in the I O a CPU45 is 192 Kbytes Memory 1 A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100 000 times 2 The HMC AP001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below Files Handled by CPU Unit Files are ordered and stored in the Memory Card or EM file memory accord ing to the file name and the extension attached to it File name Ext
229. c 32 points at 48 C Input voltage 24 VDC is IBN Input voltage 26 4 VDC 24 points at 55 C 20 points at 55 C 0 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient Temperature 60 C 303 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Terminal Connections 4 2 i E S 11 12 0 o o o 13 14 2 o 0 9 o H 15 16 2 o_ o 4 t 5 dmv t8 4 o6 6 4 19 20 5 5 NC 21 22 NC COMO 23 24 COMO o 0o0 P2425 26L 0 0 eo o 27 28 2 5 o z 0 12 29 30L 0o o o o 31 32 0 o o oH 33 34 gt 0 o eo o 35 3620 o 24 V DC 5 37 38 9 r r 4 o o 39 40 o o 1 ae The input power polarity can be connected in either direction Both COMO and COM1 have two pins each Although they are internally connected wire all points com pletely Note The ON response time will be 20 us maximum and OFF response time will be 300 us maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays CJ1W ID261 DC Input Unit Fujitsu Connectors 64 Points Rated Input Voltage 24V DC 10 iso Input Impedance 5 6 kQ Input Current 4 1 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage ON Current
230. cations cables Tighten the communications connector attachment screws to 0 4 Nem 372 Numerics 26 V power supply 57 A Access Error Flag 232 addresses memory map 353 Always OFF Flag 233 Always ON Flag 233 applications precautions Xvi arc killers 316 Auxiliary Area 208 321 read write section 340 347 read only section 321 B Basic I O Units 31 available models 86 basic I O errors 283 error information 214 fuse status flags 209 I O allocations 170 I O response time 156 209 248 322 specifications 40 wiring 130 battery Battery Set 35 compartment 66 error 284 error flag 216 334 low battery error detection 150 158 replacement 296 service life 296 voltage indicator 296 Battery Error Flag 334 block programs instruction execution times 264 C C200H PRO27 E Programming Console 76 cables 36 39 135 See also I O Connecting Cables Carry Flag 232 CIO Area 191 description 196 clock clock data 217 329 clock instructions execution times 263 clock pulses flags 233 communications 18 baud rate 151 Communications Port Enabled Flags 349 data 31 distances 55 errors 284 flags 217 instruction execution times 262 network instruction execution times 263 networks 52 overview 54 protocol support 44 serial communications 6 specifications 55 system expansion 43 Communications Port Enabled Flags 349 comparison instructions execution times 253 CompoBus D
231. ces other than a Programming Console and Programming Device are connected to the peripheral port and RS 232C port turn ON pin 4 and turn OFF pin 5 SYSMAC RUN CJIG CPU44 ERR AMo PROGRAMMABLE PRPHLo CONTROLLER COMM Programming Device 4 Checking Initial Operation Use the following procedure to turn ON the PC and check initial operation using a Programming Console 1 2 3 1 Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port the upper port 9 A eyo es a tei be BEES ME Programming Console 2 Setthe Programming Console s Mode Switch to PROGRAM mode MONITOR RUN PROGRAM N 3 Check the power supply wiring and voltage and turn on the power Note If power is turned ON with a new CPU Unit without connecting a Pro gramming Console the CPU Unit will attempt to enter RUN mode the default setting but an error will occur because there is no pro gram 97 Examples Section 4 2 4 Check that the Power Supply Unit s POWER indicator is lit PA205R Power 5 Check that the Programming Console has the following display 6 Press the password the Clear and Monitor Keys and check that the Pro gramming Console has th
232. ch correspond to differenti ation instructions has been exceeded CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 Error Normal A29514 Illegal Instruction Error Flag ON when a program that cannot be executed has been stored CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 Error Normal Cleared Cleared A29515 UM Over flow Error Flag ON when the last address in UM User Memory has been exceeded CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON Error Normal Program Address Where Pro gram Stopped Rightmost 4 digits Program Address Where Pro gram Stopped Leftmost 4 digits These words contain the 8 digit binary program address of the instruction where program execution was stopped due to a program error A294 contains the task number of the task where program execution was stopped Right 4 digits of the program address Cleared Cleared Left 4 digits of the program address 325 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Words Bits Na
233. changing or adding to the program while the PC is operating in MONITOR mode 5A A52709 enabled Other value A52709 dis abled Retained Cleared AS52709 A52709 Turn this bit ON to disable online editing The setting of this bit is valid only when A52700 to A52707 have been set to 5A 1 Disabled 0 Not disabled Retained Cleared A52700 to A52707 343 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Classifi Name Addresses Function Settings Status Statusat Write Related cation z after startup timing Flags Word Bit mode Settings change Communi cations Communi cations RS 232C Port Error Flags A52800 to A52807 These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the RS 232C port they are automatically turned OFF when the RS 232C port is restarted These flags are not valid in peripheral bus mode and only bit 5 is valid in NT Link mode Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 ON when there was a parity error Bit 3 ON when there was a framing error Bit 4 ON when there was an overrun error Bit 5 ON when there was a timeout error Bits 6 and 7 Not used See Function column A52808 to A52815 These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the peripheral port they are automatically turned OFF when the peripheral port is restarted Bits 8 and 9 Not used it 10 ON when there was parity error framing error it 1
234. cially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity Locations close to power supplies Z Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the PC System You must use the CX Programmer programming software that runs on Windows if you need to program more than one task A Programming Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks A Programming Console can however be used to edit multitask pro grams originally created with the CX Programmer NWARNING Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury Always connect to a ground of 100 Q o
235. ck IN IN OUT 16 pt 32 pt 8 pt 0010 0011 0013 0012 yun Ajddns samodg From the left 1 2 3 Expansion Rack IN IN OUT 16 pt 32 pt 16 pt 0014 0015 0017 0016 wun Ajddns samodg Position to left Words Words allocated of CPU Unit required CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit CJ1W ID231 32 point DC Input Unit CJ1W ID261 64 point DC Input Unit CJ1W OD211 16 point Transistor Output Unit CJ1W OD231 32 point Transistor Output Unit CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit CJ1W ID231 32 point DC Input Unit CJ1W OC201 8 point Relay Output Unit CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit CJ1W ID231 32 point DC Input Unit CJ1W OC211 16 point Relay Output Unit CIO 0000 CIO 0001 and CIO 0002 CIO 0003 to CIO 0006 CIO 0007 CIO 0008 and CIO 0009 CIO 0010 CIO 0011 and CIO 0012 CIO 0013 CIO 0014 CIO 0015 and CIO 0016 CIO 0017 Expansion Rack Expansion Rack li alp wIN VINI AJOI Pp 174 I O Allocations 8 1 3 Allocating the First Word for Each Rack The first word allocated on each Rack can be set by creating I O tables from the CX Programmer Rack numbers 0 to 3 are determined by the order the Racks are connected by the I O Connecting Cables The CPU Rack is always rack 0 and the Expansion Racks are numbered in order from 1 to 3 The rack numbers must be in the order that the Racks are connected For Rack
236. conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61000 6 2 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN50081 2 Radiated emission 10 m regulations xix Conformance to EC Directives 6 Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC and 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PC EN61131 2 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives 1 2 3 The CJ series PCs comply with EC Directives To ensure that the machine or device in which the CJ series PC is used complies with EC Directives the PC must be installed as follows 1 The CJ series PC must be installed within a control panel 2 You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies used for the communications power supply and I O power sup plies 3 CJ series PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard EN50081 2 Radiated emission characteri
237. contains 512 words with addresses ranging from W000 to W511 These words can be used only in the program as work words There are unused words in the CIO Area CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 and CIO 3800 to CIO 6143 that can also be used in the program but use any available words in the Work Area first because the unused words in the CIO Area may be allocated to new functions in future versions of CJ series CPU Units Bits in the Work Area can be force set and force reset Work Area Initialization The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases 206 Holding Area Section 9 9 1 23 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup 3 The Work Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS 007 is executed IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON the contents of the Work Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the Work Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply i
238. corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F Read only CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag Non fatal error A40203 ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the CPU Bus Unit registered in the I O table Read only CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error A40207 ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit includ ing an error in the CPU Bus Unit itself Read only Special I O Unit Information Special I O Unit Number Duplication Flags A41100 to A41615 The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corre sponding flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special I O Unit s unit number has been duplicated Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95 Read only Special I O Unit Setting Error Flag Non fatal error A40202 ON when an installed Special I O Unit does not match the Special I O Unit registered in the I O table Read only Special I O Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags A42800 to A43315 When a Special I O Unit Setting Error occurs A40202 and the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95 Read only Special I O Unit Error Flag Non fatal error A40206 ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a Special I O Unit includ ing an error in the Special I O Uni
239. ct IR ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT Shifting words Shifting indirect IR DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT Shifting words Shifting indirect IR ROTATE LEFT Rotating words Rotating indirect IR DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT Rotating words Rotating indirect IR ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY Rotating words Rotating indirect IR DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT CARRY Rotating words Rotating indirect IR ROTATE RIGHT Rotating words Rotating indirect IR DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT Rotating words Rotating indirect IR ROTATE RIGHT WITH OUT CARRY Rotating words Rotating indirect IR DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT WITH OUT CARRY Rotating words Rotating indirect IR 255 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT Shifting 1 word Shifting 1 000 words SHIFT N BIT DATA LEFT Shifting 1 bit Shifting 1 000 bits SHIFT N BIT DATA RIGHT Shifting 1 bit Shifting 1 000 bits SHIFT N BITS LEFT Shifting 1 word by 1 bit Shifting indirect IR by 1 bit DOUBLE SHIFT N BITS LEFT Shifting 1 word by 1 bit Shifting indirect IR by 1 bit SHIFT N BITS Shift
240. ction 8 1 Word Allocations The following table shows which words in the Special I O Unit Area are allo cated to each Unit Unit number Words allocated CIO 2000 to CIO 2009 CIO 2010 to CIO 2019 CIO 2020 to CIO 2029 CIO 2150 to CIO 2159 CIO 2950 to CIO 2959 Special I O Units are ignored during I O allocation to Basic I O Units Positions containing Special I O Units aren t allocated any words in the I O Area Example The following example shows the I O word allocation to Basic I O Units and Special I O Units in the CPU Rack Ei 8 g o c 5 oO E lt c 3 Words Words allocated required CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit 1 CIO 0000 Basic I O Unit CJ1W AD081 Analog Input Unit 10 CIO 2000 to CIO 2009 0 Special I O Unit CJ1W OD211 16 point Transistor Output Unit 1 CIO 0001 Basic I O Unit CJ1W TC001 Temperature Control Unit 20 CIO 2010 to CIO 2029 1 Special I O Unit ine CJ1W OD231 32 point Transistor Output Unit CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 Basic I O Unit 1 6 O Allocation to CPU Bus Units Each CJ series CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 according the unit number set on the Unit CJ series CPU Bus Units can be mounted to the CJ series CPU Rack or CJ series Expansion Racks x o m o Word Allocation The following table shows which words in the CJ series CPU Bus Unit Area are allocated to eac
241. ction Delay Time 10 ms max in the PC Setup Power Holding Time The maximum amount of time fixed at 10 ms that 5 V will be held internally after power shuts OFF The time that it takes for the power OFF interrupt task to execute must not exceed 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time processing time after power OFF is confirmed The power OFF inter rupt task will be ended even if it has not been completely executed the moment this time expires 10 5 1 Description of Operation 1 2 3 1 Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 120 V AC 200 to 240 V AC or 24 V DC power supply falls below 8596 of the minimum rated voltage for the power OFF detection time somewhere between 10 to 25 ms 2 Ifthe Power OFF Detection Delay Time is set 0 to 10 ms in the PC Setup then the following operations will be performed when the set time expires a Ifthe power OFF interrupt task is disabled default PC Setup setting The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset immedi ately 269 Power OFF Operation 270 b Section 10 5 If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled in the PC Setup the CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset after the power OFF interrupt task has been executed Make sure that the power OFF inter rupt task will finish executing within 10 ms minus the Power OFF De tection Delay Time processing time after power OFF The 5 V internal power supply will be maintained only for 10 m
242. ctors in Adequate spacing between Check visually and adjust if neces external wiring connectors sary Check for damaged external No damage Check visually and replace cables if wiring cables necessary User service Check whether the CJ1W Life expectancy is 5 years Replace the battery when its ser able parts BAT01 Battery has reached its at 25 C less at higher tem vice life has passed even if a bat service life peratures tery error has not occurred From 0 75 to 5 years Battery life depends upon the depending on model model the percentage of time in power supply rate and service and ambient conditions ambient temperature Note The following table shows the allowable voltage fluctuation ranges for source power supplies Supply voltage Allowable voltage range 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC Tools Required for Inspections Required Tools Slotted and Phillips head screwdrivers Voltage tester or digital voltmeter Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth Tools Required Occasionally Synchroscope Oscilloscope with pen plotter Thermometer and hygrometer humidity meter 12 1 2 Handling Precautions Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF When a faulty Unit has been found and replaced check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair describe the problem in as much detail as possible enclos
243. cuit that prevents the power supply to the controlled system from going on before the power supply to the PC itself When any of the following errors occurs PC operation will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF Operation of the Power Supply Unit s overcurrent protection circuit A CPU error watchdog timer error or CPU on standby A fatal error memory error I O bus error duplicate number error too many I O points error program error cycle time too long error or FALS 007 error Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event of an error that stops PC operation When a fatal error occurs all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I O memory When the IOM Hold Bit is ON the outputs will retain their previous status after the PC has been switched from RUN MONITOR mode to PRO GRAM mode It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal circuitry of the Output Unit such as a relay or transistor malfunction Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PC to ensure the safety of the system in the event that an output fails to go OFF The following emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the con trolled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when the PC is operating and the RUN output is ON A
244. cuits Number of Simultaneously ON Points 75 12 points common at 24 V DC Refer to the following illustration Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR ter minal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max Weight 70 g max Accessories None 301 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Circuit Configuration 5 6 kQ INO0 9 t to i A4INIS 1000pF COMOO a COMO Ea EE i o s i Input indicator i E 5 6kQ mi INOO gt t to i B4INIS L 1000 pF COMI i COM Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs Ambient Temperature Characteristic 32 points at 48 C j Input voltage 24 VDC Input voltage 26 4 VDC 24 points at 55 C 32 points at 40 C 20 points at 55 C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 C Ambient Temperature Number of simultaneously ON points Terminal Connections The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same polarity is set for rows A and B Both COMO and COM have two pins each Although they are internally connected wire all points com pletely 302 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Note The ON response time will be 20 us maximum and
245. d Retained Cleared Cleared Retained 81 Cleared Cleared Display Startup Mode Mode on Programming Console s mode switch A Address PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode 128001 Address Value Hex RUN mode Low Battery Voltage Detection Do not detect Interrupt Task Error Detection Do not detect Do not detect Detect Detect Do not detect 136 A Value Hex Detect Detect EM File Memory Conversion None EM File Memory Enabled Bank No 0 EM File Memory Enabled Bank No 1 EM File Memory Enabled Bank No 2 357 PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix D 358 Address 144 Peripheral Port Value Hex Data bits Stop bits Parity Value Hex Communications mode Default Rightmost 2 digits ignored Host link NT link Peripheral bus Host link Address 145L 1E A Peripheral Port 9 600 bps 300 bps 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps Note Set 0000 to 0009 Hex for standard NT Links and 000A Hex for high speed NT Links PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming
246. d Controller Link link tables add spaces 20 Hex up as AUTOEXEC Easy backup file names must be named BACKUP BACKUP Specify 8 ASCII characters For a file name with less than 8 characters Always specify the name of files to be transferred automatically at power File Memory 3 2 2 Initializing File Memory File memory Memory Card Initializing procedure 1 Install Memory Card into CPU Unit 2 Initialize the Memory Card using a Program ming Device including the Section 3 2 Data capacity after initialization HMC EF861 Approx 7 6 Mbytes HMC EF171 Approx 15 3 Mbytes HMC EF371 Approx 30 6 Mbytes CX Programmer and Pro gramming Consoles 1 Convert the part of the 1 bank EM Area from the specified 3 banks bank No to the last bank No to file memory in the PC Setup 2 Initialize the EM file memory using a Program ming Device including the CX Programmer and Pro gramming Consoles EM file memory Approx 61 KB Approx 189 KB 3 2 3 Using File Memory Memory Card Reading Writing Files Using Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Console Data transfer direction Between CPU Unit and Mem ory Card File name and extension tok OBJ took OM aok STD Program files Data files Parameter files 1 2 3 1 Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit 2 Initialize the Memory Card if necessary 3 Name the f
247. d ON and the Special I O Unit may not operate properly In this case the cycle time can be extended by setting a minimum cycle time in the PC Setup or cyclic I O refreshing with the Special I O Unit can be disabled When cyclic refreshing has been disabled the Special I O Unit s data can be refreshed during pro gram execution with IORF 097 Always disable a Special I O Unit s cyclic refreshing if the Unit s I O will be refreshed in an interrupt task with IORF 097 An interrupt task error A40213 will occur if cyclic refreshing and IORF 097 refreshing are performed simulta neously 8 2 2 CPU Bus Units CPU Bus Unit Area I O Refreshing Data can be exchanged between CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit through the CPU Bus Unit Area the DM Area or FINS commands Data is exchanged each cycle during I O refreshing of the CPU Bus Unit Area Basically 25 words are allocated to each CPU Bus Unit based on its unit number setting The number of words actually used by the CPU Bus Unit var ies The Special I O Unit Area ranges from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 25 words x 16 Units 183 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8 2 CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit CPU Bus Unit Area 25 words Unit DM Area Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of D30000 to D31599 100 words x 16 Units There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit The timing of data transfers depends o
248. d Peripheral Servicing 10 1 3 Initialization r e n E eee eee 10 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes 00 0 eee eee ee eee 10 2 1 Operating Modes 0 0 cee cee eee 10 2 2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time 0 0 0 eee eee eee 10 3 1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart 00 000 10 3 2 Cycle Time Overview 0 0 eee ee eee 10 3 3 Cycle Time Calculation Example 00 10 3 4 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension 10 3 5 I O Response Time 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 10 3 6 Interrupt Response Times 0 00 00 02 e eee eee ee 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps 10 5 Power OFF Operation gott Bee PRI ELE 10 5 1 Description of Operation 00 0 0 eee eee eee SECTION 10 CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time 238 238 239 239 240 240 240 243 243 244 247 247 248 249 250 267 269 237 CPU Unit Operation Section 10 1 10 1 CPU Unit Operation 10 1 1 General Flow The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit Power ON i Initialize memory hardware Compare actually UnitS with the and system work area l O table Startup Initialization ies lt Detect I O I O memory clear user memory Automatic transfer from UM check Memory Card at startup Clear forced set r
249. d during execution of a Trace OFF when the next time the Sampling Start Bit A50815 is turned from OFF to ON 1 Trace com pleted 0 Not tracing or trace in progress Retained A50813 ON when the Sampling Start Bit A50815 is turned from OFF to ON OFF when the trace is com pleted 1 Trace in progress 0 Not tracing not sampling 341 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Classifi Name Addresses Function Settings Status Statusat Write Related cation z after startup timing Flags Word Bit mode Settings change Trace Start Bit Sampling Start Bit A50814 Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condition The offset indi cated by the delay value positive or negative deter mines which data samples are valid 1 Trace trigger condition established 0 Not estab lished A50815 When a data trace is started by turning this bit from OFF to ON from a Programming Device the PC will begin storing data in Trace Memory by one of the three following meth ods 1 Data is sampled at regu lar intervals 10 to 2 550 ms 2 Data is sampled when TRSM 045 is executed in the program 3 Data is sampled at the end of every cycle The operation of A50815 can be controlled only from a Programming Device 0 to 1 Starts data trace sampling Turned ON from Program ming Device Time Info Start up Time A510 to A511 These w
250. d for a CS CJ series PC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step Refer to the information at the end of 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps for guide lines on converting program capacities from previous OMRON PCs Upward Downward Most instructions are supported in differentiated form indicated with T 4 Differentiation and 96 Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by the fol lowing amounts Symbol Increase in execution time Tori 0 45 or 0 33 Sequence Input When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length Instructions column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution time us time us LOAD LD 1 0 08 Designating words 0 08 0 71 Designating indirect IR 0 08 ILD 2 21 16 Increase compared to normal instruction 21 16 LOAD NOT LD NOT 1 0 08 Designating words 0 08 0 71 Designating indirect IR 0 08 ILD NOT 2 21 16 Increase compared to normal instruction 21 16 AND AND 1 0 08 Designating words 0 08 0 71 Designating indirect IR 0 08 IAND 2 21 16 Increase compared to normal instruction 21 16 250 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Instruction Mnemonic AND NOT Code Length steps ON execution time us Section 10 4 Conditions Designating words OFF execution time us Des
251. d from the CPU Unit using the CX Programmer When the I O tables are deleted all settings for first words for Racks will also be deleted 180 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8 2 8 1 8 Procedures for Registering I O Tables I O Table Registration with Use the following procedure to register the I O table with the CX Programmer CX Programmer 1 2 3 1 Double click O Table in the project tree in the main window The I O Ta ble Window will be displayed 2 Select Options and then Create The models and positions of the Units mounted to the Racks will be written to the CPU Unit as the registered I O tables I O Table Registration with Use the following procedure to register the I O table with a Programming Con a Programming Console sole oponi Ji 8 2 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units This section describes how data can be exchanged between Special I O Units or CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit 8 2 1 Special I O Units Special I O Unit Area Data is exchanged each cycle during I O refreshing of the Special I O Unit I O Refreshing Area Basically 10 words are allocated to each Special I O Unit based on its unit number setting Refer to the operation manuals for individual Special I O Units for details The Special I O Unit Area ranges from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 10 words x 96 Units 181 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8 2 Special I O Unit CPU
252. details on word allocations refer to the DeviceNet CompoBus D Opera tion Manual W267 DeviceNet CPU Unit Master Unit DeviceNet Area I Er Nar ar With fixed allocation words are assigned according to node numbers If a Slave requires two or more words it will occupy as many node numbers as words required DeviceNet Slaves The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases Initialization 1 23 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup 3 The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PCoperation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when FALS 007 is executed IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON the contents of the DeviceNet Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the DeviceNet Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled 9 8 Internal I O Area The Internal I O Work Area
253. dically and more than once in each cycle Up to five items can be set for priority servicing including the RS 232C port peripheral port CPU Bus Units and Special I O Units This feature supports applications that require giving priority to servic ing peripheral devices over program execution such as for host monitoring systems for process control where response speed is important PC operation can be customized with PC Setup settings such as the maxi mum cycle time setting watch cycle time and the instruction error operation setting which determines whether instruction processing errors and access errors are treated as non fatal or fatal errors The PC s initial settings can be customized with the PC Setup The single port multiple access SPMA function can be used to program and monitor other CPU Bus Units on the same bus CPU Rack or Expansion Racks or other CPU Units on the same network from a serial port on the CPU Unit Programming Device Several CPU Bus Units on the same bus or other CPU Units on the same network can be accessed from a single port 11 Function Tables Section 1 3 1 3 Function Tables 1 3 1 Basic Opera tion and Sys tem Design Purpose Studying system configura tion Functions Arranged by Purpose Function Studying I O allocations Installation size Installation methods Setting DIP switches Setting the PC Setup
254. disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals Improper installation of the Units may result in malfunction Be sure that all the terminal screws and cable connector screws are tight ened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning Wire all connections correctly Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com pletely Be sure that the terminal blocks Memory Units expansion cables and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place Improper locking may result in malfunction Check switch settings the contents of the DM Area and other prepara tions before starting operation Starting operation without the proper set tings or data may result in an unexpected operation Check the user program for proper execution before actually
255. e supplied to CX Programmer CJ1G CPU44 0 910 See note or Programming Console l O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 0 020 I O Interface Unit CJ1W 11101 0 130 End Cover CJ1W TERO1 Included with CPU Unit or I O Interface Unit power supply Note The NT ALOO1 Link Adapter consumes 0 15 A Unit when used CJ series Basic I O Units Category Current consumption A Basic Input Units DC Input Units CJ1W ID211 CJ1W ID231 CJ1W ID232 CJ1W ID261 Basic Output Units Transistor Output CJ1W ODe 1 1 Units CJ1W OD212 CJ1W OD231 CJ1W OD232 CJ1W OD261 Relay Output Units CJ1W OC201 CJ1W OC211 Category Name Current consumption A Special I O Units Analog Input Unit CJ1W ADO81 0 43 Analog Output Unit CJ1W DAO41 0 12 CJ series Special I O Units CJ series CPU Bus Units Category Current consumption A CPU Bus Units Controller Link CJ1W CLK21 0 35 Unit Serial Communi CU1W SCU41 0 38 See note cations Unit Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN11 0 38 Note NT ALO01 Link Adapters consume 0 15 Unit when used Current Consumptions for 24 V Supply Category Name Mode Current consumption A Basis Output Relay Contact CJ1W OC201 0 048 Units Output Units 0 006 x number of ON points CJ1W OC211 0 096 0 006 x number of ON points 57 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity Section 2 7 2 7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity Settings for most CP
256. e Length steps See note ON execution time us Section 10 4 Conditions OFF execution time us SIGNED BINARY ADD C 402 4 0 37 Constant constant word 0 37 WITH CARRY 2 33 Indirect IR indirect IR gt 0 37 indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED CL 403 4 0 54 Constant constant word 0 54 BINARY ADD WITH nmn 2 71 Indirect IR indirect IR gt 0 37 CARRY indirect IR BCD ADD WITHOUT B 404 4 14 0 0 37 CARRY DOUBLE BCD ADD BL 405 4 19 0 0 37 WITHOUT CARRY BCD ADD WITH BC 406 4 14 5 0 37 CARRY DOUBLE BCD ADD BCL 407 4 19 6 0 37 WITH CARRY SIGNED BINARY 410 4 0 37 Constant constant word 0 37 SUBTRACT WITH 2 33 Indirect IR indirect IR gt 0 37 OUT CARRY indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED L 411 4 0 54 Constant constant word 0 54 BINARY SUBTRACT 2 71 Indirect IR indirect IR 0 37 WITHOUT CARRY indirect IR aa A SIGNED BINARY C 412 4 0 37 Constant constant word 0 37 US SET ME 2 33 Indirect IR indirect IR gt 0 37 CARRY indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED CL 413 4 0 54 Constant constant word 0 54 BINARY SUBTRACT 2 71 Indirect IR indirect IR 0 37 WITH CARRY indirect IR BCD SUBTRACT B 414 4 13 1 0 37 WITHOUT CARRY DOUBLE BCD SUB BL 415 4 18 2 0 37 TRACT WITHOUT CARRY BCD SUBTRACT BC 416 4 13 8 0 37 WITH CARRY DOUBLE BCD SU
257. e in Console Auxiliary A400 display Area CPU error Power is not being Supply power to the Expan CPU supplied to an sion Racks reset Expansion Rack l O Control Unit is Turn OFF the power supply not connected cor correct the connections and rectly e g more turn the power supply back than one is con ON nected or one is connected to an Expansion Rack The I O Connecting Turn OFF the power supply cable is not con correct the connections and nected correctly turn the power supply back e g the connections ON to the input and out put connectors on the I O Interface Unit are backward Note When power supply is interrupted to an Expansion Rack the CPU Unit will stop program execution and the same operations as are performed when the power supply to the CPU Unit is interrupted will be performed For example if the power OFF interrupt task is enabled it will be executed If power is then 276 Error Processing Section 11 2 restored to the Expansion Rack the CPU Unit will perform startup processing i e the same operational status as existed before the power interrupt will not necessarily be continued CPU Standby Errors A CPU standby error has occurred if the indicators have the following condi tions in RUN or MONITOR mode When a CJ series CPU Unit is turned ON cyclic servicing is started and RUN mode is entered only after all Special I O Units and CPU Bus Uni
258. e CPU Unit s DIP switch must be set to ON Double click IO Table on the project tree in the main window The I O Ta ble Window will be displayed Select Options and then Create The models and positions of Units mounted to the Racks will be written to the Registered I O Table in the CPU Unit Using the CX Programmer Offline Use the following procedure to create the I O table offline with the CX Pro grammer and later transfer the I O table from to the CPU Unit Write the I O table j Double click IO Table on the project tree in the main window The I O Ta ble Window will be displayed Double click the Rack to be edited The slots for that Rack will be dis played Right click the slots to be edited and select the desired Units from the pull down menu Select Options and then Transfer to PLC to transfer the I O table to the CPU Unit Transfer the I O table The first word allocated to each Rack can be set from the Programming Device 99 Examples Section 4 2 6 PC Setup Settings 100 These settings are the CPU Unit s software configuration The PC Setup settings are arranged by word addresses when a Programming Console is used to make PC Setup settings This example shows a Program ming Console used to make the following settings Set a Minimum Cycle Time in 1 ms units Set a Watch Cycle Time maximum cyc
259. e back until they lock into place e PAZOR SS en Drow E m romen ae Lock Y Release Jee u AC100 240V INPUT L2N fh lt Slider RUI Os gt EE LIP E 9 E es 3 Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the Rack CPU Rack Fe z gt gt e Ee MM cem Power Supply CPU Unit VO Control Unit End Cover Unit VO Units 10 max included with CPU Unit Note Connect the I O Control Unit directly to the CPU Unit to enable connecting Expansion Racks Expansion Rack falta Power Supply 1 0 Interface Unit End Cover Unit lO Units 10 max included with CPU Unit Note Connect the I O Interface Unit directly to the Power Supply Unit There is no Backplane for the CJ series The PC is constructed by connecting Units together using the connectors on the sides NCaution Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the Rack An I O bus error will occur and the PC will not operate in either RUN or MONITOR mode if the End Cover is not connected If this occurs the following information will be set in memory Address I O Bus Error Flag A 40114 I O Bus Error Slot Number
260. e eee 223 9 16 Index Registers s seco opride na nnns See E EENE Joes eee ea ee 224 9 17 Dat Registers ease Saga eee EEUU ee e E De eh rev 230 9 18 Task Fla gS nostre ee RE bee Sea See hewn 231 9 19 Condition Flags 0 0 Ie 232 9 20 Clock Pulses 4 0 c04 5 das seh te ei a ee ee aks 233 9 2T Parameter Areas e cesser eret heme Pe Re RE Rb ECRIRE 234 921 1 UPC SCUp zs ec reU EUR CRM Le NICHE ORI n 234 9 21 2 Registered I O Table 0 eee ee eee 234 9 21 3 Routing Table ic ee os tk etek LEE bee eee ee es 235 9 21 4 CPU Bus Unit Setting 00 eee 236 187 Introduction 9 1 Introduction l O Memory Area Parameter Area 188 Section 9 1 The CPU Unit s memory RAM with battery back up can be divided into three parts the User Program Memory I O Memory Area and Parameter Area This section describes the I O Memory Area and Parameter Area This region of memory contains the data areas which can be accessed by instruction operands The data areas include the CIO Area Work Area Hold ing Area Auxiliary Area DM Area EM Area Timer Area Counter Area Task Flag Area Data Registers Index Registers Condition Flag Area and Clock Pulse Area ireirction I O Memory Area ped ge p22 This region of memory contains various settings that cannot be specified by instruction operands they can be specified from a Programming Device only The settings include the PC Setup I
261. e following display 5 Registering the I O Tables If Required Registering the I O tables allocates I O memory to the Units actually installed in the PC It is not necessary to create I O tables with CJ series CPU Units because by default they will be automatically generated when the CPU Unit is started I O tables can be created by the user to detect mistakes in connected Units or to enable allocating unused words such as is possible with CS series CPU Units Using a Programming Console Use the following procedure to register the I O table with a Programming Con sole Install the Units Programming Console 1 2 3 1 Install all of the Units in the PC 2 Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port It can be connected with the power on 3 Register the I O table E Password 9713 98 Examples 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Section 4 2 WRITE Specify holding or clearing CPU Bus Unit information Using the CX Programmer Online Use the following procedure to register the I O table with the CX Programmer that is connected to the PC Install the Units Install all of the Units in the PC Connect the host computer to the peripheral port or RS 232C port The power must be OFF Note If the host computer is being connected to the RS 232C port pin 5 of th
262. e following table lists cases in which the PC Setup must be changed In other cases the PC can be operated with the default settings Cases when settings must be changed Setting s to be changed The input response time settings for Basic I O Units must be changed in the following cases Chattering or noise occur in Basic I O Units Short pulse inputs are being received for intervals longer than the cycle time Basic I O Unit Input Response Time Data in all regions of I O Memory including the CIO Area Work Areas Timer Flags and PVs Task Flags Index Registers and Data Registers must be retained when the PC s power is turned on IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup The status of bits force set or force reset from a Programming Device including Programming Consoles must be retained when the PC s power is turned on Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup You do not want the operating mode to be determined by the Program ming Console s mode switch setting at startup You want the operating mode to be other than RUN mode when the power is turned ON Startup Mode Detection of low battery errors is not required Detect Low Battery Detection of interrupt task errors is not required Detect Interrupt Task Error Part of the EM Area will be used as file memory EM File Memory The peripheral port will not be used with the Programming Console or CX Programmer peripheral bus communication
263. e internal contacts will turn ON close while the CPU Unit is operating CU1W PA205R Programming Manual 6 4 3 RUN Output Battery life Refer to 12 2 Replacing User serviceable Parts Battery Set CPM2A BATO1 12 2 1 Battery Replacement Self diagnostics CPU errors watchdog timer I O bus errors memory errors and battery errors 11 2 4 Error Messages Other functions Storage of number of times power has been interrupted Stored in A514 2 1 2 General Specifications Item Specifications Power Supply Unit CJ1W PA205R 10 5 Power OFF Oper ation Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC wide range 50 60 Hz Operating voltage and fre quency ranges 85 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz Power consumption 100 VA max Inrush current At 132 V AC 25 C 15 A 8 ms max At 132 V AC 40 C 20 A 8 ms max At 264 V AC 25 C 30 A 8 ms max At 264 V AC 40 C 40 A 8 ms max Output capacity 5 0 A 5 V DC including supply to CPU Unit 0 8 A 24 V DC Total 25 W max 27 Specifications Item Output terminal service sup ply Section 2 1 Specifications Not provided RUN output See Note 2 Contact configuration SPST NO Switch capacity 250 V AC 2 A resistive load 120 V AC 0 5 A inductive load 24 V DC 2A resistive load 24 V DC 2 A inductive load Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 V DC between AC external and GR termina
264. e or host computers Memory Card Power Supply Switch Press the power supply switch to disconnect power before removing the Memory Card Also press the Memory Card Power Supply Switch to perform an easy backup operation Memory Card Connector Connects the Memory Card to the CPU Unit RS 232C Port Connected to Programming Devices excluding Programming Consoles Host Computers general purpose external devices Programmable Terminals and other devices Memory Card Eject Button Press the eject button to remove the Memory Card from the CPU Unit 62 CPU Units Section 3 1 Indicators The following table describes the LED indicators located on the front panel of the CPU Units Indicator Status Meaning ON PC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode Flashing System download mode error or DIP switch settings error OFF PC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM mode or has stopped operating due to a fatal error or is downloading data from the system ERR ALM ON A fatal error has occurred including FALS instruction execution or a hardware error watchdog timer error has occurred The CPU Unit will stop operating and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF Flashing A non fatal error has occurred including FAL instruction execution The CPU Unit will continue operating OFF CPU Unit is operating normally ON Output OFF Bit A50015 has been turned ON The outputs from a
265. e replaced by users ON Response Time 15 ms max OFF Response Time 15 ms max No of Circuits 8 independent contacts Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR ter minal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 2 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Consumption 90 mA 5 V DC max 48 mA 24 V DC 6 mA x No points ON Weight 140 g max Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Terminal Connections Eae 2 Ao am he ci Bo Q M eee n t B1 D Q 9 A2 pue Be OD O C8 A3 Neat votes B3 OD O 1 C4 A4 VM eee iJ B4 D O C5 A5 s eem ERES B5 D O C6 A6 P RE UE Po C7 B6 D e AL B7 L 2 A 250 V AC NC Ag A 2 A 24 V DC max Bg CJ1W OC211 Contact Output Unit Terminal Block 16 Points Circuit Configuration Max Switching Capacity 2 A 250 V AC cos 1 2 A 250 V AC cos 0 4 2 A24 V DC 8 A Unit Min Switching Capacity 1mA5V DC Service Life of Relay Electrical 150 000 operations 24 V DC resistive load 100 000 operations 250 V AC cos 0 4 inductive load Mechanical 20 000 000 operations Service life will var
266. e the most of the PC s functions Do not install the PC in any of the following locations Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0 C or higher than 55 C Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10 or higher than 90 Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to excessive dust salt or metal filings Locations that would subject the PC to direct shock or vibration Locations exposed to direct sunlight Locations that would subject the PC to water oil or chemical reagents Be sure to enclose or protect the PC sufficiently in the following locations Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity Locations close to power lines When the PC is being installed in a cabinet or control panel be sure to pro vide proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and mainte nance Temperature Control The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating range of 0 C to 55 C When necessary take the following steps to maintain the proper temperature Provide enough space for good air flow Do not install the PC above equipment that generates a large amount of heat such as heaters transformers or high capacity resistors If the ambi
267. e this description with the Unit and return the Unit to your OMRON representative For poor contact take a clean cotton cloth soak the cloth in industrial alcohol and carefully wipe the contacts clean Be sure to remove any lint prior to remounting the Unit 12 2 Replacing User serviceable Parts The following parts should be replaced periodically as preventative mainte nance The procedures for replacing these parts are described later in this section Battery the CPU Unit s RAM backup battery 295 Replacing User serviceable Parts Section 12 2 12 2 1 Battery Replacement Battery Functions Battery Service Life and Replacement Period Low Battery Indicators 296 Note The battery retains the following data of the CPU Unit s RAM when the main power supply is OFF The user program The PC Setup Retained regions of I O memory such as the Holding Area and DM Area If the battery is not installed or battery voltage drops too low the data in RAM will be lost when the main power supply goes OFF At 25 C the maximum service life for batteries is 5 years whether or not power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed The battery s lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures and when power is not supplied to the CPU Unit for long periods In the worst case conditions the battery will last for only 0 75 years The following table shows minimum lifetimes and typical lifetim
268. e tings change A34300 t O A34302 Memory Card Type Indicates the type of Memory Card if any installed This information is recorded when the PC power is turned ON or the Memory Card power switch is turned ON 0 None 4 Flash ROM Retained See Function column See Func tion col umn A34306 EM File Memory Format Error Flag ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank allocated for file mem ory The flag is turned OFF when format ting is completed normally 1 Format error 0 No format error Retained Cleared A34307 Memory Card For mat Error Flag ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting error has occurred The flag is turned OFF when formatting is completed nor mally This flag is written when the PC power is turned ON or the Memory Card power switch is turned ON 1 Format error 0 No format error Retained See Function column See Func tion col umn A34308 File Trans fer Error Flag ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory The flag is turned OFF when PC operation begins or data is written success fully 1 Error 0 No error Retained Cleared Written when file data is written 327 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim related Words Bits anter startup ing pi da change A34309
269. e total cable length must CJ series Expansion Racks be 12 m or less 38 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 Rack Configurations Rack Configuration Remarks CJ series CJ series Power Supply Unit One of each Unit required for every CPU Rack Expansion Racks Refer to the following table for details on applicable models I O Interface Unit one End Cover included CJ series Basic I O Units A total of up to 10 Units can be connected An error will occur CJ series Special I O Units if 11 or more Units are connected CJ series CPU Bus Units End Cover CJ1W TERO1 Must be connected to the right end of the Expansion Rack One End Cover is provided with the I O Interface Unit A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected CS CJ series I O Connecting Cable Required to connect the I O Interface Unit to the I O Control Unit or previous I O Interface Unit Proper operation may not be possible if the total length of I O Connecting Cable between all Racks is more than 12 m Configuration Device List Specifications Cable length CJ series CJ1W PA205R 100 to 240 V AC with RUN output Output capacity 5 A at 5 V DC Power Supply Unit I O Interface Unit CJ1W II101 One Interface Unit is required for each CJ series Expansion Rack One End Cover is provided with each Unit Connect to an I O Control Unit mounted on a CJ series CPU Rack or an Interface Unit mounted on an Expansion Rack using a
270. e with the CPU Unit s DIP switch and software settings are made in the PC Setup using a Programming Device The DIP switch can be reached by opening the battery compartment cover on the front of the CPU Unit Note Always turn OFF the PC before changing any DIP switch settings The PC may malfunction due to static discharge if the settings are changed while the PC is ON Appearance Seiting Function 1 ON Writing disabled for user program memory OFF Writing enabled for user program memory 2 ON The user program is automatically transferred and executed when power is turned ON OFF The user program is automatically transferred but not executed when power is turned ON 3 Not used 4 ON Use default peripheral port communications parameters OFF Use peripheral port communications parameters set in the PC Setup 5 ON Use default RS 232C port communications parameters OFF Use RS 232C port communications parameters set in the PC Setup 6 ON User defined pin Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 OFF User defined pin Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 7 ON Writing data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Card or restoring data from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit OFF Verifying contents of Memory Card 8 OFF Always OFF Note The display language for the Programming Console is not set on the DIP switch for CJ series CPU Un
271. ea 32 768 D00000 No See OK OK Main words o Note 2 tained D32767 EM Area 32 768 EO0 0000 No See OK OK Main words 0 to Note 2 tained perbank E2 3276 01t02 3 7 max Timer Completion 4 096 T0000 to Cleared Flags bits T4095 Counter Comple 4 096 C0000 to Main tion Flags bits C4095 tained Timer PVs 4 096 T0000 to Cleared words T4095 189 I O Memory Areas Section 9 2 Area Size Range Task External Bit Word Access Change Statusat Forc usage I O alloca access access F from startup ing tion Read Write Pro ormode bit gram change sta ming tus Device Counter PVs 4 096 words C0000 to C4095 Task Flag Area 32 bits TKOO to TK31 Main tained OK No Cleared Index Registers 16 regis ters IRO to IR15 Data Registers 190 16 regis ters Note 1 DRO to DR15 Used sepa rately in each task Indirect Specific addressi instruc ng only tions only Cleared OK OK Cleared The I O Area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the first word allocated to Racks The status of bits in the DM and EM Areas can be used tested using TST 350 and TSTN 351 Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting resetting Timer Completion Flags
272. eas forcing bit status 195 overview 191 status after fatal errors 195 status after mode changes 195 status after power interruptions 195 data control instructions execution times 261 Data Link Area 201 data links 201 data movement instructions execution times 254 Data Registers 230 data shift instructions execution times 255 data tracing related flags bits 210 debugging Index flags 210 debugging instructions execution times 264 decrement instructions execution times 256 DeviceNet 54 DeviceNet CompoBus D Area 205 dimensions CPU Racks 28 CPU Unit 66 installation 114 Memory Cards 71 Power Supply Units 84 DIP switch 64 display instructions execution times 263 DM Area 221 changing settings 101 settings 94 ducts wiring 113 E EC Directives xix electrical noise 140 EM Area 223 current EM bank 350 EM bank current EM bank 350 EM file memory 67 224 initializing 69 PC Setup settings 150 159 starting bank 328 emergency stop circuit 108 environmental conditions checking 288 Equals Flag 232 error codes 331 348 Error Flag 232 error log 272 347 348 Error Log Area 213 272 321 347 348 error messages 276 errors basic I O errors 214 communications error flags 217 CPU Bus Units 216 CPU Rack 289 CPU standby errors 277 error codes 331 348 error log 10 213 272 347 error messages 276 Programming Consoles 274 Expansion I O Rack 2
273. ection 10 3 When editing online the cycle time will be extended by the time that operation is stopped 1 The above cycle time extensions assume that a lot of instructions requiring time are being used in the program The cycle time extension would be 12 ms max 2 When there is one task online editing is processed all in the cycle time fol lowing the cycle in which online editing is executed written When there are multiple tasks cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks online editing is sepa rated so that for n tasks processing is executed over n to n x2 cycles max 10 3 5 I O Response Time Basic I O Units Minimum I O Response Time Note Maximum I O Response Time 248 The I O response time is the time it takes from when an Input Unit s input turns ON the data is recognized by the CJ series CPU Unit and the user pro gram is executed up to the time for the result to be output to an Output Unit s output terminals The length of the I O response time depends on the following conditions Timing of Input Bit turning ON Cycle time Type of Rack to which Input and Output Units are mounted CPU Rack CPU Expansion Rack Expansion Rack The I O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before I O refresh of the CPU Unit The minimum I O response time is the total of the Input ON delay the cycle time and the Output ON delay The Input and Output ON delay differs according to the Unit u
274. ectric strength value of the diode must be at least 10 times as large as the circuit voltage value The forward current of the diode must be the same as or larger than the load current The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode may be two to three times larger than the supply voltage if the surge protector is applied to electronic circuits with low circuit voltages Varistor method Inductive load The varistor method prevents the impo sition of high voltage between the con tacts by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor There is time lag between the moment the cir cuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the varistor in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the varistor between the con tacts xxi Conformance to EC Directives 6 When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp suppress the inrush current as shown below Countermeasure 1 OUT l4 COM Providing a dark current of approx one third of the rated value through an incandescent amp xxii Countermeasure 2 R OUT e COM Providing a limiting resistor SECTION 1 Introduction This section introduces the special features and functions of the CJ series PCs and describes the differences between these PCs and the earlier CZO0HX HG HE PCs Ted O
275. ed flags set tings A39408 Peripheral Port PT Pri ority Regis tered Flags The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 These flags are written when the pri ority registration command is received 1 Priority reg istered 0 Priority not registered Retained Cleared See Func tion col umn A39506 A39507 File Deleted Flags The system deleted the remainder of an EM file memory file that was being updated when a power inter ruption occurred 1 File deleted 0 No files deleted Cleared Cleared Written when the system deletes the file The system deleted the remainder of a Memory Card file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred 1 File deleted 0 No files deleted Cleared Cleared Written when the system deletes the file A39511 Memory Corruption Detected Flag ON when memory corruption is detected when the power supply is turned ON 1 Memory cor ruption 0 Normal operation Retained See Function column Written when power is turned ON A39512 DIP Switch Pin 6 Sta tus Flag The status of pin 6 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is written to this flag every cycle 1 Pin 6 ON 0 Pin 6 OFF Retained See _ Function column Written every cycle All
276. ed ON or power is interrupted 1 Retained 0 Not retained Retained See Function column See Function column PC Setup Forced Status Hold Bit Status setting A50014 Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer A300 to 00 The contents of the Error Log Area itself A100 to A199 are not cleared This bit is automatically reset to 0 after the Error Log Pointer is reset 0 1 Clear Retained A100 to A199 A300 A50015 Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I O Units and Special I O Units The INH indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light while this bit is ON The status of the Output OFF Bit is retained through power interruptions Retained Retained Auxiliary Area Appendix B Classifi Name Addresses Function Settings Status Statusat Write Related cation Word Bit after startup timing Flags or mode Settings change A50100 t O A50115 Turn these bits ON to restart initialize the CPU Bus Unit with the corre sponding unit number Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F When a restart bit is turned ON the corresponding CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flag A30200 to A30215 will be turned ON Both the restart bit and initializing flag will be turned OFF automatically when initial ization is completed 0 to 1 Restart 1 to 0 Restart completed Turned OFF by the system when the Unit
277. ed range etc Equals Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is equals when the result of a math operation is 0 etc Less Than Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is less than when a value is below a specified range etc Negative Flag Turns ON when the MSB in the result of a math operation is 1 Overflow Flag Turns ON when the result of a math operation overflows Underflow Flag Turns ON when the result of a math operation underflows Greater Than or Equals Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is greater than or equals Not Equal Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is not equal Less than or Equals Flag Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is less than or equals Always ON Flag This flag is always ON Always OFF Flag This flag is always OFF Clock Pulse Area 0 02 s clock pulse Repeatedly turns ON for 0 02 s and OFF for 0 02 s 0 1 s clock pulse Repeatedly turns ON for 0 1 s and OFF for 0 1 s 0 2 s clock pulse Repeatedly turns ON for 0 2 s and OFF for 0 2 s 1 s clock pulse Repeatedly turns ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s 1 min clock pulse Repeatedly turns ON for 1 min and OFF for 1 min Details on Auxiliary Area Operation A100 to A199 Error Log Area A100 A101 A102 A103 A1 04 A195 A196 A197 A198
278. en screws 2 Faulty terminal block connector contact Replace terminal block connector 1 Common terminal screws are loose 3 Faulty data bus Replace Unit 4 Faulty CPU Replace CPU Input indicator is not lit in nor mal operation Faulty indicator or indicator circuit Replace Unit 291 Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11 3 Output Units Symptom Not all outputs turn ON Cause 1 Load is not supplied with power Remedy Supply power 2 Load voltage is low Adjust voltage to within rated range Tighten screws 4 Faulty terminal block connector contact Replace terminal block connector 1 2 3 Terminal block screws are loose 4 5 5 An overcurrent possibly caused by a short at the load resulted in a blown fuse in the Output Unit Some Output Units provide an indicator for blown fuses Replace fuse or Unit 6 Faulty I O bus connector contact Replace Unit 7 Output circuit is faulty Replace Unit 8 If the INH indicator is lit the Output OFF Bit A50015 is ON Turn A50015 OFF Not all outputs turn OFF Output circuit is faulty Replace Unit Output of a specific bit num ber does not turn ON or indi cator is not lit 1 Output ON time too short because of a mistake in programming Correct program to increase the time that the output is ON
279. en the specified change is detected and the count will be incremented 5 Click the Stop button Differential monitoring will stop Examples Section 4 2 Time Chart Monitoring The CX Programmer s time chart monitor operation can be used to check and debug program execution Data Tracing The CX Programmer s data trace operation can be used to check and debug program execution Online Editing When a few lines of the program in the CPU Unit have to be modified they can be edited online with the PC in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode When more extensive modifications are needed upload the program from the CPU Unit to the host computer make the necessary changes and transfer the edited program back to the CPU Unit When a Programming Console is being used display the desired program address input the new instruction and press the WRITE Key twice A single program address instruction can be edited Program address display Input instruction vane When CX Programmer is being used several instruction blocks can be edited 16 Save and Print the Program 17 Run the Program To save the program select File and then Save or Save As To print the program select File and then Print Switch the PC to RUN mode to run the program 105 SECTION 5 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install a PC System including mounting the various Units and wiring the
280. ension kkkkk kkk Contents Binary Text CSV All user programs PC Setup registered I O tables routing tables CPU Bus Unit settings and Controller Link data link tables File type Data files Specified range in I O memory See note 1 Program files Parameter files File name Extension AUTOEXEC Contents DM area data stores data for specified number of words start ing from D20000 DM area data stores data for specified number of words start ing from D00000 EM area for bank No LI stores data for specified number of words starting from EL 00000 File type Data files ATEXECDM ATEXECE 67 File Memory Easy Backup Files 68 Note File type Program files Contents All user programs File name AUTOEXEC Section 3 2 Extension Parameter files File type Data files PC Setup registered I O tables routing tables CPU Bus Unit set tings and Controller Link data link tables Contents Words allocated to Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units in the DM area AUTOEXEC File name BACKUP Extension CIO area BACKUPIO General purpose DM area BACKUPDM General purpose EM area BACKUPE Program files All user programs Ts Parameter files PC Setup registered I O tables routing tables CJ series CPU Bus Unit settings an
281. ent temperature exceeds 55 C install a cooling fan or air con ditioner Control panel IN Louver If a Programming Console will be left on the PC the ambient temperature must be within the Programming Console s operating range of 0 C to 45 C Section 5 2 Installation Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance separate the PC as much as possible from high voltage equipment and moving machinery The PC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of about 1 3 m 4 feet Improving Noise Resistance Do not mount the PC in a control panel containing high voltage equip ment Install the PC at least 200 mm 6 5 feet from power lines Power lines 200 mm min PC 200 mm min Ground the mounting plate between the PC and the mounting surface When I O Connecting Cables are 10 m or longer connect the control pan els in which Racks are mounted with heavier power wires 3 wires at least 2 mm in cross sectional area PC Orientation Each Rack must be mounted in an upright position to provide proper cool TIT Do not install a Rack in any of the following positions 111 Installation Section 5 2 Mi
282. ent will start flowing Figure 1 Normal Condition OUT OUTPUT instruction lour Output current ERR Alarm output ERR indicator lim Detection current Tj Junction temperature of transistor Tstd Thermal shutdown temperature Tr Reset temperature Figure 2 Overload or Short circuit ON OUT QEF Tj Tstd Tj Tr Operating Restrictions for the CJ1W OD212 OD232 These Units are provided with short circuit protection these are for protecting internal circuits against momen tary short circuiting in the load As shown in Figure 2 below the short circuit protection is automatically released when the Tj equals to Tr Therefore unless the cause of short circuit is removed ON OFF operations will be repeated in the output Leaving short circuits for any length of time will cause internal temperature rise deterioration of elements discoloration of the case or PCBs etc Therefore observe the following restrictions Restrictions If a short circuit occurs in an external load immediately turn OFF the corresponding output and remove the cause An an alarm output bit that corresponds to the external load output number is turned ON There is an alarm output bit for every common When an alarm output bit turns ON use a self holding bit for the alarm in the user program and turn OFF the corresponding output The alarm output bit is allocated in the Basic I O Unit Information Area A050 to A089 for every Unit mounting slot The fo
283. eral bus setting See note 2 5 RS 232C port com ON Auto detect Pro e Leave this pin OFF when the RS 232C port is being used for munications gramming a device other CX Programmer peripheral bus setting such parameters Device as a Programmable Terminal or host computer See note 3 Turn this pin ON when using CX Programmer peripheral bus OFF Use parameters setting connected to the RS 232C port default set in the PC Setup 6 User defined pin ON A39512 ON The ON OFF status of this pin is reflected in A39512 Use this OFF A39512 OFF function when you want to create an Always ON or Always OFF default condition in the program without using an Input Unit 7 Easy backup set ON Writing from the Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for three ting CPU Unit to the seconds Memory Card Restoring from To read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit turn ON the PC the Memory power Card to the CPU This operation is given priority over automatic transfer pin 2 is Unit ON when power is ON 7 Easy backup set OFF Verifying Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for three ting default contents of seconds Memory Card 8 Not used OFF Always OFF default Note 1 The following data is write protected when pin 1 is ON the user program and all data in the parameter area such as the PC Setup and registered l O table Furthermore when pin 1 is ON the user program and parameter area won t
284. eral port RS 232C Cable CS1W CN118 Cable 2 If cables with model numbers ending in V instead of CV are used to con nect the computer running the CX Programmer to the RS 232C port in cluding when using a CJ1W CN118 Cable a peripheral bus connection cannot be used Use a Host Link SYSMAC WAY connection To connect to the port using a peripheral bus connection prepare an RS 232C cable as described in 3 3 4 RS 232C Port Specifications CX Programmer Connecting Cables Unit port Computer Serial Cable notes port communications mode CPU Units Built in D Sub 9 pin Peripheral Bus or CJ1W CN226 peripheral male Host Link CJ1W CN626 port Built in D Sub 9 pin Peripheral Bus or XW2Z 200S CV Use a static RS 232C male Host Link XW2Z 500S CV resistant con port nector D Sub 9 pin female Serial Com RS 232C D Sub 9 pin Host Link XW2Z 200S CV Use a static munications Port male XW2Z 500S CV resistant con Units D Sub 9 nector pin female Note Before connecting a connector from the above table to the RS 232C port touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your body The XW2Z S CV Cables have been strengthened against static because they use a static resistant connector hood XM2S 091 1 E Even so always discharge static electricity before touching the connectors RS 232C Cables for a
285. erentiation monitoring Yes Yes Reading cycle time Yes Yes Data tracing No Yes Time chart monitoring No Yes Reading error information Yes error message display Yes Reading error log No Yes Reading setting timer information Yes Yes Reading setting PC parameters Yes Yes Setting CPU Bus Unit parameters No Yes File mem Initializing Memory Card Yes Yes ory opera Initializing EM file mem Yes Yes tions ory Transferring files between Yes Yes CPU Unit and file mem ory Remote pro Between Host Link and No Yes gramming Network PC e monitor via modem No Yes Setting password protection No Yes Managing files No Manages files by project Printing No Yes 3 3 1 Programming Consoles There are three Programming Consoles that can be used with the CJ series CPU Units The CQM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO1 E and C200H PRO27 E These Programming Consoles are shown here CQM1H PRO01 E Programming Console Pu Connection 8 LCD area Mode selector switch FUN SFT NOT 4 a el o Operation keys Install the CS1W KS001 E Key Sheet TIT Cable included with CQM1H PROO1 E Programming Console CQM1H PROO1 E Programming Console 75 Programming Devices Section 3 3 CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Console Ger Connection LCD area
286. es for the backup battery Maximum Minimum lifetime Typical lifetime lifetime See note See note CJ1G CPUDID 6 500 hours 0 75 years 43 000 hours 5 years The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 55 C The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temper ature of 25 C Memory Backup Time A 5 yr SSS RS ey pene ri ee ees 4yr 3yr a a E 2yr fl fl Ambi 255 40 C EEG Ambient temperature This graphic is for reference only If the PC Setup has been set to detect a low battery error the ERR ALM indi cator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the battery is nearly dis charged When the ERR ALM indicator flashes connect a Programming Console to the peripheral port and read the error message If the message BATT LOW appears on the Programming Console and the Battery Error Flag A40204 is Replacing User serviceable Parts Section 12 2 Note Replacement Battery Replacement Procedure 1 2 3 ON first check whether the battery is properly connected to the CPU Unit If the battery is properly connected replace the battery as soon as possible Once a low battery error has been detected it will take 5 days before the bat tery fails assuming that power has been supplied at lease once a day Battery failure and the resulting loss of dat
287. es not exist or the Memory Card is not installed Read only Replacement Error Flag A65014 ON when the Replacement Start Bit A65015 has been turned ON to replace the program but there is an error If the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON again the Replacement Error Flag will be turned OFF Read only 211 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function File Mem ory Informa tion contd 212 Name Replacement Start Bit Address A65015 Description Program replacement starts when the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON if the Program Password A651 is valid A5A5 Hex Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit during program replacement When the power is turned ON or program replace ment is completed the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in error It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Programming Device PT or host computer Access Read only Program Password Input the password to replace a program A5A5 Hex Replacement Start Bit A65015 is enabled Any other value Replacement Start Bit A65015 is disabled When the power is turned ON or program replace ment is completed the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in error Read only Program File Name
288. eset etc Check for battery errors Overseeing processing lt Read DIP switch settings Mounted Memory Card and other checks 4 Operation processing Execute the user program Program execution Cycle time Lo gt S lt Process errors Turn outputs OFF Output Units reset for but errors 1 Clear I O memory area if an error occurs unless a FALS instruction is executed The following data is refreshed cyclically Data for Basic I O Units Special I O Units allocated word data and specific Unit data and CPU Bus Units allocated word data and specific Unit data Data is refreshed even in PROGRAM mode I O refresh E See note The servicing is performed when an event occurs for the following Peripheral servicing Special I O Units CPU Bus Units peripheral port RS 232C port file access communications port 238 CPU Unit Operation Section 10 1 10 1 2 I O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing Type of Description Max data Data exchange service exchange area Data is exchanged with Basic I O Units Depends on the I O bit area areas allocated in the Unit CPU Unit beforehand and Special Refreshing allocated I O words 10 words Unit Special I O Unit bit for specific Unit func O depends on the area tions I O refreshing will Units Unit execute without interrup tion time slice during ne Refreshing for speci
289. essing DM words All words in the DM and EM Areas can be indirectly addressed Simplifying the program by switching to PC memory address specification Use Index Registers as pointers to indirectly address data area addresses The Index Registers are very useful in combination with loops increment instructions and table data process ing instructions The auto increment auto decrement and offset functions are also supported Programming Manual W394 6 2 Index Registers Consolidating instruction blocks with the same pat tern but different addresses into a single instruction block Use MCRO 099 Instructions Reference Manual W340 MCRO 099 in the Sub routine Instructions Managing the Cycle Time Reducing the cycle time Use tasks to put parts of the pro gram that don t need to be executed into standby status Use JMP 004 and JME 005 to jump parts of the task that don t need to be executed Convert parts of the task to subrou tines if they are executed only under particular conditions e Disable a Units Special I O Unit refreshing in the PC Setup if it isn t necessary to exchange data with that Special I O Unit every cycle Setting a fixed minimum cycle time Set a minimum cycle time in the PC Setup Programming Manual W394 6 1 Cycle Time High speed Pro cessing Setting a maximum cycle time Generating an error for a cycle time exceed
290. etting No SIGNED BINARY TO BCD Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY TO BCD Logic Instructions Instruction LOGICAL AND Mnemonic Data format setting No Data format setting No Data format setting No WO PM AH O PP ol viN olvii PM oO Data format setting No When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Constant A constant word OFF execution time us Indirect IR A indirect IR indirect IR DOUBLE LOGICAL AND Constant A constant gt word Indirect IR A indirect IR indirect IR LOGICAL OR Constant V constant word Indirect IR V indirect IR indirect IR DOUBLE LOGICAL OR Constant V constant word Indirect IR V indirect IR indirect IR EXCLUSIVE OR Constant V constant word Indirect IR V indirect IR indirect IR DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR Constant V constant word Indirect IR V indirect IR indirect IR EXCLUSIVE NOR Constant V constant gt word Indirect IR V indirect IR indirect IR DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR Constant V constant gt word Indirect IR V indirect IR
291. etting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the PV and Com pletion Flag will be retained when the PC s power is cycled 3 Since the TIML 542 and MTIM 543 instructions do not use timer num bers they are reset under different conditions Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details 4 The present value of TIM TIMH 015 TMHH 540 TIMW 813 and TM HW 815 timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to 2047 will be up dated even when jumped between JMP and JME instructions or when in a task that is on standby The present value of timers programmed with timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will be held when jumped or when in a task that is on standby Timer Completion Flags can be force set and force reset Timer PVs cannot be force set or force reset although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force setting resetting the Completion Flag 220 Counter Area Section 9 13 There are no restrictions in the order of using timer numbers or in the number of N C or N O conditions that can be programmed Timer PVs can be read as word data and used in programming 9 13 Counter Area The 4 096 counter numbers C0000 to C4095 are shared by the CNT CNTR 012 and CNTW 814 instructions Counter Completion Flags and present values PVs for these instructions are accessed with the counter numbers When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data the counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter When
292. etween the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max No of Circuits 16 16 points common 2 circuits Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 100 mA max Fuse None External Power Supply 10 2 to 26 4 V DC 20 mA min 110 g max i i a Output indicator E o o ae cae i i i ee epo oru E laras OUTI5 COM Specifications of Basic I O Units Terminal Connections Appendix A lan o ww ae D M NU jx BH D t O 2 NM Ba 5 D 4 D e A3 NU B3 D 4 bp tly NU B4 O L D 10 A5 NU MU B5 D n 4 D 12 ag n NU B6 3 D n ro 14 A7 MU MU B De L conf Ag 12 to 24 V DC Bg Lv When wiring pay careful attention to the polarity The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is reversed CJ1W OD231 Transistor Output Unit Fujitsu Connector 32 Points Sinking Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 10 2 to 26 4 V DC Maximum Load Current 0 5 A point 2 0 A common 4 0 A Unit Maximum Inrush Current 4 0 A point 10 ms max Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 1 5 V max ON Response Time 0 1 ms max OFF Response Time 0 8 ms max Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between the external terminals
293. f the I O Memory Hold Bit Output from Output Units will be turned OFF when oper ation stops even if I O bit status is held in the CPU Unit 241 CPU Unit Operating Modes I O Memory Hold Bit status A50012 Section 10 2 2 The cycle time will increase by approximately 10 ms when the operating mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode This will not however cause an error for exceeding the maximum cycle time limit I O Memory Output bits allocated to Output Units Mode changed between PROGRAM and RUN MONITOR Cleared Operation stopped Fatal error other than FALS Cleared FALS executed Mode changed between PROGRAM and RUN MONITOR Operation stopped Fatal error other than FALS FALS executed 242 Held Held Note See Chapter 7 Memory Areas etc for more details on I O Memory Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 10 3 Computing the Cycle Time 10 3 1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart The CJ series CPU Units process data in repeating cycles from the oversee ing processing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagram Clears I O memory non holding area Checks I O Unit connections Resets watchdog timer Checks hardware and user program memor Startup initializa tion Overseeing pro cessing PC cycle time Resets watchdog timer and user pro gram timer Sets error flags Flas
294. fic Unit Depends on Unit Depends on Unit service period functions Refreshing words allocated in 25 words Unit CPU Bus Unit CIO Area Area in CIO Area Refreshing words allocated in 100 words Unit CPU Bus Unit DM Area Area in DM Area Refresh Controller Link Units Depends on Unit Data link words ing for either automatic specific or user set Unit DeviceNet Units Depends on Unit Remote I O com functions munications words either fixed or user set Serial Communica Depends on proto Data specified in tions Units col macros protocol macros Ethernet Units Depends on Unit Data specified by Socket services through specific bits Each servicing is allo Special I O Units cated a preset time in the CPU Bus Units system and will be exe cuted every cycle If pro Peripheral Port cessing is completed RS 232C Port within the allocated time processing will not be executed for the remain Communications Port ing time but will shift instead to the next pro cessing phase File Access Service Note Special I O Units CPU Bus Units RS 232C communications ports and vari ous file services will be allocated 496 of the cycle time If all services are exe cuted in a cycle and servicing will be delayed set the same allocated time same time for all services rather than a percentage under execute time set tings in the PC Setup 10
295. for protocol macro function E Applicable port Serial o CPU Unit Communi cations Peripheral pori RS 232C port Unit No No Yes Messages Messages General purpose external device CompoWay F The CJ series CPU Unit can operate as a host to send CompoWay F com Host Function mands to OMRON components connected in the system CompoWay F com mands are executed by using the CompoWay F send receive sequences in the standard protocols of the protocol macro function Protocol macro CompoWay F command CompoWay F OMRON components Unit Protocol Compatibility Peripheral Host Link No protocol Protocol NT Link bus customer macro 1 N Mode See note communica tions CPU Units CJ1G Peripheral CPU RS 232C Serial CJ1W SCU41 RS 422A 485 alg RS 232C Note The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Pro gramming Consoles If Programming Console is to be used set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the communications settings are automatically detected instead of using those specified in the PC Setup 48 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 Host Link System The following system configurations are possible for a Host Link System C mode Commands L IL1 p Host Link Host Link commands gt
296. formation Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2001 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS 5 xa 45i RE REM v ebrrIerexs XH 1 Intended Audience voco pe berto eR We PEERS ple Nees Webs RD ET ne xiv 2 General Precautions 1o e eR ERR ex E eben ee ed xiv 3 Safety PrecautiOns ce ye oa See hee EQUES EUR LN FANE PETER Ss xiv 4 Operating Environment Precautions lees xvi 5 Application Precautions lseeeeeee IIl xvi 6 Conformance to EC Directives lesse me xix SECTION 1 Introduction uvas acpOR X SOY S RR eR
297. g Devices and no CPU Unit indicators are lit Cause 1 Power is not turned ON to an Expansion Rack Remedy Turn ON power to all Expansion Racks 2 An Expansion Rack is not connected correctly Recheck the connections and configuration using information in 2 3 2 CJ series Expan sion Racks 3 5 I O Control Units and I O Interface Units 3 An I O Connecting Cable is not wired correctly Reconnect the I O Connecting Cables in the correct order for output and input connec tors 4 A Unit is faulty Gradually remove replace Units to deter mine the Unit that is faulty including the Power Supply Unit I O Units I O Control Interface Unit and I O Connecting Cable Expansion Rack not detected 1 A Terminator is not connected If the TERM indicator is lit connect a Termi nator 2 An Expansion Rack is not connected correctly Recheck the connections and configuration using information in 2 3 2 CJ series Expan sion Racks 3 5 I O Control Units and I O Interface Units 3 A Unit is faulty Gradually remove replace Units to deter mine the Unit that is faulty including the Power Supply Unit I O Units I O Control Interface Unit and I O Connecting Cable I O bus error or I O verifica tion error occurs 1 An I O Connecting Cable or Terminator connection is faulty Check that I O Connecting Cables and Ter minators are connected correctly 2 Noise or ot
298. g disabled for user program memory Writing enabled for user program memory User program automatically transferred when power is turned ON User program not automatically transferred when power is turned ON Not used Use peripheral port parameters set in the PC Setup Auto detect Programming Console or CX Programmer parameters at the peripheral port Auto detect CX Programmer parameters at the RS 232C port Use RS 232C port parameters set in the PC Setup User defined pin Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 User defined pin Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag A39512 Easy backup Read write to Memory Card Easy backup Verify contents of Memory Card 2 2 2 CPU Unit Capabilities CJ1G CPU45 CJ1G CPU44 30 O bits 1 280 bits Up to 3 Expansion Racks Program capacity 60K steps Always OFF Ladder instruction processing speed Internal com munications ports Data memory capacity See Note Optional products 128K words Peripheral port Memory Cards 30K steps AK and Gae wors RS 232C port one each Note The available data memory capacity is the sum of the Data Memory DM and the Extended Data Memory EM Areas Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 2 2 3 Unit Classifications The CJ series CPU Units can exchange data with CJ series Basic I O Units CJ series Speci
299. h IORF 097 while the Unit s I O was being refreshed by cyclic I O refreshing duplicate refreshing y o Basic I O Unit Error Flag A40212 ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I O Unit Read only Information Non fatal error Basic I O Unit Error Slot A40800 to Contains the binary slot number where the error Read only Number A40807 occurred when an error has occurred in a Basic I O Unit Basic I O Unit Error Rack A40808 to Contains the binary rack number where the error Read only Number A40815 occurred when an error has occurred in a Basic I O Unit 214 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function I O Information Name 1 O Setting Error Flag Fatal error Address A40110 Description ON when a Basic I O Unit registered in the I O Table does not match the Basic I O Unit actually installed in the PC Valid only when user set I O allocations are being used Access Read only Expansion Rack Number Duplication Flags A40900 to A40903 The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expansion Rack s starting word address was set from a Programming Device and two Racks have overlapping word allocations or a Rack s starting address exceeds CIO 0901 Bits 00 to 03 correspond to Racks 0 to 3 Read only Too Many I O Points Flag Fatal error A40111 ON when the number of I O points being used in Basic I O Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PC o
300. h Unit Unit number Words allocated CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899 CPU Bus Units are ignored during I O allocation to Basic I O Units Positions containing CJ series CPU Bus Units aren t allocated any words in the I O Area 177 I O Allocations Section 8 1 Example The following example shows the I O word allocation to Basic I O Units Spe cial I O Units and CPU Bus Units in the CPU Rack 0 1 2 3 4 U o 9 o U 2 c Ro c 3 c 3 Words Words allocated required CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit CIO 0000 Basic I O Unit CJ1W AD081 Analog Input Unit CIO 2000 to Special I O Unit CIO 2009 CJ1W SCU41 Serial Communications Unit CIO 1500 to CPU Bus Unit CIO 1524 CJ1W OD211 16 point Transistor Output Unit CIO 0001 Basic I O Unit CJ1W CLK21 Controller Link Unit CIO 1525 to CPU Bus Unit CIO 1549 8 1 7 I O Table Registration I O tables must be registered to recognize connected Units and allocate I O With a CJ series CPU Unit there are two ways in which the I O tables can be registered These are related to the I O allocation status setting in the CPU Unit Purpose Procedure I O Allocation Status When it is not necessary to The user does not need to create or Automatic T O Allocatio check for incorrect Units nor to p mani ulate the I O tables at all just at Startup reserve unused words itu
301. hanging Online operation Transmitting referencing monitoring creating I O tables set ting PC parameters Basic functions 1 Programming Creates and edits ladder programs and mne monic programs for the applicable PC 2 Creating and referencing I O tables 3 Changing the CPU Unit operating mode 4 Transferring Transfers programs I O memory data I O tables PC Setup and I O comments between the personal computer and the CPU Unit 5 Program execution monitoring Monitors I O status present values on ladder displays I O status present values on mne monic displays and present values on I O memory displays Connections Personal computer Peripheral port connection RS 232C port connection Peripheral port RS 232C port 10 pin female 4 9 pin female g CS1W CN118 0 1 m See note 1 1 CS1W CN226 2 0 n XW 2Z 200S CV 200S V 2 0 m See note 2 CS1W CN626 6 0 m XW2Z 500S CV 500S V 5 0 m See note 2 CS1W CN118 See note 1 XW2Z 200S CSIW CN226 D CV 2008 V or 1 CS1W CN626 9 pin XW2Z 500S 9 pin 9 pin female CV 500S V female male 77 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Note 1 The CJ1W CN118 Cable is used with one of the RS 232C Cables shown on the right XW2Z LIL to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit Periph
302. he Special I O Unit Area that aren t allocated to Special I O Units can be used only in the program Bits in the Special I O Unit Area can be force set and force reset The contents of the Special I O Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONI TOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup 3 The Special I O Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the Special I O Unit Area will be retained when FALS 007 is executed If the IOM Hold Blt 450012 is ON the contents of the Special I O Unit Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the Spe cial I O Unit Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled DeviceNet Area 9 7 DeviceNet Area Section 9 7 The DeviceNet Area consists of 600 words from CIO 3200 to CIO 3799 Words in the DeviceNet Area are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet remote O communications Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network independent of the program through the Device
303. he current bank will be returned to its original val ue in the source cyclic task if it has been changed in an interrupt task Words in the EM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways binary mode and BCD mode Binary mode Addressing E When a character is input before a EM address the content of that EM word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the same bank at that binary address All of the words in the same EM bank E00000 to E32767 can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 223 Index Registers File Memory Conversion Section 9 16 0000 to 7FFF and words in the next EM bank E00000 to E32767 can be addressed with hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF E1_00100 0200 E1_0051 Address actually used When the current E00100 0200 E0_0051 1 bank is bank 0 Address actually used i BCD mode Addressing xE When a x character is input before a EM address the content of that EM word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the same bank at that BCD address Only part of the EM bank E00000 to E09999 can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999 xE1_00100 0200 E1_ 00200 Address actually used When the current E00100 0200 Eo 00200 sid bank is bank 0 Address actually used i Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as file memory with settings in the PC Setup All EM banks from the spec
304. he load short circuit protection func tion alarm output has been given Only the LSB is used for the CJ1W OD212 and only the two most LSB are used for the CJ1W OD232 Each bit indicates the status for one circuit Settings 1 Short cir cuited 0 Normal Status after mode change Statusat startup Write tim ing Related flags set tings All Error Log Area When an error has occurred the error code error contents and error s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area Information on the 20 most recent errors can be stored Each error record occupies 5 words the function of these 5 words is as follows 1 Error code bits 0 to 15 2 Error contents bits 0 to 15 3 Minutes bits 8 to 15 Seconds bits 0 to 7 4 Day of month bits 8 to 15 Hours bits 0 to 7 5 Year bits 8 to 15 Month bits 0 to 7 Errors generated by FAL 006 and FALS 007 will also be stored in this Error Log The Error Log Area can be reset from a Programming Device If the Error Log Area is full 20 records and another error occurs the oldest record in A100 to A104 will be cleared the other 19 records are shifted down and the new record is stored in A195 to A199 Error code Error contents Address of Aux Area word with details or 0000 Seconds 00 to 59 BCD Minutes 00 to 59 BCD Hours 00 to 23 BCD Day of month 00 to 31 BCD Year 00 to 99 BCD Retained Reta
305. he protocol selected the following systems can be configured The following protocols support serial communications Main connection Personal computer OMRON Programmable Ter minals Communications between the Host computer and the PC Commands can be sent to a computer from the PC Applicable commands communications instructions Host Link commands FINS commands Commands can be sent to a computer from the PC No protocol customer com munications General purpose external devices No protocol communica tions with general purpose devices TXD 236 instruction RXD 235 instruction Protocol macro 44 General purpose external devices Sending and receiving mes sages communications frames according to the communications specifica tions of external devices SYSMAC PST is used to create protocols by setting various parameters PMCR 260 instruction Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 Protocol Main connection Use Applicable commands communications instructions NT Links 1 N OMRON Programmable Ter High speed communica minals tions with Programmable Terminals via direct access Peripheral bus See note Programming Devices CX Communications between Programmer Programming Devices and the PC from the computer Note The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Pro gramming Console If Programming Console is to be u
306. hen power is turned ON or I O is recog nized A40203 A42800 to A43315 Special I O Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags When a Special I O Unit Setting Error occurs A40202 and the bit in these words corresponding to the Unit s unit number are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit num bers 0 to F Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 000 to O5F 0 to 95 The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash 1 Setting error 0 No setting error Written when power is turned ON or I O is recog nized A40202 Max Inter rupt Task Processing Time Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time in units of 0 1 ms This value is written after the inter rupt task with the max processing time is executed and cleared when PC operation begins 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal Cleared Cleared See Func tion col umn Interrupt Task With Max Pro cessing Time Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maximum pro cessing time Hexadecimal values 8000 to 80FF correspond to task numbers 00 to FF Bit 15 is turned ON when an interrupt has occurred This value is written after the inter rupt task with the max processing time is executed and cleared when PC operation begins 8000 to 80FF hexadecimal See Func tion col umn 339 Auxiliary Area
307. hen the PC is turned ON With this function the Memory Card provides a flash ROM transfer This function can also be used to store and change PC configurations quickly and easily It is now possible to save production results and other data hexadecimal from the CPU Unit I O memory in a Memory Card in CSV or text format The data can then be read and edited using personal computer spreadsheet soft ware by means of a Memory Card Adapter I O memory data stored in CSV or text format Spread sheet software Via Memory Card Adapter Memory Card It is possible to format files delete copy change file names create new directories and perform similar operations on a Memory Card from the ladder program during PC operation It is now possible to replace the entire user program in the CPU Unit from the Memory Card during operation In this way it is possible to switch PC opera tion without stopping the PC Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Easy Backups PC operation OBJ Replacement It is now possible to back up all data user programs parameters and I O memory to the Memory Card by pressing the Memory Card power supply switch In this way if a malfunction arises it is possible to back up all data in the CPU Unit at the time without using a Programming Device Specialized Instructions Simplify Programming Text String Instructions Loop Instructions Index Registers The text string in
308. hen the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range Equals Flag Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are equal the result of a calculation is O Less Than Flag Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less than the second or a value is below a specified range Negative Flag Turned ON when the most significant bit sign bit of a result is ON Overflow Flag Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the result word s Underflow Flag Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of the result word s Greater Than or Equals Flag Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is greater than or equal to the second Not Equal Flag 232 Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are not equal Clock Pulses Name Less Than or Equals Flag Section 9 20 Function Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less than or equal to the second Symbol Always ON Flag Always ON Always 1 Always OFF Flag Using the Condition Flags Always OFF Always 0 The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions so their status may change often in a single cycle Be sure to read the Condition Flags immedi ately after the execution of instruction p
309. her external factor Separate all cables from possible sources of noise or place them in metal ducts 3 A Unit is faulty Gradually remove replace Units to deter mine the Unit that is faulty including the Power Supply Unit I O Units I O Control Interface Unit and I O Connecting Cable Cycle time is too long 1 A CPU Bus Unit that is allocated many words e g Controller Link Unit is mounted to a CJ Long distance Expan sion Rack Move the CPU Bus Unit to the CPU Rack 2 A Unit is faulty Gradually remove replace Units to deter mine the Unit that is faulty including the Power Supply Unit I O Units I O Control Interface Unit and I O Connecting Cable 1 O Control Unit and I O Inter face Units do not appear on CX Programmer I O table 290 This is not an error These Units are not allo cated I O words and thus are not registered in the I O tables Troubleshooting Racks and Units Input Units Symptom Not all inputs turn ON or indi cators are not lit Cause 1 Power is not supplied to Input Unit Section 11 3 Remedy Supply power 2 Supply voltage is low Adjust supply voltage to within rated range 3 Terminal block mounting screws are loose Tighten screws 4 Faulty contact of terminal block connec tor Replace terminal block connector Not all inputs turn ON indica tor lit Input circuit is faulty There is a short at
310. her networks Communicate with PCs up to 2 net work levels away through Controller Link or Ethernet Operation Manual 2 5 Expanded System Configura tion Error Pro cessing and Troubleshoot ing Generating a non fatal or fatal error for user defined conditions Non fatal errors Opera tion continues Fatal errors PC opera tion stops FAILURE ALARM FAL 006 SEVERE FAILURE ALARM FALS 007 Analyzing time and logic in execution of an instruction block FAILURE POINT DETECTION FPD 269 Record information about errors including user defined errors in the error log Use the error log function Up to 20 error records can be stored Programming Manual W394 6 5 Diag nostic and Debugging Functions 17 Function Tables Section 1 3 Other Func tions Purpose Protecting the program ory Function _____ Write protect the user program mem Manual Manual W394 Allocating words inthe O Set the first word allocated to each Area by specifying the first word allocated to each Rack Rack by registering the I O table from the CX Programmer Words must be allocated to Racks in the order that the Racks are connected Reducing input chattering and the effects of noise Specify the input response times for Basic I O Units in the PC Setup Basic I O Unit Input Response Time 1 3 2 Communications Functions Serial Networ
311. hing non fatal error Executes user pro gram i e executes READY cyclic tasks RR ALM indicator ON or Flashing ON fatal error Program execu tion End of program Resets watchdog timer and waits un til the set cycle time has elapsed Calculates cycle time Resets watchdog timer Performs I O re freshing Services Program ming Devices Cycle time cal culation I O refreshing Peripheral servic ing 243 Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 10 3 2 Cycle Time Overview The cycle time for the CJ Series depends on the following conditions Type and number of instructions in the user program in all cyclic tasks that are executed during a cycle and within interrupt tasks for which the execution conditions have been satisfied Type and number of Basic I O Units Type and number of Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units and type of services being executed Data links and size of data links for Controller Link Units DeviceNet remote communications and size of communications Protocol macros and the number of words in transfers Ethernet socket servicing and the number of words in transfers Use of peripheral or RS 232C ports File access in file memory and the amount of data transferred to from file memory Fixed cycle time setting in the PC Setup Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PC Setup Note 1 The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used
312. his error occurs when the PC Setup has been set to detect battery errors and the CPU Unit s backup battery is missing or its voltage has dropped Check battery and replace if necessary Change the PC Setup setting if it isn t necessary to detect battery errors CPU Bus Unit Setup error A40203 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Flag A427 CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags An installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the CPU Bus Unit registered in the I O table The corresponding flag in A427 will be ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit num bers 0 to F Change the registered I O table Special I O Unit Setup error Other Errors 284 A40202 Special I O Unit Set ting Error Flag A428 to A433 Spe cial I O Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags An installed Special I O Unit does not match the Special I O Unit registered in the I O table The corresponding flag in A428 to A433 will be ON Bits A42800 to A43315 cor respond to unit numbers 0 to 95 Change the registered I O table Peripheral Port Communications Error A communications error has occurred in communications with the device con nected to the peripheral port if the indicators have the following conditions Power Supply Unit Indicator CPU Unit Indicators POWER ERR ALM Error Processing Power Supply Check Section 11 2 Check the setting of pin 4 on the DIP switch and
313. ication allocated to more than one duplications and turn the Rack s power Duplica Error Flag CPU Bus Unit supply OFF and then ON again tion error A410 CPU Bits A41000 to A41015 cor Bus Unit respond to unit numbers 0 to Duplicate Number Flags A401 13 The same number has been Check the unit numbers eliminate the Duplication allocated to more than one duplications and turn the Rack s power Error Flag Special I O Unit supply OFF and then ON again A441 to Bits A41100 to A41615 cor A416 Spe respond to unit numbers 0 to cial I O Unit 95 Duplicate Number Flags RACK No 80EA A409 The same I O word has Check allocations to Units on the rack DPL ERR Expansion been allocated to more than number whose bit in ON in A40900 to Rack Dupli one Basic I O Unit A40908 Correct the allocations so that cate Rack no words are allocated more than once Number including to Units on other Racks and turn the Rack s power supply OFF and then ON again An Expansion Rack s start Check the first word setting for the Rack ing word address exceeds indicated in A40900 to A40903 and CIO 0901 change the setting to a valid word The corresponding bit in address below CIO 0900 with a Pro A40900 to A40903 Racks 0 gramming Device to 3 will be turned ON Too Many TOO 80E1 A40111 The probable causes are Correct the problem and then turn the I O Points MANY I O Too Many l listed below The 3 digit power supply OFF and back ON er
314. icing time hasn t been set in the PC Setup 4 of the previous cycle s cycle time cal culated in step 3 will be allowed for peripheral servic ing If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PC Setup servicing will be performed for the set time At least 0 1 ms however will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not If there is no file access the servicing time is 0 ms Services communications port Servicing for network com munications serial commu nications and file memory access using internal logic ports 0 to 7 for SEND RECV CMND and PMCR instructions If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn t been set in the PC Setup 4 of the previous cycle s cycle time cal culated in step 3 will be allowed for peripheral servic ing If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PC Setup servicing will be performed for the set time At least 0 1 ms however will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not If there is no file access the servicing time is 0 ms I O refresh time per Unit 16 point DC Input Unit CJ1W ID211 0 004 ms 16 point Transistor Output Unit sinking outputs CJ1W OD211 0 005 ms 16 point Transistor Output Unit sourcing outputs CJ1W OD212 0 005 ms 32 point DC Input Unit Fujitsu compatible con CJ1W ID231 0 006 ms nector 64 point DC Input Unit Fujitsu compatible con CJ1W
315. iew 10 U Underflow Flag 232 Units available models 86 classifications 31 lists 34 V W Windows 37 wiring 94 96 107 127 Basic I O Units 130 DC Input Units 136 I O devices 136 I O Units with Connectors 131 installing wiring ducts 113 power supply 127 precautions 110 interlock circuits 109 output surge current 139 procedure 133 recommended RS 232C wiring methods 368 wire size 133 Work Area 206 work bits 206 work words 206 379 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W393 E1 1 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content 1 April 2001 Original production 381
316. ified Find the program address where the error occurred A298 A299 and correct the instruction Alternatively set the PC Setup to con tinue operation for an instruction error A29509 Indirect DM EM BCD error An indirect DM EM BCD error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruc tion error Find the program address where the error occurred A298 A299 and correct the indirect addressing or change to binary mode Alternatively set the PC Setup to con tinue operation for an instruction error A29508 Instruction error An instruction processing error has occurred and the PC Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruc tion error Find the program address where the error occurred A298 A299 and correct the instruction Alternatively set the PC Setup to con tinue operation for an instruction error A29514 Illegal instruction error The program contains an instruction that cannot be executed Retransfer the program to the CPU Unit 281 Error Processing Section 11 2 Error Program Error Flag and Probable cause Possible remedy ming code in word data Console A400 display CYCLE TIME ERR A40108 Cycle Time Too Long Flag The cycle time has exceeded the maximum cycle time watch cycle time set in the PC Setup Change the program to reduce the cycle time or change the maximum cycle time setting Check the Maximum Interrupt
317. ified bank EM File Memory Starting Bank to the last EM bank will be converted to file memory Once EM banks have been converted to file memory they cannot be accessed read or written by instructions An Illegal Access Error will occur if a file memory bank is specified as an operand in an instruction The following example shows EM file memory when the EM File Memory Starting Bank has been set to 3 in the PC Setup Example EM File Memory Starting Bank set to 3 in the PC Setup EM bank number pum 6 EM file memory 4 Cannot be accessed from instructions 9 16 Index Registers Indirect Addressing 224 Note The sixteen Index Registers IRO to IR15 are used for indirect addressing Each Index Register can hold a single PC memory address which is the absolute memory address of a word in I O memory Use MOVR 560 to con vert a regular data area address to its equivalent PC memory address and write that value to the specified Index Register Use MOVRW 561 to set the PC memory address of a timer counter PV in an Index Register Refer to Appendix E Memory Map for more details on PC memory addresses When an Index Register is used as an operand with a prefix the instruction will operate on the word indicated by the PC memory address in the Index Register not the Index Register itself Basically the Index Registers are I O memory pointers All addresses in I O memory except Index Registers Data Registers
318. ignating indirect IR IAND NOT Increase compared to normal instruction OR Designating words Designating indirect IR IOR Increase compared to normal instruction OR NOT Designating words Designating indirect IR IOR NOT Increase compared to normal instruction AND LOAD AND LD OR LOAD OR LD NOT NOT CONDITION ON UP CONDITION OFF DOWN LOAD BIT TEST LD TST Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR LOAD BIT TEST NOT LD TSTN Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR AND BIT TEST AND TST Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR AND BIT TEST NOT AND TSTN Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR OR BIT TEST OR TST Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR OR BIT TEST NOT OR TSTN Sequence Output Instructions Instruction Mnemonic OUT Setting 1 bit of a word to a constant Setting 1 indirect IR bit to indirect IR When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Designating words OFF execution time us
319. ile containing the data in the CPU Unit and save the contents in the Memory Card 4 Read the file that is saved in the Memory Card to the CPU Unit Automatically Transferring Memory Card Files to the CPU Unit at Power up Data transfer direction From Memory Card to CPU Unit File name and extension AUTOEXEC OBJ AUTOEXEC IOM ATEXECDM IOM ATEXECELT IOM AUTOEXEC STD Program files Data files Parameter files 1 2 3 1 Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit 2 Setpin 2 of the DIP switch to ON 3 The files are read automatically when the power is turned ON Reading Writing Data Files Using File Filename and extension Data Wanster direction FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 Data files sect OM exeo TXT sec CSV Between CPU Unit and Memory Card 69 1 2 3 1 Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit File Memory Section 3 2 2 Initialize the Memory Card using a Programming Device 3 Using the FWRIT 701 instruction name the file of the specified I O mem ory area and save to the Memory Card 4 Using the FREAD 700 instruction read the I O memory files from the Memory Card to the I O memory in the CPU Unit Note When using spreadsheet software to read data that has been written to the Reading and Replacing Program Files during Operation 1 2 3 Backing Up or Restoring CPU Unit Data 1 2 3 Transferring Files between Memory Cards and the CX Programmer
320. ile the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode Power OFF Detection This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection Delay Time of a power interruption approximately after the power supply voltage drops below 85 of the rated value until a power interruption is established and the regular program is stopped The setting can be between 0 and 10 ms It takes a maximum of 10 ms for the internal 5 V DC power supply to drop to 0 V DC after the initial power interrupt detection time Extend the time until detection of a power interruption when momentary interruptions in a bad power supply are causing PC operation to stop 164 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Note The power OFF detection delay time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode 100V 85V Power Interrupt DetectionTime AC power supply 10 to 25 ms not consistent Power interrupt detection time Power OFF detection delay time 0 to 10 ms Regular program Note The execution time for the power OFF interrupt task must be less than the maximum time available namely 10 ms power OFF detection delay time Refer to 10 5 Power OFF Operation for details on CPU Unit operation when power is turned OFF Special I O Unit Cyclic When a Special I O Unit will be refreshed in an interrupt task by IORF 097 Refreshing always disable cyclic refreshing for that Unit with this
321. ile the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode T Cycle Time Too Long Flag A40108 Watch Cycle Ti ime Watch Cycle Time Watch Cycle l Time bg Actual Cycle Actual Cycle Actual Cycle Time Tim Tine OVER v CPU Unit operation is stopped Note The default value for the watch cycle time is 1 s 1 000 ms Fixed Peripheral Servicing This setting determines whether the peripheral servicing for the following pro Time cesses is performed with the default settings 496 of the cycle time or all together in a fixed servicing time Exchange data with Special I O Units when necessary Exchange data with CPU Bus Units when necessary Exchange data with peripheral port Exchange data with serial communications ports Service file access operations Memory Card Peripheral servicing is performed at the end of the cycle just after I O refresh ing Cycle time Power ON Initialization Program execution Tasks executed in order I O refreshing i 163 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 The following table shows a breakdown of the peripheral servicing time Peripheral servicing time Default value Setting range Event service time for 4 of the previous Uniform servicing time in ms Special I O Units cycle s cycle time 0 0 to 25 5 ms in 0 1 ms units Event service time for Same as above CPU Bus Units Event service time for Same as above peripheral p
322. illegal access error will occur if an attempt is made to access any of the parameter areas from an instruction in the user program l O Memory Areas These are the areas that can be specified as operands in the instructions in user pro grams 353 Memory Map of PC Memory Addresses Memory Map Classification Parameter areas PC memory addresses Hex 00000 to OBOFF User addresses Appendix C PC Setup Area Registered I O Table Area Routing Table Area CJ series CPU Bus Unit Setup Area Real I O Table Area Unit Profile Area I O memory areas 354 0B100 to OB1FF Reserved for system 0B200 to OB7FF Reserved for system 0B800 to 0B801 TKOO to TK31 Task Flag Area 0B802 to OB83F Reserved for system 0B840 to OB9FF A000 to A447 Read only Auxiliary Area 0BAO0 to OBBFF A448 to A959 Read Write Auxiliary Area 0BCO0 to OBDFF Reserved for system OBEOO0 to OBEFF T0000 to T4095 Timer Completion Flags OBFO0O to OBFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter Completion Flags 0C000 to 0D7FF CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO Area 0D800 to OD9FF H000 to H511 Holding Area ODAO0 to ODDFF Reserved for system ODEOO to ODFFF W000 to W511 Work Area 0E000 to OEFFF T0000 to T4095 Timer PVs OF000 to OFFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter PVs 10000 to 17FFF D00000 to D32767 DM Area 18000 to 1FFFF EO 00000 to EO 327
323. imes and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us GET STRING RGHT 653 4 94 2 Retrieving 1 character from 2 charac 0 37 RIGHT ters 11 58 ms Retrieving 2 046 characters from 2 047 characters GET STRING MID 654 5 230 2 Retrieving 1 character from 3 charac 0 46 MIDDLE ters 7 42 ms Retrieving 2 045 characters from 2 047 characters FIND IN FIND 660 4 94 1 Searching for 1 character from 2 char 0 37 STRING acters 21 95 ms Searching for 1 024 characters from 2 047 characters STRING LEN 650 3 33 4 Detecting 1 character 0 29 LENGTH 4 32 ms Detecting 2 047 characters REPLACE IN RPLC 661 6 479 5 Replacing the first of 2 characters 0 54 STRING with 1 character 13 46 ms Replacing the first of 2 047 characters with 1 024 characters DELETE DEL 658 5 244 6 Deleting the leading character of 2 0 46 STRING characters 11 76 ms Deleting the leading character of 2 047 characters EXCHANGE XCHG 665 3 99 0 Exchanging 1 character with 1 char 0 29 STRING acter 10 88 ms Exchanging 2 047 characters with 2 047 characters CLEAR CLR 666 2 37 8 Clearing 1 character 0 32 STRING 5 19 ms Clearing 2 047 characters INSERT INTO INS 657 5 428 9 Inserting 1 character after the first of 0 46 STRING 2 characters 9 82 ms Inserting 1 024 characters after the first of
324. in the user program The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks that are READY in the cycle 2 When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode the cycle time will be extended by 10 ms this will not however take the cycle time over its limit The cycle time is the total time required for the PC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following table Cycle time 1 2 3 4 5 Process Process name Details Processing time and fluctuation cause step Overseeing Checks the I O Bus and 0 5 ms user program memory and refreshes the clock Program execution Executes the user program Total instruction execution time and calculates the total time time taken for the instruc tions to execute the pro gram Cycle time calcula Waits for the specified cycle When the cycle time is not fixed the time for step 3 is tion time to elapse when a mini approximately O mum fixed cycle time has When the cycle time is fixed the time for step 3 is the pre been set in the PC Setup set fixed cycle time minus the actual cycle time 1 4 2 Calculates the cycle time 4 5 I O refreshing Refreshes the I O for Basic l O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of I O Units Special I O Units Units used and CPU Bus Units Refer to page 239 for details 244 Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 Process step Process name Per
325. in the Memory Card Memory Card functions Symbol Table Files Storing operating data trend and quality data within the CPU Unit during program execution EM File Memory Functions and the FREAD 700 FWRIT 701 instructions Switching PC operation Memory Card functions Program Replacement during PC Operation Reading and writing I O memory data with a spreadsheet Read write data files using instruc tions in CSV or text format Manual Programming Manual W394 Reference SECTION 5 File Memory Functions Text string processing 16 Performing string process ing at the PC which was performed at the host com puter previously and reduc ing the program load at the host computer operations such as read insert search replace and exchange Combine the Host Link function with the text string processing instructions Performing string process ing operations such as rearranging text strings Use the string comparison instructions and index registers Receiving data from exter nal devices such as bar code readers through serial communications storing the data in DM and reading just the required string when it is needed Combine the protocol macro function with the text string processing instruc tions Instructions Reference Manual W340 Text String Processing Instructions Function Tables Section 1 3 Maintenance and Debug ging
326. ined Written when error occurs AS50014 A300 A400 A20011 First Cycle Flag ON for one cycle after PC operation begins after the mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI TOR for example ON for the first cycle A20012 Step Flag ON for one cycle when step execu tion is started with STEP 008 This flag can be used for initialization pro cessing at the beginning of a step ON for the first cycle after exe cution of STEP 008 Cleared A20015 First Task Startup Flag ON when a task is executed for the first time This flag can be used to check whether the current task is being executed for the first time so that initialization processing can be performed if necessary 1 First execu tion 0 Not execut able for the first time or not being exe cuted 321 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Settings Status Statusat Write tim related after startu in ags set Words Bits mode P 9 tings change A201 A20110 Online Edit ON when an online editing process is 1 Waiting for Cleared Cleared A527 ing Wait waiting online editing Flag If another online editing command is 0 Not waiting received while waiting the other for online edit command won t be recorded and an ing error will occur A20111 Online Edit ON when an online editing process is 1 Online edit Cleared Cleared A527
327. ing REVERSIBLE COUNTER Normal When resetting When interlocking RESET TIMER COUNTER Comparison Instructions When resetting 1 word When resetting 1 000 words When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us Input Com LD AND 300 2 4 0 37 Comparing 2 constants 0 37 parison OR 305 lt gt 4 1 indi structions E es 310 lt 4 58 Comparing 2 indirect IR addresses 0 37 unsigned lt lt 315 lt 4 gt gt 320 gt 4 325 gt 4 Input Com LD AND 301 4 0 54 Comparing 2 constants 0 54 parison OR 306 lt gt 4 17 indi inetactone lanes 311 lt 4 15 Comparing 2 indirect IR addresses 0 37 double lt lt 316 lt 4 unsigned gt gt 321 gt 4 326 gt 4 Input Com LD AND 302 4 6 5 0 37 parison OR 307 lt gt 4 Instructions lt gt 312 lt 4 signed lt lt 317 lt 4 gt gt 322 gt 4 327 gt 4 Input Com LD AND 303 4 6 5 0 54 parison OR 308 lt gt 4 Instructions lt gt 313 lt 4 double lt lt 318 lt 4 signed gt gt 323 gt 4 SL 328 gt 4 COMPARE CMP 020 3 0 29 Comparing 2 constants 0 29 1 50 Comp
328. ing Device such as a Programming Con sole with the DATE 735 instruction or with a FINS command CLOCK WRITE 0702 Seconds 00 to 59 BCD Minutes 00 to 59 BCD Hours 00 to 23 BCD Day of the month 01 to 31 BCD Month 01 to 12 BCD Year 00 to 99 BCD Day of the week 00 to 06 BCD 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tues day 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday Retained Retained Written every cycle A36001 to A39115 Executed FAL Num ber Flags The flag corresponding to the speci fied FAL number will be turned ON when FAL 006 is executed Bits A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511 The flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 That FAL was executed 0 That FAL wasn t exe cuted Retained Cleared Written when error occurs A40215 329 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Status Status at Related Write tim Words Bits A39204 RS 232C Port Error Flag ON when an error has occurred at the RS 232C port Not valid in peripheral bus mode or NT Link mode Settings 1 Error 0 No error after mode change Retained startup Cleared ing Written when error occurs flags set tings A39205 RS 232C Port Send Ready Flag No proto col mode ON when the RS 232C port is able to send data in no pr
329. ing 1 word by 1 bit RIGHT DOUBLE SHIFT N BITS RIGHT Shifting indirect IR by 1 bit Shifting 1 word by 1 bit Shifting indirect IR by 1 bit Increment Decrement Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length ON steps execution See note time us OFF execution time us Instruction Mnemonic Conditions INCREMENT BINARY Incrementing a word Incrementing indirect IR Incrementing a word Incrementing indirect IR Decrementing a word Decrementing indirect IR Decrementing a word Decrementing indirect IR DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY DECREMENT BINARY DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY INCREMENT BCD DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD DECREMENT BCD DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD Symbol Math Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Length ON steps execution See note time us OFF execution time us Instruction Mnemonic Conditions SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY Constant constant word Indirect IR indirect IR gt indirect IR Constant constant word Indirect IR indirect IR gt indirect IR DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH OUT CARRY 256 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Instruction Mnemonic Cod
330. ing Console to the peripheral port of the CPU Unit and set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF automatically uses default communications parame ters for the peripheral port COM1H PROO1 E CQM1 PROO1 E The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port Programming Console The following cable is included with the I CQM1 PRO01 E Programming Console Programming Console Cable Length CQM1 PRO01 E CS1W CN114 0 05 m CQM1H PRO01 E Not required Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the Se ea oye front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF Programming Console CS1W KS001 E English Keyboard Sheet required Peripheral port C200H PRO27 E The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port CS1W KS001 E English Keyboard Sheet required Programming Console Cable Length CQM1 PRO27 E _CS1W CN224 2 0m CS1W CN624 6 0m Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF C200H PRO27 E Programming Console Peripheral port Note When an OMRON Programmable Terminal PT is connected to the RS 232C port and Programming Console functions are being used do not connect the Programming Console at the same time 36 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 Connecting Personal Computers Running Support Software Connecting to Peripheral Port RS 232C Connecting Cables for Peri
331. ing Flag being executed ing in progress 0 Online edit ing not in progress A202 A20200 Communi ON when a network instruction 1 Network Cleared to cations Port SEND RECV CMND or PMCR instruction is A20207 Enabled can be executed with the corre not being exe Flags sponding port number Bits 00 to 07 cuted correspond to communications ports o Network 0 to 7 instruction is When two or more network instruc being exe tions are programmed with the same cuted port port number use the corresponding busy flag as an execution condition to pre vent the instructions from being exe cuted simultaneously The flag for a given port is turned OFF while a network instruction with that port number is being executed A203 to All Communi These words contain the completion Non zero Cleared A210 cations Port codes for the corresponding port Error code Completion numbers when network instructions Codes SEND RECV CMND or PMCR 0000 have been executed Normal condi Words A203 to A210 correspond to tion communications ports 0 to 7 The completion code for a given port is cleared to 0000 when a net work instruction with that port num ber is executed A219 A21900 Communi ON when an error occurred during 1 Error Cleared 7 E to cations Port execution of a network instruction occurred A21907 Error Flags SEND RECV CMND or PMCR 0 Normal con Bits 00 to 07 correspond t
332. ing the maximum Set a maximum cycle time watch cycle time in the PC Setup If the cycle time exceeds this value the Cycle Time Too Long Flag A40108 will be turned ON and PC operation will be stopped Operation Manual Reducing the I O response time for particular I O points Use immediate refreshing or IORF 097 Programming Manual W394 6 1 Cycle Time High speed Pro cessing Finding I O refresh times for individual Units Studying the I O response time Finding the increase in the cycle time for online editing Operation Manual 10 3 2 Cycle Time Overview 10 3 5 I O Response Time 10 3 4 Online Edit ing Cycle Time Exten sion Giving peripheral servicing priority over instruction exe cution Use the Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode Programming Manual W394 6 6 Periph eral Servic ing Priority Mode 13 Function Tables Section 1 3 Using Inter rupt Tasks Purpose Monitoring operating sta tus at regular intervals Function Use a scheduled interrupt task Executing an emergency interrupt program when the power supply fails Use a power OFF interrupt task Enable the power OFF interrupt task in the PC Setup Manual Programming Manual W394 Reference 4 3 Inter rupt Tasks Studying the interrupt response time Operation Manual 10 3 6 Inter rupt Response Times Knowing the priority of inte
333. inimum rated voltage at 85 or less to return to 85 or higher is less than 10 ms 267 Power OFF Operation Section 10 5 268 2 A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms but less than 25 ms is difficult to determine and a power interruption may or may not be detected 3 The system will stop unconditionally if the momentary power interruption lasts more than 25 ms If operation stops under the conditions given in items 2 and 3 above the tim ing used to stop operation or the timing used to start execution of the Power OFF Interrupt Task can be delayed by setting the Power OFF Detection Delay Time 0 to 10 ms in the PC Setup Operation however will always be stopped 10 ms after detecting a momentary power interruption regardless of the setting in the PC Setup 85 of the rated voltage or less Time Momentary power interruption not detected and op eration continues ower supply oltage 10 to 25 ms Power supply voltage Operation will continue or stop depending on whether 25 ms and longer or not a momentary power interruption is detected Power supply voltage Momentary power interruption detected and operation stops Note The above timing chart shows an example when the power OFF detection time is set to 0 ms Power OFF Operation Section 10 5 The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more detail Power OFF Timing Chart Operation a
334. ion Units or I O Terminals Basic I O Units with Connectors can be connected to OMRON Connector Ter minal Block Conversion Units or OMRON I O Terminals Refer to CJ series 32 64 point Basic I O Units with Connectors on page 87 for a list of models Connecting to Terminal Blocks The following Connecting Cables and Connector Terminal Block Conversion Units are required to connect to terminal blocks r CJ series 32 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID231 Input Unit Fujitsu connector CJ series 64 point Basic I O Units CJ1W OD231 Output Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W ID261 Input Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W ID232 Input Unit MIL connector CJ1W OD631 Output Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W OD232 Output Unit MIL connector Connecting Cable XW2Z B Fujitsu connector XW2Z K MIL connector Connecting Cable XW2Z B Fujitsu connector Two sets Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit required XW2B 40G4 Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2B 40G5 XW2B 40G4 XW2D 40G6 XW2B 40G5 XW2D 40G6 RF CJ1W ID231 only XW2D 40G6 XW2D 40G6 RM CJ1W ID232 only XW2D 40G6 RF Input Unit only CJ series 32 point Basic I O Units CJ series 64 point Basic I O Units CJ1W ID231 Input Unit Fujitsu connector CJ1W ID261 Input Unit Fujitsu connector Connecting
335. ions System ting bar code data and outputting printer data using communications port I O instructions TXD 236 and RXD 235 The start and completion codes can be 45 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 NT Link System 1 N Mode 46 set and RS and CS signal control is also possible with no protocol communi cations Applicable port Serial D CPU Unit Comi m cations Unit Peripheral port RS 232C port No Yes No See note RXD 235 instruction RS 232C TXD 236 T General purpose external device Note Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF and set the serial communications mode in the PC Setup to no protocol communica tions If the PC and Programmable Terminal PT are connected together using RS 232C ports the allocations for the PT s status control area status notify area objects such as touch switches indicators and memory maps can be allo cated in the I O memory of the PC The NT Link System allows the PT to be controlled by the PC and the PT can periodically read data from the status control area of the PC and perform necessary operations if there are any changes in the area The PT can communicate with the PC by writing data to the status notify area of the PC from the PT The NT Link system allows the PT status to be controlled and monitored without using PC ladder programs The ratio of PCs to PTs is 1 n n 1
336. ions and the values of timer PVs can be read as normal word data Note It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number an error will be generated during the program check but the timers will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle The following table shows when timer PVs and Completion Flags will be reset Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag Operation in Jumps and Interlocks Mode change PC start up CNR 545 Jumps Interlocks JMP JME or IL ILC Tasks on standby TIMER TIM PV 0 PV 50 PV 9999 PVs refreshedin PV 5 SV HIGH SPEED TIMER Flag gt OFF Flag gt OFF Flag OFF Operating timers Reset to SV TIMH 015 Flag 2 OFF ONE MS TIMER TMHH 540 ACCUMULATIVE TIMER PV Maintained PV Maintained TTIM 087 TIMER WAIT TIMW 813 PVs refreshed in HIGH SPEED TIMER WAIT operating timers TMHW 815 Note 1 If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa The PV and Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled 2 Ifthe IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Sta tus at Startup s
337. ipheral bus Bri or Host Link ridge Ethernet Network Controller Link Network Gateway 3 3 3 Peripheral Port Specifications Protocol PC Setup and DIP Switch Settings Pin No 4 Peripheral port settings in PC Setup Default value 0 Hex NT Link 2 Hex Peripheral bus 4 Hex Host Link 5 Hex OFF Programming Console or other CX Programmer through peripheral bus automatically detects the Pro gramming Device s communications parameters ON Host computer or CX PT CX Programmer Host computer or CX Programmer NT Link Peripheral bus Programmer Host Link Host Link 3 3 4 RS 232C Port Specifications Connector Pin Arrangement Direction Protection earth Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send Power supply Data set ready Data terminal ready co Oojoc1 BY DW PM 80 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Sina Name Direction 9 Signal ground Connector hood FG Protection earth Connection between CJ series CPU Unit and Personal Computer The following connections are in Host Link serial communications mode CPU Unit Personal computer Signal Pin Pin Signal No No FG 1 1 CD SD 2 2 RD RS 232C RD 3 H H 3 SD RS 232C interface RS 4 4 ER interface CS 5 5 SG 5V 6 6 DR DR 7 7 RS ER 8
338. ipheral servicing Typical Basic I O Unit Refresh Times Details Services events for Special I O Units Note Peripheral servicing does not include I O refreshing Processing time and fluctuation cause If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn t been set in the PC Setup 4 of the previous cycle s cycle time cal culated in step 3 will be allowed for peripheral servic ing If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PC Setup servicing will be performed for the set time At least 0 1 ms however will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not If no Units are mounted the servicing time is 0 ms Services events for CPU Bus Units Note Peripheral servicing does not include I O refreshing Same as above Services events for periph eral ports If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn t been set in the PC Setup 4 of the previous cycle s cycle time cal culated in step 3 will be allowed for peripheral servic ing If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PC Setup servicing will be performed for the set time At least 0 1 ms however will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not If the ports are not connected the servicing time is 0 ms Services RS 232C ports Same as above Services file access Access servicing for file memory on Memory Cards or in the EM Area If a uniform peripheral serv
339. is ON the contents of I O memory will be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF 277 Error Processing Section 11 2 If the IOM Hold Bit hasn t been turned ON to protect I O memory all non retained areas of I O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than FALS 007 occurs When the IOM Hold Bit is ON the contents of I O memory Program ming Console display MEMORY ERR Error code in A400 will be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF Flag and word data A40115 Memory Error Flag A403 Memory Error Loca tion Probable cause An error has occurred in memory A bit in A403 will turn ON to show the location of the error as listed below Possible remedy See below A40300 ON A checksum error has occurred in the user program memory An illegal instruc tion was detected Check the program and correct the error A40304 ON A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup Clear the entire PC Setup to 0000 and reenter the settings A40305 ON A checksum error has occurred in the registered l O table Initialize the registered I O table and gen erate a new I O table A40307 ON A checksum error has occurred in the routing tables Initialize the routing tables and reenter the tables A40308 ON A checksum error has occurred in the CPU Bus Unit setup Initialize the CPU Bus Unit setup and reenter the settings A40309 ON An error occur
340. is set to O A344 EM File Mem ory Start ing Bank After ini tialization from Pro gram ming Device or via FINS com mand Section 7 1 Related flags and words New setting s effective ness PC Setup Item Address in Settings Function Programming Console Word Bit s Peripheral Peripheral 144 15 0 Default This setting is effective only when Port Set Port Settings 1 PC Setup pin 4 of the DIP switch on the tings Selection Default 0 front of the CPU Unit is ON The default settings are 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits and a baud rate of 9 600 bps Communica 8 to 11 00 Host Link This setting determines whether tions mode 02 1 N NT the peripheral port will operate in Links host link mode or another serial 04 Peripheral communications mode Host link bus can be specified with 00 or 05 05 Host link The peripheral bus mode is for Default 0 communications with Program ming Devices other than the Pro gramming Console Note Communications will not be possible with PTs set for 1 1 NT Links Data bits 3 0 7 bits These settings are valid only 1 8 bits when the communications mode Default 0 is set to Host link Stop bits 2 0 2 bits These settings are also valid only P 1 1 bit when the Peripheral Port Set tings Selection is set to 1 PC Default 0 Setup Parity 0 and 1 00 Even 01 Odd 10 None Default 00 Comm
341. is supported User program instructions Programming Devices including CX Programmer and Programming Con soles Host Link computers AR Area control bits easy backup operation Programming Manual 5 2 File Memory Oper ations Filing Memory Card data and the EM Extended Data Memory Area can be handled as files Programming Manual SECTION 5 File Mem ory Functions Debugging Control set reset differential monitoring data tracing sched uled each cycle or when instruction is executed instruction error tracing Programming Manual 7 2 Trial Operation and Debugging Online editing User programs can be overwritten in program block units when the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode This function is not available for block programming areas With the CX Programmer more than one program block can be edited at the same time Programming Manual 1 2 Operating Modes and 7 2 3 Online Edit ing Program protection Overwrite protection Set using DIP switch Copy protection Password set using CX Programmer or Programming Consoles Programming Manual 6 4 6 Program Protec tion Error check User defined errors i e user can define fatal errors and non fatal errors The FPD 269 instruction can be used to check the execution time and logic of each programming block 11 2 4 Error Messages Programming Manual 6 5 Diagnostic Func tions and 6 5 3 Failure Alarm Functions
342. its but rather is set using a Programming Con sole key sequence 144 Details Section 6 2 6 2 Details Pin Function Setting Description 1 Write protection for ON Write protected User program memory is write protected when this pin is ON user program OFF Read write Turn ON to prevent the program from being changed acciden memory UM tally See note 1 2 Automatic transfer ON Yes The program AUTOEXEC OBJ and PC Setup of the program at AUTOEXEC STD will be transferred from the Memory Card to start up the CPU Unit automatically at start up when this pin is ON See note 4 A PC s software program and PC Setup can be completely ini OFF No tialized just by inserting a new Memory Card and turning on the power This can be used to switch the system to a new arrange ment very quickly Note When pin 7 is ON and pin 8 is OFF reading from the Memory Card for easy backup is given priority even if pin 2 is ON the program will not be automatically transferred 3 Not used gus xx 4 Peripheral port ON Use parameters Leave this pin OFF when using a Programming Console or communications set in the PC CX Programmer peripheral bus setting connected to the parameters Setup peripheral port OFF Auto detect Pro Turn this pin ON when the peripheral port is being used for a default gramming device other than a Programming Console or CX Program Device mer periph
343. k Monitoring from the Host Com puter Purpose RS 232C or RS 422 485 Host Link communications from the PC Network communications through RS 232C or RS 422 485 Protocol Required Equipment Host Link Port in the CPU Unit or Serial Com munications Unit Enclose a FINS command with a Host Link header and terminator and issue it from the PC as a network communications instruction Controller Link and Ethernet commu nications are possible through the Host Link Enclose a FINS command with a Host Link header and termina tor and issue it from the PC as a net work communications instruction Programming Reference 6 4 Startup Settings and Mainte nance 6 7 Other Functions Reference 2 5 Expanded System Con figuration Network Control system Controller Link Controller Link Unit Information sys tem Ethernet Ethernet Unit Connecting to a Standard Serial Device Creating a simple protocol High speed data exchange Protocol Macros Serial Communications Unit No protocol No protocol CPU Unit s RS 232C port or Protocol Macro Communicating with a PT Direct access NT Link Port in the CPU Unit or Serial Com munications Unit Data Link between PCs High capacity or free word allocation Controller Link Controller Link Unit Data Link between PC and computer Controller Link Controller Link Unit Message communications between PCs
344. l Block Conversion Unit Model number XW2B 40G5 Specifications Standard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 RF Slim M3 screw terminal block built in breeder resistor Required for connection 1 Connecting Cable and 1 Conversion Unit XW2C 20G5 IN16 16 point input common M3 5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable and 2 Conversion Units 64 point 24 V DC Input Unit XW2B 40G5 Standard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 RF Slim M3 screw terminal block built in breeder resistor 2 Connecting Cables and 2 Conversion Units XW2C 20G5 IN16 16 point input common M3 5 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cables and 4 Conversion Units 32 point Transistor Out put Unit with Sinking Outputs XW2B 40G5 Standard M3 5 screw terminal block XW2B 40G4 Standard M3 screw terminal block XW2D 40G6 Slim M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable and 1 Conversion Unit 64 point Transistor Out put Unit with Sinking Outputs Units with MIL Connectors Basic I O Unit Specifications Model number 32 point 24 V DC Input Unit Connecting Cable XW2B 40G5 St
345. lag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error in one or more Units 0 No errors in any Unit Cleared Cleared A418 to A423 A40207 334 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit including an error in the CPU Bus Unit itself The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The CPU Bus Unit where the error occurred will stop operating and the unit number of the Unit where the data exchange error occurred is indi cated in A417 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error in one or more Units 0 No error in any Unit Cleared Cleared Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Words Bits Name Function Settings Status after mode change Status at startup Write tim ing Related flags set tings A402 A40210 PC Setup Error Flag Non fatal error ON when there is a setting error in the PC Setup The CPU Unit will con tinue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash The location of the error will be written to A406 This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared A406 A40212 Basic I O Unit Error Flag Non fatal error ON when an error has occurred in
346. le time in 10 ms units Setting with a Programming Console Address Setting Setting range Minimum cycle time setting 0001 to 7D00 Enable for Watch Cycle Time 0 Use default setting 1 Use setting in bits O to 14 Watch Cycle Time setting 0001 to OFAO Note When a host computer or PT is connected to the peripheral port or RS 232C port the port must be set for Host Link or NT Link communications in the PC Setup When a standard serial device is connected the port must be set for no protocol communications in the PC Setup Specifying a word address in the PC Setup Example 209 aoao DUE Example Input 8064 poooz Examples Section 4 2 7 DM Area Settings The following table shows the parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special l O Units and CPU Bus Units for initial settings The actual settings depend on the model of Unit being used nt Allocated words Special I O Units CPU Bus Units D20000 to D29599 100 words x 96 Units D30000 to D31599 100 words x 16 Units After writing the initial settings to the DM Area be sure to restart the Units by turning the PC OFF and then ON again or toggling the Restart Bits for the affected Units Special I O Unit or CPU Bus Unit N Restart 8 Writing the Program Write the program with the CX Programmer or a Programming Console The CJ serie
347. ler Link Units Operation Manual W309 for more details Words in the Link Area that aren t used for a data link can be used only in the program Link Areas Controller CORR Controller i i ontroiler i i Link Unit opu unit Link Unit Ling SE CPU Unit Controller Link Network Bits in the Data Link Area can be force set and force reset 201 CPU Bus Unit Area Links to C200HX HG HE C200HS and C200H PCs Link Area Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation Section 9 5 Link Area words CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in CJ series PCs correspond to Link Relay Area words LR 00 to LR 63 for data links created in C200HX HG HE PCs When converting C200HX HG HE C200HS or C200H programs for use in CJ series PCs change addresses LR 00 through LR 63 to their equivalent Link Area addresses CIO 1000 through CIO 1063 The contents of the Link Area will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONI TOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup 3 TheLink Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the Link Area will be retained if FALS 007 is ex ecuted If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
348. lify programs with specialized instructions such as the table data and text string processing instructions Troubleshooting functions Data tracing function Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 The CJ series PCs support the same task based programming structure instructions high speed instruction execution I O memory functionality and message communications as the CS series PCs The main differences of the CJ series in comparison to the CS series PCs are as follows refer to page 19 for details No Backplanes are required Screw mounting is not supported only DIN Track mounting Smaller size 3096 to 3596 in terms of volume Inner Boards are not supported I O interrupt tasks and external interrupt tasks are not supported C200H Special I O Units are not supported e g SYSMAC BUS Remote I O Units It is not necessary to create I O tables unless desired i e I O tables can be created automatically when power is turned ON The startup mode when a Programming Console is not connected is RUN mode rather than PROGRAM mode as it is for CS series CPU Units Only version 2 04 or later versions of CX Programmer can be connected 1 2 Special Features and Functions 1 2 1 Special Features Improvements in Basic Performance Only 30 to 35 of the Volume of CS series PCs Mount to DIN Track Faster Instruction Execution and Peripheral Servicing Ample Programming Capacity Prog
349. ll 1 Changing Retained Cleared cations cations be ON when the settings 0 Not chang Unit 0 for that port are being ing Port 1 changed Settings The flag will be turned ON Changing when STUP 237 is exe Flag cuted and it will be turned Communi Communi A620 A62002 OFF by an event issued 1 Changing Retained Cleared cations cations from the Serial Communi 0 Not chang Unit 0 cations Unit after the set 9 Port 2 tings have been changed Ing Settings It is also possible for the Changing user to indicate a change in Flag serial port settings by turn Communi Communi A62003 ing these flags ON 1 Changing Retained Cleared cations cations Unit 0 oe chang Port 3 Settings Changing Flag Communi Communi A62004 1 Changing Retained Cleared cations cations 4 Unit 0 n chang Port 4 Settings Changing Flag Communi Communi A621 to A62100 Same as above 1 Changing Retained Cleared cations cations A635 to Units 0 to A63504 ioe 15 Ports 1 to 4 Set tings Changing Flag Memory Replace A650 A65014 ON when the Replace 1 Replace Retained Cleared Card ment ment Start Bit A65015 is ment error opera Error Flag turned ON to replace the 0 No replace tions program but there is an ment error or error If the Replacement the Replace Start Bit is turned ON ment Start Bit again the Replacement A65015 is Error Flag will be turned ON
350. ll Output Units will turn OFF OFF Output OFF Bit A50015 has been turned OFF Flashing CPU Unit is communicating sending or receiving via the peripheral port OFF CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral port Flashing CPU Unit is communicating sending or receiving via the RS 232C port OFF CPU Unit is not communicating via the RS 232C port RUNo ERR ALM n INHo PRPHL n COMMn Indicator Color Status Meaning MCPWR Green ON Power is being supplied to the Memory Card Flashing Flashes once Easy backup read write or verify normal Flashes five times Easy backup write malfunction Flashes three times Easy backup write warning Flashes continuously Easy backup read or verify malfunction OFF Power is not being supplied to the Memory Card BUSY Orange Flashing Memory Card is being accessed OFF Memory Card is not being accessed DIP Switch The CJ series CPU Unit has an 8 pin DIP switch that is used to set basic operational parameters for the CPU Unit The DIP switch is located under the 63 CPU Units Section 3 1 Setting cover of the battery compartment The DIP switch pin settings are described in the following table Function Writing disabled for user program memory See note Writing enabled for user program memory Used to prevent programs from being acci dently overwritten from Programming Devices including Programming Console
351. llowing table shows the correspondence between output bits and bits in the Basic I O Unit Information Area Output bit CJ1W OD212 Mounted in even slot Mounted in odd slot 318 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Output bit m m 1 m 2 m 3 0to7 8 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 CJ1W OD232 Mounted in even slot Mounted in odd slot For example when the CJ1W OD212 is mounted in slot 0 on Rack 0 A05000 will turn ON if the output 8 is short circuited When the CJ1W OD232 is mounted in slot 1 of Rack 0 A05009 will turn ON if the output m 1 is short circuited Programming Example In this example CJ1W OD212 is mounted in slot 0 of the Rack 0 This example shows how to turn OFF output bits CIO 000000 to CIO 000007 immediately if the alarm output bit A05000 turns ON and how to keep the output bits OFF until the cause is removed and the bit is reset using work bit W000001 A05000 WO00001 WO00000 A WO00000 000000 B WO00000 000001 H WO00000 000007 319 Appendix B Auxiliary Area A000 to A447 Read only Area A448 to A959 Read Write Area Read only Area Set by System Address Words Bits A05000 to A05007 Basic I O Unit Infor mation Rack 0 Slot 0 A05008 to A05015 Basic I O Unit Infor mation Rack 0 Slot 1 A05100 to A08915 Basic I O Unit Infor mation Racks 2 to 7 Function A bit will turn ON to indicate when t
352. lock to remove it from an I O Unit 012345267 8 91011 12 13 14 45 Terminal block lever CJ series Basic I O Unit 5 3 3 Wiring I O Units with Connectors This section describes wiring for the following Units CJ series Basic I O Units with Connectors 32 and 64 point Units CJ series Basic I O Units with connectors use special connectors to connec tor to external I O devices The user can combine a special connector with 131 Wiring Section 5 3 cable or use a preassembled OMRON cable to connect to a terminal block or I O Terminal The available OMRON cables are described later in this section Be sure not to apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units When the power supply has positive and negative terminals be sure to wire them correctly Loads connected to Output Units may malfunction if the polarity is reversed Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply connected to DC I O Units when required by EC Directives low voltage When connecting the connector to the I O Unit tighten the connector screws to a torque of 0 2 N m Turn on the power after checking the connector s wiring Do not pull the cable Doing so will damage the cable Bending the cable too sharply can damage or break wiring in the cable Note CJ series Basic I O Units with connectors have the same connector pin allo cations as
353. lowing table provides a comparison between the CX Programmer func tions and the Programming Console functions Function Programming Console CX Programmer Editing and referencing I O tables Yes Yes Deleting I O tables No Yes Selecting tasks Yes Yes Writing pro Inputting instructions Writes instructions one at a time using Writes multiple blocks using mnemon grams mnemonics ics or ladder programs Inputting addresses Addresses only Addresses or symbols I O comment rung com No Yes ment Setting global local sym No Yes Automatic allocation of local sym bols bols Editing programs Inserts instructions and searches for Yes program addresses Cutting pasting inserting within pro grams searching exchanging instruc tions addresses and symbols displaying cross references Checking programs No Yes Monitoring programs Monitors in program address units Monitors multiple blocks Monitoring I O memory Simultaneous 2 points max Monitors multiple points Changing I O memory present values Changes 1 point at a time Yes Online editing Edits in instruction units Edits multiple adjacent blocks 74 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Function Programming Console CX Programmer Debugging Changing timer and Yes Yes counter settings Control set reset Executes 1 point at a time or resets all Yes at once Diff
354. ls See Note Dielectric strength 2 300 V AC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between AC external and GR terminals See Note Leakage current 10 mA max 1 000 V AC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between AC external and GR terminals See Note Leakage current 10 mA max Noise immunity 2 kV on power supply line conforming to IEC61000 4 4 Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz 0 075 mm amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes Time coefficient 8 minutes xcoefficient factor 10 total time 80 min according to JIS C0040 Shock resistance 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Relay Output Unit 100 m s accord ing to JIS C0041 Ambient operating tempera ture 0 to 55 C Ambient operating humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gases Ambient storage temperature 20 to 70 C excluding battery Grounding Less than 100 Q Enclosure Mounted in a panel Weight All models are each 5 kg max CPU Rack dimensions 156 7 to 466 7 x 90 x 65 mm W x H x D not including cables The total width is given by the following W 156 7 n x 20 m x 31 where n is the number of 32 point I O Units or I O Control Units and m is the number of other Units Safety measures Note 28 Conforms to UL CSA and EC directives 1 Disconnect the Power Supply Unit s LG terminal from
355. lways stopped at this point regardless y 5 of rated oltage i lt Holding time for 5 V internal j i power supply after power gt P f i OFF detection 10 ms i rocessing time after B E power OFF is confirmed i Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed 10 ms minus Power OFF i Power OFF detec Y lt Power OFF Detection v Detection Delay Time EN tion time Defaultis 7 Delay Time 0 to j Note The interrupt task ower OFF i 10to25ms Pow 10 ms set in PC Set execution time must be etected signal i er OFF undeter up less than or equal to pro mined cessing time after power OFF is confirmed Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks rogram execution 9 not associated with power OFF tatus PU reset signal Power OFF Detection Time The time it takes to detect power OFF after the power supply falls below 85 of the minimum rated voltage Power OFF Detection Delay Time The delay time after power OFF is detected until it is confirmed This can be set in the PC Setup within a range from 0 to 10 ms If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled then the CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset when this time expires If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled in the PC Setup then the CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset only after the power OFF interrupt task has been executed If an unstable power supply is causing power interruptions set a longer Power OFF Dete
356. me Error Log Pointer Function When an error occurs the Error Log Pointer is incremented by 1 to indi cate the location where the next error record will be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log Area A100 to A199 The Error Log Pointer can be cleared to 00 by turning A50014 the Error Log Reset Bit from OFF to ON When the Error Log Pointer has reached 14 20 decimal the next record is stored in A195 to A199 when the next error occurs Settings 00 to 14 hexa decimal Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Retained Write tim ing Written when error occurs Related flags set tings A50014 Current EM Bank This word contains the current EM bank number in 4 digit hexadecimal The current bank number can be changed with the EMBC 281 instruction 0000 to 000C hexadecimal Cleared Cleared A30200 to A30215 CPU Bus Unit Initializ ing Flags These flags are ON while the corre sponding CPU Bus Unit is initializing after its CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit A50100 to A50115 is turned from ONE to ON or the power is turned Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit num bers 0 to 15 Use these flags in the program to prevent the CPU Bus Unit s refresh data from being used while the Unit is initializing IORF 097 cannot be executed while an CPU Bus Unit is initializing These bits are turned OFF automati cally when initialization is completed
357. me this flag will be turned ON as long as the task is being executed has the execution token Maximum Cycle Time A262 to These words contain the maximum cycle time in Read only A263 units of 0 1 ms The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in 32 bit binary A263 is the leftmost word Present Cycle Time A264 to These words contain the present cycle time in units Read only A265 of 0 1 ms The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in 32 bit binary A265 is the leftmost word Task Task Number when Pro A294 This word contains the task number of the task that Read only Information gram Stopped was being executed when program execution was stopped because of a program error Maximum Interrupt Task A440 Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Read only Processing Time Time in units of 0 1 ms Interrupt Task with Max A441 Contains the task number of the interrupt task with Read only Processing Time the maximum processing time Hexadecimal values 8000 to 80FF correspond to task numbers 00 to FF Bit 15 is turned ON when an interrupt has occurred 209 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function Name Address Description Access Debugging Online Editing Wait Flag A20110 ON when an online editing process is waiting Read only Information An online editing request was received while online editing was disabled Online Editing Processing A20111 ON when an online editing
358. mediate Refreshing None Upward Differentiation and None Immediate Refreshing Special None 0 instructions Upward Differentiation 1 Immediate Refreshing Upward Differentiation and Immediate Refreshing For example if OUT is used with an address of CIO 000000 to CIO 25515 the program capacity of the previous PC would be 2 words per instruction and that of the CS CJ series PC would be 1 2 1 step per instruction For example if MOV is used MOVE instruction with immediate refreshing the program capacity of a CV series PC would be 4 words per instruction and that of the CS CJ series PC would be 7 4 3 steps 10 5 Power OFF Operation 1 2 3 Note 1 2 3 The following processing is performed if CPU Unit power is turned OFF Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply falls below 8596 of the minimum rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 The CPU Unit will stop 2 Outputs from all Output Units will be turned OFF All output will turn OFF despite an I O Memory Hold Bit or I O Memory Hold Bit at power ON settings in the PC Setup 85 of the rated voltage 85 V AC for 100 to 240 V wide range The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily momentary power interruption 1 The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power in terruption lasts less than 10 ms i e the time it takes the m
359. meters Set the DIP switch as required for the serial communications mode according to the following table Function Default setting Not used Leave set to ON Internal terminating resistance setting ON Terminating resistance connected OFF Terminating resistance not connected 2 wire 4 wire setting Both pins ON 2 wire communications Both pins OFF 4 wire communications Communications mode See note Both pins OFF Always send 5 OFF 6 ON Send when RS 232C s CS is high 5 ON 6 OFF Send when RS 232C s CS is low Note Turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6 when connected to a CJ series CPU Unit 367 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E Connection Example to Programmable Terminal PT Direct Connection from RS 232C to RS 232C PT RS 232C port RS 232C mrs Host Link or NT Link 1 N 1 N CPU Unit PT Signal Pin Pin Signal name No No name FG Hood Hood FG FG 1 1 SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD 4 R Wwe CS s 5 pos AS 5V 6 6 5V DR 7 7 ER 8 8 SG 9 9 SG D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin connector male connector male Communications Mode Host Link unit number 0 only for Host Link NT Link 1 N N 1 Unit only OMRON Cables with Connectors XW2Z 200T 1 2 m XW2Z 500T 1 5 m Recommended Wiring Methods We recommend
360. mode or a fatal error has occurred The RUN output can be used to control external systems such as in an emer genoy stop circuit that turns off the power supply to external systems when 127 Wiring Section 5 3 the PC is not operating See 5 1 Fail safe Circuits for more details on the emergency stop circuit Item CJ1W PA205R Contact form SPST NO Maximum switching capacity 240 V AC 2 A for resistive loads 120 V AC 0 5A for inductive loads 24V DC 2A for resistive loads 24V AC 2A for inductive loads Crimp Terminals The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3 5 self raising terminals with screws Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0 8 Nem Use round type crimp terminals M3 5 having the dimensions shown below Ze to 0 8 Nem Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0 8 N m Loose screws may result in short circuit malfunction or fire Note 1 Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source 2 Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit after wiring the Unit The label will block air circulation needed for cooling Grounding The diagram below shows the location of the ground and line ground termi nals PA205R CJ POWER LG Noise filter neutral terminal Ground this terminal to less than 10
361. mpoBus D Optical Controller Link Units provide a bypass function when a node fails I td Multi vendor network DeviceNet Remote I O message communications Remote I O Many points free allocation Message communications between PCs DeviceNet and Explicit messages Multi level network Various connection methods Superior Slaves Remote I O Terminals Remote Adapters Analog I O Terminals Sensor Terminals I O Link Units Temperature Input Terminal High density I O Terminals 52 Sends receives data using TCP Controller Link Support Board o o ig D gt n c s o amp ic Control Systems Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 Ethernet Controller Link If an Ethernet Unit is connected to the system FINS messages can be used to communicate between the Host computer connected to the Ethernet and the PC or between PCs By executing FTP commands for the PC from the Host computer connected to the Ethernet the contents of the files on the Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit can be read or written transferred Data can be sent and received using UDP and TCP protocols These func tions enable a greater compatibility with information networks Host computer FTP command Ethernet Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit The Controller Link Network is the basic framework of the OMRON PC FA Network Connecting a Controller Link Unit to the network enables
362. n different Units 2 1 Specifications cse pv em eek hei Roe EY E Paw ban 22 2 1 1 Performance Specifications 0 00 00 00 0022 e eee 22 2 1 2 General Specifications 0 0 eee eee ee eee 27 2 2 CPU Unit Components and Functions 00 00 0000 29 2 2 2 CPU Unt Capabilities esee eR eR es 30 2 2 3 Unit Classifications 0 0 0 eee e 31 2 2 4 Data Communications 0 0 eee ee eee 31 2 3 Basic System Configuration 0 0 00 eee eee eee ee 31 2 3 1 CJ series CPU Rack coec econo eee 32 2 3 2 CJ series Expansion Racks 0 0 0 cee eee eee 38 2 3 3 Connectable Units eee ee eee 39 2 3 4 Maximum Number of Units eee een 39 2 4 JO Umts4 c etr es RR eet cR 40 2 4 1 CJ series Basic I O Units 0 0 eee eee eee 40 2 4 2 CJ series Special I O Units eese 41 2 4 3 CJ series CPU Bus Units 00 0 0 eee eee eee 42 2 5 Expanded System Configuration eee eee eee 43 2 5 1 Serial Communications System 000000000 43 2 5 2e SYSTEMS hex eas ed ae eee RC ge eL wae eee IAE ea 44 2 5 3 Communications Network System 04 52 2 6 Unit Current Consumption 0 0 ee ee ee eee 55 2 6 1 CJ series CPU Racks and Expansion Racks 55 2 6 2 Example Calculations 56 2 6 3 Current Consumption Tables 0 00 00 00 00 37 2 7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Ca
363. n I O connecting cable End Cover CJ1W TERO1 Must be connected to the right end of the CPU Rack One End Cover is provided with the CPU Unit and with an I O Interface Unit A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected CS CJ series CS1W CN313 Connects Expansion Racks to CPU Racks or other Expansion I O Connecting Cables CS1W CN713 Racks CS1W CN223 CS1W CN323 CS1W CN523 CS1W CN133 CS1W CN133B2 2 3 3 Connectable Units The following table shows the Units that can be connected to CPU Racks and Expansion Racks Refer to 2 4 I O Units for details on the limitations on each particular Unit CJ series CJ series CJ series Basic I O Units oe 1 0 Units oe Bus Units CJ series CPU Rack CJ series Expansion Racks 2 3 4 Maximum Number of Units The maximum number of I O Units that can be connected to the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks is 40 i e 10 each for the CPU Rack and up to 3 Expansion Racks The total number of each type of Unit is not limited accord ing to connection locations Note A fatal error will occur and the CPU Unit will not operate if more than 10 I O Units are connected to the CPU Rack or any Expansion Rack 39 I O Units Section 2 4 2 4 I O Units 2 4 1 CJ series Basic I O Units Basic Input Units Specifications Number Mountable Racks of bits CJ series CJ series allocated cpy Rack Expansion Racks DC Input Units Terminal block CJ1W ID21
364. n Unit or I O Terminal see page 135 2 Although 16 output bits are allocated only 8 of these can be used for ex ternal outputs This Unit is also treated as a 16 point Output Unit in the I O tables 40 CJ series Special I O Units Specifications 8 inputs 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V etc CJ1W AD081 Number of words allocated CIO 2959 10 words Number of words allocated Mountable Racks CJ series CPU Rack CJ series Expansion Racks Section 2 4 Unit No 0 to 95 4 outputs 1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA etc CJ1W DA041 10 words 0 to 95 4 control loops thermocouple inputs NPN outputs CJ1W TC001 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 4 control loops thermocouple inputs PNP outputs CJ1W TC002 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 2 control loops thermocouple inputs NPN outputs heater burnout detection CJ1W TC003 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 2 control loops thermocouple inputs NPN outputs heater burnout detection CJ1W TC004 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 4 control loops temperature resistance thermometer inputs NPN outputs CJ1W TC101 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 4 control loops temperature resistance thermometer inputs PNP outputs CJ1W TC102 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 2 control loo
365. n external relay CR1 is connected to the RUN output from the Power Sup ply Unit as shown in the following diagram Fail safe Circuits Section 5 1 MCB1 as er w Controlled system 007 oss L Transformer or noise filter CJ series PC DC voltage EI regulator O DC O input output Surge suppressor Note There is only one Power Supply Unit for the CS series PCs i e the CJ1W PA205R When a Power Supply Unit without a RUN output is used program the Always ON Flag A1 as the execution condition for an output point from an Output Unit Interlock Circuits When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclock wise operation of a motor provide an external interlock such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON at the same time Interlock circuit 000501 i uc Motor clockwise 000502 MC1 i Motor counterclockwise This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same time even if both CIO 000500 and CIO 000501 are both ON so the motor is protected even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions 109 Installation 5 2 Installation Section 5 2 5 2 1 Installation and Wiring Precautions Ambient Conditions Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels 110 Be sure to consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PC to improve the reliability of the system and mak
366. n the Registered I O Table Refer to the Parameter Areas Section 9 21 Programming Device s Operation Manual for details on registering the I O Table Programming Device 0 1 2 SPU 0 1 2 3 4 Analog Semme output 16 o 3 4 Regis 5 F 5 Output 12 Input 16 VO ela e2 Table Oy dns o 2 2 E o Elol o o g EJ 9 9 9 g 2 s 9 21 3 Routing Table 1 2 3 The I O Setting Error Flag A40110 will be turned ON if the models and loca tions of the Units actually mounted to the PC CPU Rack and Expansion Racks do not match the information in the Registered I O Table By default the CJ series CPU Unit will automatically create I O tables at star tup and operate according to them I O tables do not necessarily need to be created by the user When transferring data between networks it is necessary to create a table in each CPU Unit that shows the communications route from the local PC s Communications Unit to the other networks These tables of communications routes are called Routing Tables Create the Routing Tables with a Programming Device or the Controller Link Support Software and transfer the tables to each CPU Unit The following dia gram shows the Routing Tables used for a data transfer from PC 1 to PC 4 Node number M Network 2 Unit number n PC 4 Network 3 Node number N 1 Relay Netwo
367. n the model being used 1 2 3 1 Data transferred when the PC is turned ON 2 Data transferred each cycle 3 Data transferred when necessary Some models transfer data in both directions from the DM Area to the Unit and from the Unit to the DM Area See the Unit s Operation Manual for details on data transfers These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the CPU Bus Unit When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system the Restart Bits 450100 to A50115 for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit N DM Area for CPU Bus Units ransferred 100 words Unit restarted Transferred each cycle and when necessary FINS Commands The CMND 490 instruction can be added to the ladder program to send a FINS command to the CPU Bus Unit CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit CMND F The FINS command is trans mitted when CMND 490 has been executed in the program FINS commands can be transmitted to CPU Bus Units in other PCs in the network not just the local PC 184 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8 2 Serial Communications Unit 7 Serial Communications CPU Bus Unit Unit CPU Unit aS CPU Unit CMND m The FINS command is transmitted when CMND 490 has been executed in the program BGR Ca aA ETE TER C YER I SAO OO OTI oA Seat aioe EVER RI Command transmission CPU Bus Unit Initializ
368. nals is not possible Note When using work bits in programming use the bits in the Work Area first before using bits from other areas Reference 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 7 DeviceNet Area Holding Area 8 192 bits 512 words H00000 to H51115 H000 to H511 Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program and maintain their ON OFF status when the PC is turned OFF or the oper ating mode is changed 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 9 Holding Area Auxiliary Area Read only 7 168 bits 448 words A00000 to A44715 words A000 to A447 Read write 8 192 bits 512 words A44800 to A95915 words A448 to A959 Auxiliary bits are allocated specific functions 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 10 Auxiliary Area Temporary Area 16 bits TRO to TR15 Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON OFF execution conditions at program branches 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 11 TR Temporary Relay Area Timer Area 4 096 T0000 to T4095 used for timers only 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 12 Timer Area Counter Area 4 096 C0000 to C4095 used for counters only 9 2 2 Overview of the Data Areas 9 13 Counter Area 32K words D00000 to D32767 Used as a general purpose data area for reading and writing data in word units 16 bits Words in the DM Area maintain their status when the PC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed
369. ng Ethernet Controller Link and DeviceNet Ethernet CJ series PC CJ series PC CS series PC Controller Link DeviceNet CJ series PC l O Terminal Temperature Robot etc Controller Remote Monitoring and Programming 1 2 3 1 The host link function can operate through a modem which allows moni toring of a distant PC s operation data transfers or even online editing of a distant PC s program by phone 2 PCs in a network can be programmed and monitored through the Host Link 3 It is possible to communicate through 3 network levels even with different types of networks Remote programming monitoring Remote programming monitoring of a of a distant PC PC on the network through Host Link Controller Link Network A E Modem Modem Remote programming monitoring of a PC on a network up to 3 levels away including the local net work for the same or different types of networks is possible through Host Link ETSI ANE J Network 3 Network 1 Network 2 Special Features and Functions Section 1 2 Message transfer between PCs on a network 3 levels away including the local network for the same or different types of networks
370. ng NT ALO01 E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT ALOO1 E Link Adapters XW2Z 070T 1 0 7 m XW2Z 200T 1 2 m The recommended cables should be wired as shown below Each signal wire should be twisted with the SG signal ground wire and placed in a shielded cable to prevent the effects of noise in noise prone environments The 5 V wires can also be twisted with the SG wire to increase noise immunity 366 Connecting to the RS 232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix E Although this wiring is different from that shown in the example above it can be used to increase noise immunity if required Wiring with XW2Z LILIOT 1 10 conductors NT ALOO1 E d E Shield 2 When the NT ALOO1 E Link Adapter is connected to the RS 232C port on the CPU Unit 5 V is sup plied from pin 6 eliminating the need for a 5 V power supply 3 Donotuse the 5 V power from pin 6 of the RS 232C port for anything but the NT ALOO1 E Link Adapt er Using this power supply for any other external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device 4 The XW1Z LILIOT 1 Cable is designed to connect the NT ALOO1 E and contains special wiring for the CS and RS signals Do not use this cable for any other application Connecting this cable to other devices can damage them DIP Switch Settings on the NT AL001 E Link Adapter There is a DIP switch on the NT ALOO1 E Link Adapter that is used to set RS 422A 485 communications para
371. nica tions Information networks Between Host computer and PC Between PCs Between Host computer and Memory Card installed in CPU Unit Between PC and nodes with socket service such as UNIX computers FTP servo Socket service Controller Link Between PC and personal computer directly con nected to the Network FINS message communica tions Data link offset simple set tings Controller Link Sup port Board and Con troller Link Unit RS 232C Control ler Link Between Host Link com puter and PC on the Net work Host Link commands and gateway RS 232C cables and Controller Link Unit Control net works 54 Controller Link DeviceNet Compo Bus D Between PCs FINS message communica tions Controller Link Unit FINS message communica tions in an open network DeviceNet Compo Bus D PC and Network devices Slaves Large capacity remote I O fixed or free allocation in an open network CompoBus D Master Unit and Configurator Unit Current Consumption Section 2 6 Communications Specifications Network Communications Max Commu Max No Commu Datalink Max Connect Mes Data Re Paudrate nica of Units nica capacity remote able sages link mote tions tions pernet I O devices VO distance medium work points Ethernet 10Mbps 2 5 km Twisted Host com pair puter to PC PC t
372. ning the power off 1 Error 0 No error Cleared Cleared Written when power is turned ON A40400 to A40407 I O Bus Error Slot Number Contains the 8 bit binary slot number 00 to 09 where an I O Bus Error occurred When the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack OE Hex will be stored CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The I O Bus Error Flag A401 14 will be ON This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 00 to 09 slot number 00 to 09 A40114 A40408 to A40415 I O Bus Error Rack Number Contains the 8 bit binary rack num ber 00 to 03 where an I O Bus Error occurred When the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack OE Hex will be stored CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The I O Bus Error Flag A40114 will be ON This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 00 to 03 rack number 00 to 03 A40114 336 PC Setup Error Loca tion When there is a setting error in the PC Setup the location of that error is written to A406 in 4 digit hexadeci mal The location is given as the address displayed on a Program ming Console The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash A406 will be cleared when the c
373. nits Default 00 This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection of a power interruption approximately 10 to 25 ms after the power supply voltage drops below 85 of the rated value to the confirmation of a power interruption The default setting is 0 ms When the power OFF interrupt task is enabled it will be exe cuted when the power interrup tion is confirmed If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled the CPU will be reset and opera tion will be stopped New setting s effective ness Takes effect at startup or at the start of operation Can t be changed during opera tion Special I O Unit Cyclic Refreshing Cyclic Refreshing of Units 0 to 15 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 Cyclic Refreshing of Units 16 to 31 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 Cyclic Refreshing of Units 32 to 47 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 Cyclic Refreshing of Units 48 to 63 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 Cyclic Refreshing of Units 64 to 79 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 Cyclic Refreshing of Units 80 to 95 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default 0 These settings determine whether data will be exchanged between the specified Unit and the Special I O Unit s allocated words 10 words Unit during cyclic refreshing for Special I O Units Turn ON the corresponding bit to disable cyclic refreshing when the
374. nt lorF 2 lleak Connect a breeder resistor if lea is greater than loge Use the following equation to calculate the breeder resistance constant R lt Rin X Vorr lieak X Rin 7 Vorr Power W 2 Vcc Vg R x 4 allowable margin DC Input Unit Two wire sensor Vcc Power voltage Von PC ON voltage Vg Sensor output residual current Vore PC OFF voltage lout Sensor control current load current lon PC ON current leak Sensor leakage current lorr PC OFF current R Bleeder resistance Rin PC input impedance 4 Precautions on Sensor Surge Current An incorrect input may occur if a sensor is turned ON after the PC has started up to the point where inputs are possible Determine the time re quired for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON and take appropriate measures such as inserting into the program a timer de lay after turning ON the sensor Example In this example the sensor s power supply voltage is used as the input to 138 Wiring Section 5 3 CIO 000000 and a 100 ms timer delay the time required for an OMRON Proximity Sensor to stabilize is created in the program After the Comple tion Flag for the timer turns ON the sensor input on CIO 000001 will cause output bit CIO 000100 to turn ON 000000 TIMO000 000001 Cd Output Wiring Precautions Output Short circuit If a load connected to the output terminals is short circuited output compo Protection nents and the and prin
375. nts Error and shows the meaning of the value written to bits A40700 to A40712 Values of 000 to 101 0 to 5 corre spond to causes 1 through 6 described in Too Many I O Points Cause 1 above These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared 000 Too many I O total 101 Too many Racks 111 Too many Units ona Rack Cleared Cleared Written when error occurs A40800 to A40807 Basic I O Unit Error Slot Number When an error has occurred in a Basic I O Unit A40212 will be turned ON and the slot number where the error occurred will be written here in binary The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared 00 to 09 hexadecimal Slots 0 to 9 Cleared Cleared A40212 A40808 to A40815 Basic I O Unit Error Rack Num ber When an error has occurred ina Basic I O Unit A40212 will be turned ON and the Rack number where the error occurred will be written here in binary The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared 00 to 03 hexadecimal Racks 0 to 3 A40212 A40900 to A40903 Expansion Rack Num ber Duplica tion Flags The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expansion Rack s start ing word address was set
376. o RS 232C port connection No Peripheral servicing with other No devices Special I O Units CPU Bus Units and file access Calculation Example Process name Calculation Processing time With Without Programming Programming Device Device 1 Overseeing 0 5 ms 0 5 ms 2 Program execu tion 0 04 us x 2 500 0 17 us x 2 500 0 53 ms 0 53 ms 3 Cycle time cal culation Fixed cycle time not set 0 ms 0 ms 4 I O refreshing 0 004 ms x 8 0 005 ms x 8 0 072 ms 0 072 ms 5 Peripheral ser vicing Peripheral port connected only 0 1 ms 0 ms Cycle time 1 2 3 4 5 10 3 4 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension 1 202 ms 1 102 ms When online editing is executed from a Programming Device such as Pro gramming Console or CX Programmer while the CPU Unit is operating in MONITOR mode to change the program the CPU Unit will momentarily sus pend operation while the program is being changed The period of time that the cycle time is extended is determined by the following conditions Editing operations insert delete overwrite Types of instructions used The cycle time extension for online editing will be negligibly affected by the size of task programs If the maximum program size for each task is 64 Ksteps the online editing cycle time extension will be 80 ms max 247 Computing the Cycle Time Note S
377. o CIO 1749 CIO 1750 to CIO 1774 CIO 1775 to CIO 1799 CIO 1800 to CIO 1824 CIO 1825 to CIO 1849 CIO 1850 to CIO 1874 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899 The function of the 25 words depends upon the CPU Bus Unit being used For details refer to the Unit s operation manual Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area that aren t allocated to CPU Bus Units can be used only in the program Bits in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be force set and force reset The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases 1 The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF 2 The PC s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro tected in the PC Setup 3 The CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device 4 PCoperation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS 007 error occurs The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be retained when FALS 007 is executed If the IOM Hold BIt A50012 is ON the contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa If the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON and the PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled 9 6 Special I O Unit Area The Special I O Unit Area
378. o PC Controller Link 2 Mbps Twisted Special 32000 PC to PC pair twisted words personal cables pair computer to 500m cables PC DeviceNet 500 Kbps 100m Special PC to Slave CompoBus D Communi cables Slaves cations Remote I O cycle Terminals Approx 5 Remote ms 128 Adapters inputs Sensor Ter 128 out minals puts COM I O Link Units Analog Out put Termi nals Analog Input Termi nals 2 6 Unit Current Consumption The amount of current power that can be supplied to the Units mounted in a Rack is limited by the capacity of the Rack s Power Supply Unit Refer to the following tables when designing your system so that the total current con sumption of the mounted Units does not exceed the maximum current for each voltage group and the total power consumption does not exceed the maximum for the Power Supply Unit 2 6 1 CJ series CPU Racks and Expansion Racks The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be sup plied by Power Supply Units in CPU Racks and Expansion Racks When calculating current power consumption in a CPU Rack be sure to include the power required by the CPU Unit itself Likewise be sure to include the power required by the I O Interface Unit when calculating current power consumption in an Expansion Rack Power Supply Max Current Consumption Max Total Unit 5 V Power V group 24 V group 24 V group Internal logic
379. o commu dition nications ports 0 to 7 All of these flags are turned OFF at the start of program execution and the flag for a given port is turned OFF when a network instruction with that port number is executed A220 to A22000 Basic I O These words contain the actual input 0 to 17 hexa Retained See PC Setup A259 to Unit Input response times for CJ series Basic I decimal function Basic I O 25915 Response O Units column Unit Input dins When the Basic I O Unit input response response time setting is changed in time set the PC Setup while the PC is in tings PROGRAM mode the setting in the PC Setup will not match the actual value in the Basic I O Unit unless the power is turned OFF and then ON again In that case the actual value can be monitored in these words A260 All l O Alloca Indicates the current status of I O 0000 Hex Retained Retained oa tion Status allocation i e Automatic I O Alloca Automatic I O tion at Startup or User set I O Alloca Allocation at tions Startup BBBB Hex User set I O Allocations 322 Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Name Function Status Status at Related Write tim Words Bits Maximum Cycle Time These words contain the maximum cycle time since the start of PC oper ation The cycle time is recorded in 8 digit hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A263 and the rightmost 4 digits in A262 Settings 0
380. o low A40204 ON If this setting is set to detect errors 0 an interrupt task error will be detected in the following cases e ORF 097 is executed in an interrupt task to refresh a Special I O Unit s l O while that Unit s I O is being refreshed during cyclic refreshing These settings are used to convert part of the EM Area to file memory The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be set aside as file memory Changing these settings using the Programming Console does not format the specified EM banks the EM banks must be formatted with a Programming Device after changing these PC Setup settings When formatting the EM banks with a Programming Console refer to 7 2 Memory Card Format in the Programming Console Operation Manual W341 E1 1 With the CX Pro grammer file memory will be formatted when file memory conversion and the number of banks to be converted is specified when transferring the PC Setup EM banks cannot be formatted as file memory unless they have been speci fied as file memory in the PC Setup Once part of the EM Area has been formatted for use as file memory it can be converted back to normal EM Area usage by changing these PC Setup settings back to their previous value and un formatting the EM banks with a Programming Device The actual starting file memory bank is stored in A344 EM File Memory Starting Bank When the settings in the PC Setup have been changed but the EM Area hasn t been formatted
381. obal symbols beginning with P The Clock Pulses are read only they cannot be overwritten from instructions or Programming Devices CX Programmer or Programming Console The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation The following example turns CIO 000000 ON and OFF at 0 5 s intervals 000000 Instruction Operand C LD 1s OUT 000000 gt 0 5s 000000 Em 0 55 9 21 Parameter Areas 9 21 1 PC Setup Note Unlike the data areas in I O memory which can be used in instruction oper ands the Parameter Area can be accessed only from a Programming Device The Parameter Area is made up of the following parts The PC Setup The Registered I O Table The Routing Table The CPU Bus Unit Settings The user can customize the basic specifications of the CPU Unit with the set tings in the PC Setup The PC Setup contains settings such as the serial port communications settings and minimum cycle time setting Refer to the Programming Device s Operation Manual for details on changing these settings 9 21 2 Registered I O Table 234 The Registered I O Table is a table in the CPU Unit that contains the informa tion on the model and slot location of all of the Units mounted to the CPU Rack and Expansion Rack The I O Table is written to the CPU Unit with a Programming Device operation The CPU Unit allocates I O memory to I O points on Basic I O Unit and CPU Bus Units based on the information i
382. of IRO with constant offset content of IRLI and the result is Include a or and loads the bit at that PC treated as the PC memory in the constant memory address address of a bit or word The constant may be any integer from 2 048 to 2 047 Indirect addressing The content of the Data Register LD Adds the contents of DRO to with DR offset is added to the content of IRL and DRO IRO the contents of IRO and the result is treated as the PC loads the bit at that PC memory address of a bit or word memory address Indirect addressing After referencing the content of Increment by 1 LD IR0 Loads the bit at the PC with auto increment IRL as the PC memory address of IRL T memory address contained a bit or word the content is incre Increment by 2 in IRO and then increments mented by 1 or 2 IR the content of IRO by 2 Ll Indirect addressing The content of IRL is decre Decrement by 1 LD IRO Decrements the content of with auto decrement mented by 1 or 2 and the result is IR IRO by 2 and then loads the treated as the PC memory Decrement by 2 bit at that PC memory address of a bit or word IR address Example This example shows how to store the PC memory address of a word CIO 0002 in an Index Register IRO use the Index Registe
383. on nected the CPU Unit will auto matically enter RUN mode at startup Section 7 1 Related flags and words New setting s effective ness Takes effect at startup Detect Low Battery Detect Interrupt Task Error 0 Detect 1 Do not detect Default 0 This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected If this setting is set to 0 and a battery error is detected the Battery Error Flag 440204 will be turned ON CPU Unit operation will continue and the ERR ALM indicator will flash A40204 Battery Error Flag Takes effect the next cycle 0 Detect 1 Do not detect Default 0 This setting determines whether interrupt task errors are detected If this setting is set to 0 and an interrupt task error is detected the Interrupt Task Error Flag A40213 will be turned ON CPU Unit operation will continue and the ERR ALM indicator will flash A40213 Interrupt Task Error Flag Takes effect the next cycle EM File Mem ory EM File Mem ory Starting Bank 0 None 1 EM File Memory Enabled Default 0 This setting determines whether part of the EM Area will be used for file memory 0 to 2 Default 0 If bit 7 above is set to 1 the set ting here specifies the EM bank where file memory begins The specified EM bank and all subse quent banks will be used as file memory This setting will be dis abled if bit 7
384. on time Basic instructions 0 08 us min Special instructions 0 12 us min 10 4 Instruction Execu tion Times and Num ber of Steps Overhead time 0 5 ms Unit connection method No Backplane Units connected directly to each other Mounting method DIN Track screw mounting not possible 5 2 6 DIN Track Instal lation Maximum connect able Units Per CPU or Expansion Rack 10 Units including Basic I O Units Spe cial I O Units and CPU Bus Units Total per PC 10 Units on CPU Rack and 10 Units each on 3 Expan sion Racks 40 Units total Maximum number of Expansion Racks 3 total An I O Control Unit is required on the CPU Rack and an I O Interface Unit is required on each Expansion Rack 2 3 2 CJ series Expan sion Racks Number of tasks 288 cyclic tasks 32 interrupt tasks 256 Note Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled with TKON 820 and TKOF 821 instructions Note The following 2 types of interrupt tasks are supported Power OFF interrupt tasks 1 max Scheduled interrupt tasks 2 max Programming Manual 1 3 Programs and Tasks Programming Manual SECTION 4 Tasks Interrupt types 22 Scheduled Interrupts Interrupts generated at a time scheduled by the CPU Unit s built in timer Power OFF Interrupt Interrupt executed when the CPU Unit s power is turned OFF Programming Manual 4 8 Interrupt Tasks Specifications Item I
385. ondition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power 207 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 supply When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted the input will go OFF before the PC s internal power supply and the Holding Area bit will be reset B Set input KEEP UN H00000 e A Reset input FF Instead use a configuration like the one shown below E B een Set input KEEP Input H00000 D Unit There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of N C or N O conditions that can be programmed Reset input 9 10 Auxiliary Area Forcing Bit Status Writing Auxiliary Area Data 208 The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A000 to A959 These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and control operation A000 through A447 are read only but A448 through A959 can be read or writ ten from the program or a Programming Device Bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force set and force reset continuously The following operations can be performed from a Programming Device to write data in the Auxiliary Area Using the CX Programmer Online set reset not force set force reset changing present values when monitoring programming addresses set values dialog box or transferring data to the PC after editing the PC data tables Refer to the CX P
386. ops 9 ranges 9 records and tables 10 stacks 9 steps per instruction 250 text strings 9 interrupt control instructions execution times 262 Interrupt Task error 283 Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag 351 interrupt tasks error flag 351 error information 214 errors 283 interrupts Power OFF Interrupt Task 155 164 response time 249 Index IOM Hold Bit 209 340 IORF 097 refreshing input bits and words 198 output bits and words 200 J L leakage current output 139 Less Than Flag 232 Less Than or Equals Flag 233 Link Adapters current consumption 57 Link Area 201 Local Network Table 236 logic instructions execution times 259 loops instructions 9 maintenance procedures 295 memory capacities 30 memory block map 65 memory map 354 See also data areas memory areas 187 See also memory Memory Cards 34 67 dimensions 71 initializing 69 installing 71 installing in a personal computer 74 overview 8 removing 72 memory error 278 Memory Error Flag 214 333 momentary power interruption 267 MONITOR mode 240 monitoring remote monitoring 7 N Negative Flag 232 network instructions execution times 263 networks 52 Controller Link 53 DeviceNet CompoBus D 54 Ethernet 53 multilevel networks 6 overview 54 related flags bits 217 noise reducing electrical noise 140 non fatal operating errors 283 Not Equal Flag 232 NT Links 46 maximum unit number 153 O
387. or See note 3 Bus Unit error mu VO Table be ok Special I O Setting error See note 3 Unit error gt Program error Battery error _ Cycle Time Ad i shoe na Ed e Overrun error See note 3 Sap ond System FALS E Special I O Bi Ir Siar 2t NE Unit Setup See note 3 error The rack number will be given at The FAL FALS number will be given at The unit number will be given at The master number will be given at A To 275 Error Processing Section 11 2 11 2 4 Error Messages The following tables show error messages for errors which can occur in CJ series PCs and indicate the likely cause of the errors CPU Errors A CPU error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in RUN or MONITOR mode A Programming Device cannot be connected to the CPU if an CPU error has occurred Power Supply CPU Unit Indicators Unit Indicator ERR ALM Program Probable cause Possible remedy ming flags in code in Console Auxiliary A400 display Area CPU error Watchdog timer has Turn the power OFF and WDT exceeded maxi restart The Unit may be error mum setting This damaged Contact you error does not nor OMRON representative mally occur Power Supply CPU Unit Indicators Unit Indicator ERR ALM Status Program Probable cause Possible remedy ming flags in cod
388. or an Expansion Rack OE Hex will be stored Read only I O Bus Error Rack Num ber A40408 to A40415 Contains the 8 bit binary rack number 00 to 03 where an I O Bus Error occurred When the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack OE Hex will be stored Read only Duplication Information Duplication Error Flag Fatal error A40113 ON in the following cases Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number Two Special I O Units have been assigned the same unit number Two Basic I O Units have been allocated the same data area words The same rack number is set for more than one Expansion Rack Read only 215 Auxiliary Area Function CPU Bus Unit Infor mation Name CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags Address Section 9 10 Description The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corre sponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit s unit number has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F Access Read only CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A40207 and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F Read only CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number Flags When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs A40203 and the
389. ord setting ex ceeds CIO 0900 the corresponding Expansion Rack Number Duplication Flags A40900 to A40903 Racks 0 to 3 and the Duplication Error Flag A40113 will be turned ON 175 I O Allocations Section 8 1 3 Always create I O tables when setting the first word for one or more Racks The correct words will not be allocated without use set I O tables 4 The CJ series PCs do not use Backplanes so empty slots cannot be left for future expansion To allow for future expansion allocate virtual Dummy Units in the I O tables from the CX Programmer and download the I O ta bles to the CPU Unit If this is performed Unit can later be added to the PC for actual application 5 Ifthe actual system configuration is changed after registering the I O table so that the number of words or I O type does not match the I O table an I O setting error A40110 will occur A CPU Bus Unit Setting Error A40203 or Special I O Unit Setting Error A40202 may occur as well 6 When a Unit is removed words can be reserved for the missing Unit using the I O Table Change Operation If a Unit is changed or added all of the words in the program following that Unit s allocated words will be changed and the I O Table Registration Operation will have to be performed again 7 The first word settings for the Racks will be cleared when the I O tables are deleted from the CX Programmer 8 1 4 Reserving I O Words for Expected Changes 1 2 3 Note
390. ords contain the time at which the power was turned ON The con tents are updated every time that the power is turned ON The data is stored in BCD A51000 to A51007 Sec ond 00 to 59 A51008 to A51015 Minute 00 to 59 A51100 to A51107 Hour 00 to 23 A51108 to A51115 Day of month 00 to 31 See Function column Retained See Function column Written when power is turned ON Time Info Power Interrup tion Time A512 to A513 These words contain the time at which the power was interrupted The con tents are updated every time that the power is inter rupted The data is stored in BCD A51200 to A51207 Sec ond 00 to 59 A51208 to A51215 Minute 00 to 59 A51300 to A51307 Hour 00 to 23 A51308 to A51315 Day of month 00 to 31 These words are not cleared at start up See Function column Retained Retained Written at power interrup tion Time Info 342 Number of Power Interrup tions Contains the number of times that power has been interrupted since the power was first turned ON The data is stored in binary To reset this value overwrite the current value with 0000 This word is not cleared at start up but it is cleared when the Memory Corrup tion Detected Flag A39511 goes ON 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal Retained Retained Written when power is turned ON A39511 Auxiliary Area Ap
391. ort Event service time for Same as above RS 232C port File access service time for Same as above Memory Card The default value for each servicing process is 4 of the last cycle s cycle time In general we recommend using the default value Set a uniform servicing time only when peripheral servicing is being delayed because each service process is being spread over several cycles Note 1 When the peripheral servicing time is set to a time longer than the default value the cycle time will also be longer 2 The fixed peripheral servicing time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode 3 Use the Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode to give priority to servicing pe ripheral over program execution Power OFF Interrupt Task This setting determines whether or not a power OFF interrupt task will be exe cuted when a power interruption is detected When this setting is set to 0 the regular program will just stop when a power interruption is detected The power OFF interrupt task will be stopped when the power hold time pro cessing time after power interrupt power OFF detection delay time has elapsed The maximum power hold time is 10 ms When a power OFF detection delay time has to be set be sure that the power OFF interrupt task can be executed in the available time 10 ms power OFF detection delay time Note The power OFF interrupt task setting cannot be changed wh
392. ort circuit protection CJ1W OD212 CJ series Basic I O Units Section 3 6 Part Names of Units with 18 point Terminal Blocks l O ge indicators Connector Connect to the connector on the next Unit mers CJ1W ID211 s a M i is CJ1W OC201 CJ1W OC211 CJ1W OD 211 CJ1W OD212 See note Note The CJ1W OD212 also has an ERR indicator for the load short circuit alarm Dimensions of Units with 18 point Terminal Blocks CJ1W ID21 1 CJ1W OC201 CJ1W 0C211 CJ1W 0D211 CJIW OD212 XJ O9 OO O9 OO GL OO OX OOOO DC24V Y mA 27 3 6 2 CJ series 32 64 point Basic I O Units with Connectors Units are available with either Fujitsu compatible connectors CJ1W LIDET 11 or MIL connectors CJ1W Specifications Number of bits allocated DC Input Units Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID231 24 V DC 32 inputs MIL connector CJ1W ID232 24 V DC 32 inputs Fujitsu compatible connector CJ1W ID261 24 V DC 64 inputs 87 CJ series Basic I O Units Section 3 6 Name Specifications Model Number Page of bits allocated Transistor Output
393. ory is allocated to each Unit Memory is allocated differently to Basic I O Units Special I O Units and CJ series CPU Bus Units 168 I O Allocations Section 8 1 8 1 1 Basic I O Units 72 Basic I O Units Nc h K E W Lettre To ad td SN Allocations Allocations a E Special I O Units i R D CPU Bus Units Y E Allocations I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO0079 Words are allocated as required by each Unit in sequence to Units in the order they are connected Note The first word on each Rack can be set from the CX Programmer to an address between CIO 0000 and CIO 0999 to change the default setting consecutively from CIO 0000 Special I O Unit Area CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 Words are allocated ten at a time to each Unit according to unit number Note The maximum total number of Units that can be connected is 40 which means the maximum number of Special I O Units is 40 CPU Bus Unit Area CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 Words are allocated 25 at a time to each Unit according to unit number 169 I O Allocations 8 1 2 1 O Allocation to Basic I O Units Section 8 1 CJ series Basic I O Units are allocated words in the I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0079 and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks Note Refer to 2 4 I O Uni
394. ost com computer NT grammer in puter or or CX Link peripheral CX Pro Program bus mode grammer mer in in host host link link mode mode Host Standard CX Pro Host com computer external grammer in puter or or CX device peripheral CX Pro Program bus mode grammer mer in in host host link link mode mode CX Programmer in peripheral bus mode Auto detect connected device s baud rate Note When CX Programmer is set to host link mode it won t be possible to com municate go online in the following cases The computer is connected to the CPU Unit s peripheral port and pin 4 is OFF The computer is connected to the CPU Unit s RS 232C port and pin 5 is ON To go online set CX Programmer to peripheral bus mode turn pin 4 ON turn pin 5 OFF for the RS 232C port and set the communications mode to host link mode in the PC Setup 146 This section describes initial software settings made in the PC Setup 7 1 7 2 PC Setup a eR 7 1 1 Overview of the PC Setup 7 1 2 PC Setup Settings Explanations of PC Setup Settings SECTION 7 148 148 149 156 PC Setup 147 PC Setup Section 7 1 7 1 PC Setup 7 1 1 Overview of the PC Setup The PC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software settings that the user can change to customize PC operation These settings can be changed from a Programming Console or other Programming Device Th
395. ost connections with Ethernet are also supported for even more advanced information sharing including seamless message communications across Ethernet Controller Link and DeviceNet networks Other Units Structured Programming The program is divided into tasks Symbols can be used in programming The overall performance of the system is im proved by executing only the required tasks Modification and debugging are simplified The program arrangement can be changed Step control and block programming instruc tions can be used Comments can be added to make the pro id gram easier to understand Memory Card Program Different Protocol Macros can be allocated to each port Personal computer Programming Console Remote Programming Monitoring and Seamless Links between Net works FINS commands allow communications be tween nodes in different networks Ethernet Controller Link and DeviceNet Programmable Terminal or other device Remote programming and monitoring can be performed Minimum fixed cycle time function I O refreshing method selection PC Setup functions General Use Windows tools to create multiple environments in a purpose y o single personal computer evice Full Complement of Versatile Functions Memory Card and file processing functions Simp
396. ote Section 9 4 Output bits can be programmed in any order Output bits can be used as operands in Input instructions and there is no limit on the number of times that an output bit is used as a normally open and normally closed condition 00002 00000 O An output bit can be used in only one Output instruction that controls its sta tus If an output bit is used in two or more Output instructions only the last instruction will be effective 00000 CIO 000000 is controlled 00002 by CIO 000010 Only this instruction i 00010 00000 LUE instruction is e N All outputs on Basic I O Units and Special I O Units can be turned OFF by turning ON the Output OFF Bit A50015 The status of the output bits won t be affected even though the actual outputs are turned OFF 9 4 Data Link Area Forcing Bit Status Data Link Area addresses range from CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 CIO bits 100000 to 119915 Words in the Link Area can be used for data links in Controller Link Networks A data link automatically independently of the program shares data with Link Areas in other CJ series CPU Units in the network through a Controller Link Unit mounted to the PC s CPU Rack Data links can be generated automatically using the same number of words for each node or manually When a user defines the data link manually he can assign any number of words to each node and make nodes receive only or transmit only Refer to the Control
397. otocol mode 1 Able to send 0 Unable to send Retained Written after transmis sion A39206 RS 232C Port Recep tion Com pleted Flag No proto col mode ON when the RS 232C port has completed the reception in no proto col mode When the number of bytes was specified ON when the specified number of bytes is received When the end code was specified ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are received 1 Reception completed 0 Reception not completed Retained Cleared Written after reception A39207 RS 232C Port Recep tion Over flow Flag No proto col mode ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the RS 232C port in no protocol mode When the number of bytes was specified ON when more data is received after the reception was completed but before RXD 235 was executed When the end code was specified ON when more data is received after the end code was received but before RXD 235 was exe cuted ON when 257 bytes are received before the end code 1 Overflow 0 No overflow Retained Cleared A39212 Peripheral Port Com munica tions Error Flag ON when a communications error has occurred at the peripheral port Not valid in peripheral bus mode or NT Link mode 1 Error 0 No error Retained Cleared A39300 RS 232C Port PT Communi cations Flag to A39307 The corresponding bit will be ON
398. output Relay output or transistor output J COM Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications Surge suppressor specifications Diode specifications Resistor 50 Q Breakdown voltage 3 times load voltage min Capacitor 0 47 uF Mean rectification current 1 A Voltage 200 V External Wiring Observe the following precautions for external wiring e When multi conductor signal cable is being used avoid combining I O wires and other control wires in the same cable If wiring racks are parallel allow at least 300 mm 12 inches between the racks 140 Wiring Section 5 3 Low current cables PC I O wiring PC power supply and general control circuit wiring Power lines Ground to 100 or less i If the I O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct they must be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal PC power Supply Steel sheet metal and general PC I O wiring control wiring Power lines Ground to 100 Q or less l 141 SECTION 6 DIP Switch Settings This section describes the initial hardware settings made on the CPU Unit s DIP switch G21 MOVERVIEW sete elu uci Lyc ek CAL ope D Arturo ek 144 6 2 Detarls 2 eL SRI EDO ee Pantin et pereo edes 145 143 Overview Section 6 1 6 1 Overview There are two kinds of initial settings for a CJ series PC Hardware settings and software settings Hardware settings are mad
399. owing table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us END NO OPERATION INTERLOCK INTERLOCK CLEAR JUMP JUMP END E When JMP condition is not satisfied CONDITIONAL When JMP condition is satisfied JUMP CONDITIONAL When JMP condition is satisfied JUMP NOT MULTIPLE JUMP MULTIPLE JUMP END FOR LOOP Designating a constant Designating indirect IR BREAK LOOP NEXT LOOP When loop is continued When loop is ended Timer and Counter When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length Instructions column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us TIMER TIM 3 0 42 Constant for set value 0 29 1 12 Indirect IR for set value 0 29 COUNTER CNT 3 0 42 Constant for set value 0 29 1 12 Indirect IR for set value 0 29 HIGH SPEED TIMER TIMH 015 3 0 42 Constant for set value 0 29 1 12 Indirect IR for set value 0 29 ONE MS TIMER TMHH 540 3 0 42 Constant for set value 0 29 1 12 Indirect IR for set value 0 29 252 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction Mnemonic Code Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us ACCUMULATIVE TIMER When resetting When interlocking LONG TIMER When interlocking MULTI OUTPUT TIMER When resett
400. p bits and a baud rate of 9 600 bps User defined settings Set the communications mode host link NT Link or peripheral bus and other settings such as the baud rate These settings are effective only when pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF The default settings for the RS 232C port are host link mode 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits and a baud rate of 9 600 bps Set the RS 232C port settings in the PC Setup when you need to change these settings Specify the frame format when no protocol mode is selected The RS 232C port settings can also be changed with STUP 237 The RS 232C Port Settings Changing Flag A61902 is turned ON when STUP 237 is executed and it is turned OFF when the RS 232C port settings have been changed Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Note When pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON the CPU Unit automatically detects the communications parameters of a Programming Device including Programming Consoles connected to the RS 232C port Those automatically detected parameters are not stored in the PC Setup omaon n SYSMAC RUNG CJIG CPU44 _ ERRIAEM o pon a e CONIM ot RS 232C port communications settings when DIP switch pin 5 is OFF Default settings Host link mode 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits and a baud rate of 9 600
401. pacity eee eee ee 58 2 8 I O Table Settings List sp risi serami ee ee eee 58 2 8 CJ series Basic I O Units 0 0 0 0 eee eee 58 2 8 2 CJ series Special I O Units 0 00 0 59 2 8 3 Ci series CPU Bus Units 00 0 0 0 eee eee eee 59 21 Specifications Section 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 Performance Specifications CPU Unit Specifications Specifications CJ1G CPU45 1 280 60 Ksteps CJ1G CPU44 I O bits User program memory See note Data memory Extended data memory Current consumption 30 Ksteps 32 Kwords 32 Kwords x 3 banks EO 00000 to E2 32767 0 91 A at5 V DC 32 Kwords x 1 bank EO 00000 to EO 32767 Note The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instruc tions For example LD and OUT require 1 step each but MOV 021 requires 3 steps The program capacity indicates the total number of steps for all instructions in the program Refer to 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps for the number of steps required for each instruction Common Specifications Control method Specification Stored program Reference I O control method Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible Programming Ladder diagram Instruction length 1 to 7 steps per instruction 10 4 Instruction Execu tion Times and Num ber of Steps Ladder instructions Approx 400 3 digit function codes Executi
402. pendix B Classifi cation Time Info Name Addresses Word Bit Function Contains the total time that the PC has been on in 10 hour units The data is stored in binary and it is updated every 10 hours To reset this value overwrite the current value with 0000 This word is not cleared at start up but it is cleared to 0000 when the Memory Corruption Detected Flag A39511 goes ON Settings 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Retained Write timing Related Flags Settings Communi cations RS 232C Port Restart Bit Communi cations Periph eral Port Restart Bit A52600 Turn this bit ON to restart the RS 232C port Do not use this bit when the port is operating in peripheral bus mode This bit is turned OFF auto matically when the restart processing is completed 0 to 1 Restart Retained A52601 Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port This bit is turned OFF auto matically when the restart processing is completed 0 to1 Restart Retained Cleared Debug ging Online Editing Disable Bit Valida tor Online Editing Disable Bit A52700 to A52707 The Online Editing Disable Bit A52709 is valid only when this byte contains 5A To disable online editing from a Programming Device set this byte to 5A and turn ON A52709 Online editing refers to
403. pheral Port Computer Cable Length Computer connector DOS computer q B RS 232C 9 pin DOS CS1W CN118 0 1m D Sub CS1W CN226 2 0m p Peripheral CS1W CN626 6 0m Note The CS1W CN118 Cable is used with an RS 232C cable to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit as shown below The CS1W CN118 Cable can not be used with an RS 232C cable whose model number ends in V for a peripheral bus connection and must be used for a Host Link SYSMAC WAY connection RS 232C Cable XW2Z 200S LIL 2m CS1W CN118 Cable XW2Z 5008 LI 5m Peripheral port Connecting to RS 232C Port Connecting Cables for RS 232C Port RS 232C Cable Computer Cable Length Computer connector XW2Z 200S CV DOS version or XW2Z 200S V 2m DOS XW2Z 200S CV 2 0m D Sub RS 232C 9 pin XW2Z 500S CV or XW2Z 200S V 9 pin or XW2Z 500S V 5m XW2Z 500S CV 5 0m or XW2Z 500S V Note The XW2Z 200S CV and XW2Z 500S CV use static resis tant connectors and can be connected to the peripheral bus or the Host Link The XW2Z 200S V and XW2Z 500S V RS 232C port however can only be connected to the Host Link not the peripheral bus Programming Software CX Programmer versions 2 04 or later CD ROM 37 Basic System Configuration Section 2 3 2 3 2 CJ series Expansion Racks To expand the number of Units in the system CJ series Expansion Racks can be connected to
404. pheral Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 01 to FF 0 1 to 25 5 ms in 0 1 ms increments 362 Value Hex 00 Slice Time for Program Execution Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 05 to FF 5 to 255 in 1 ms increments Address 220 Appendix D Unit Port for Priority Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode PC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number 0 to 15 10 Hex 20 to 7F CPU Special I O Unit unit number 0 to 96 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD Peripheral port Address 00 Unit Port for Priority Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number 0 to 15 10 Hex 20 to 7F CPU Special I O Unit unit number 0 to 96 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD 221 Peripheral port Unit Port for Priority Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number 0 to 15 10 Hex 20 to 7F CPU Special I O Unit unit number 0 to 96 20 Hex FC RS 232C port FD Peripheral port Address 00 Unit Port for Priority Servicing Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode 10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number 0 to 15 10 Hex 20 to 7F CPU Special I O Unit unit number 0 to
405. pleted This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter from entering the Unit during wiring procedures Always remove the label after completing wiring to enable proper cooling M3 5 self raising screw terminals AC power supply Isolation AC power supply 100 to 240 V transformer i 1 1 5 QO RUN output ON when CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode Power OFF when CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or stopped for a fatal error supply Note The RUN output function is enabled only when mounted to a CPU Rack Supply 100 to 240 V AC Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range Supply voltage Allowable voltage fluctuations 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded connect the grounded phase side to the L2 N terminal The PC s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise in power supply lines but noise between the PC and ground can be signifi cantly reduced by connecting a 1 to 1 isolation transformer Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer The power consumption will be 100 VA max per Rack but there will be a surge current of at least 5 times the max current when power is turned ON This output is ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode itis OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM
406. ported File Memory Memory Cards or EM Area Same Trace Memory Same I O allocation Automatic allocation from right to left starting at Unit closest to CPU Unit and then right to left on Expansion Racks Automatic allocation from right to left starting at Unit closest to CPU Unit and then right to left on Expansion Racks 19 Comparison to CS series PCs Section 1 4 Item Registered I Support O tables CJ series PCs Supported but operation is possible with out creating I O tables from a Program ming Device CS series PCs Supported must be created from Pro gramming Device Modes Either user set I O tables or automatic I O allocation at startup no I O table verifica tion The default setting is for Automatic I O Allocation at Startup User set I O tables can be automatically used by setting and transferring I O tables or parameter file If the I O tables are deleted from a CPU Unit from the CX Programmer Automatic I O Allocation at Startup will be used again Only user specified I O tables I O tables can be verified against actual I O Allocating unused words Possible only by using user set I O tables i e creating I O tables with unused words allocated on the CX Programmer and transferring them to the CPU Unit Always possible Set by editing I O tables on the CX Programmer and transferring them to the CPU Unit Discrepancies between
407. pressor 2 Install insulation transformer 3 Use shielded cables between the Output Unit and the loads 4 Terminal block screws are loose Tighten screws 5 Faulty terminal block connector contact Replace terminal block connector Error occurs in units of 8 points or 16 points i e for the same common Tighten screws 2 Faulty terminal block connector contact Replace terminal block connector 1 Loose common terminal screw 3 An overcurrent possibly caused by a short at the load resulted in a blown fuse in the Output Unit Replace fuse or Unit 4 Faulty data bus Replace Unit 5 Faulty CPU Replace CPU Output indicator is not lit operation is normal 292 Faulty indicator Replace Unit SECTION 12 Inspection and Maintenance This section provides inspection and maintenance information 12 1 Inspections ee eae e ede 294 12 1 1 Inspection Points eee 294 12 1 2 Handling Precautions 0 0 0 295 12 2 Replacing User serviceable Parts 0 0 eese 295 12 2 1 Battery Replacement 0 0 0 c ee ee eee ee 296 293 Inspections Section 12 1 12 1 Inspections Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PC s func tions in peak operating condition 12 1 1 Inspection Points The major electronic components in CJ series PCs are semiconduc
408. process is being exe Read only Flag cuted Online Editing Disable Bit A52700 to The Online Editing Disable Bit A52709 is valid only Read write Validator A52707 when this byte contains 5A Online Editing Disable Bit A52709 Turn this bit ON to disable online editing Read write A52700 to A52707 must be set to 5A Output OFF Bit A50015 Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I Read write O Units Output Units and Special I O Units Differentiate Monitor Com A50809 ON when the differentiate monitor condition has Read write pleted Flag been established during execution of differentiation monitoring Sampling Start Bit A50815 When a data trace is started by turning this bit from Read write OFF to ON from a Programming Device the PC will begin storing data in Trace Memory by one of the three following methods 1 Periodic sampling 10 to 2 550 ms 2 Sampling at execution of TRSM 045 3 Sampling at the end of every cycle Trace Start Bit A50814 Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger Read write condition The offset indicated by the delay value positive or negative determines which data sam ples are valid Trace Busy Flag A50813 ON when the Sampling Start Bit A50815 is turned Read write from OFF to ON OFF when the trace is completed Trace Completed Flag A50812 ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has Read write been completed during execution of a Tr
409. ps temperature resistance thermometer inputs NPN outputs heater burnout detection CJ1W TC103 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 2 control loops temperature resistance thermometer inputs PNP outputs heater burnout detection CJ1W TC104 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 41 I O Units Section 2 4 Name Specifications Model Number of Number Mountable Racks Unit No words ofwords CJ series CJ series allocated allocated cpy Rack Expansion CIO 2000 D20000 Racks to to CIO 2959 D29599 1 axis pulse output open col lector output CJ1W NC113 10 words 0 to 95 2 axes pulse outputs open collector outputs CJ1W NC213 10 words 0 to 95 4 axes pulse outputs open collector outputs CJ1W NC413 20 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers 1 axis pulse output line driver output CJ1W NC133 10 words 0 to 95 2 axes pulse outputs line driver outputs CJ1W NC233 10 words 0 to 95 4 axes pulse outputs line driver outputs CJ1W NC433 2 4 3 CJ series CPU Bus Units 20 words Controller Link Units Specifications Wired CJ1W CLK21 Number of words allocated CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 25 words 0 to 94 uses words for 2 unit numbers Mountable Racks Unit No CJ series CPU Rack CJ series Expansion Racks OtoF 4 Units
410. r address was set when the AUTOEXEC IOM file was created Also if the DM Area is exceeded which is possible when the CX Programmer is used the remaining data will be written to the EM Area Always turn ON power to the PC before turning ON power to the control system If the PC power supply is turned ON after the control power sup ply temporary errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PC Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal cir cuit failures which can occur in relays transistors and other elements Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes Interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures in external cir cuits i e not in the Programmable Controller must be provided by the customer Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PC when data is being trans ferred In particular do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or writing a Memory Card Also do not remove the Memory Card when the BUSY indicator is lit To remove a Memory Card first press the memory card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out before
411. r direction Symbols file SYMBOLS SYM Between CX Programmer Comment file COMMENTS CNT and EM file memory 1 2 3 1 Format the EM Area in the CPU Units as file memory 2 Place the CX Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PC or from the PC to the personal computer 3 2 4 Memory Card Dimensions 42 8 Y 36 4 A a 3 2 5 Installing and Removing the Memory Card Installing the Memory Card 1 2 3 1 Pull the top end of the Memory Card cover forward and remove from the Unit 71 File Memory Section 3 2 2 Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the right Insert with the A on the Memory Card label and the lt on the CPU Unit facing each other i Product label Wr a 3 Pushthe Memory Card securely into the compartment If the Memory Card is inserted correctly the Memory Card eject button will be pushed out HQ ba Cha Removing the Memory Card 1 2 3 1 Press the Memory Card power supply switch SSS LOL SSS OPEN Memory Card power supply switch MCPWR BUSY Q o 72 File Memory Section 3 2 2 Press the Memory Card eject button after the BUSY indicator is no longer lit BUSY indicator Memory Card eject button
412. r in an instruc tion and use the auto increment variation MOVR 560 0002 IRO Stores the PC memory address of CIO 0002 in IRO MOV 021 0001 RO Writes 0001 to the PC memory ad dress contained in IRO 225 Section 9 16 Index Registers Direct Addressing 226 MOV 021 0020 1 IRO Reads the content of IRO adds 1 and writes 0020 to that PC memory address MOV 0001 IRO Regular PC memory address gaa aroa MOVE TO REGISTER instruction l O memory MOVR 560 0002 IRO 0000 0COO0Hex 0001 OCOO1Hex pointer IRO J 0002 0001 0C002Hex J 0C002Hex 0003 0020 OC003Hex i fo ee oS ea at i 6655 IOD7FFHex H000 0D800Hex H511 OD9FFHex wooo ODEOOHex W511 ODFFFHex Note The PC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above but it isn t neces 1 2 3 sary to know the PC memory addresses when using Index Registers Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit data the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the operand in which it is used 1 Word Operand MOVR 560 0000 IR2 MOV 021 D00000 IR2 When the operand is treated as a word the contents of the Index Register are used as is as the PC memory address of a word In this example MOVR 560 sets the PC memory address of CIO 0002 in IR2 and the MOV 021 instruction copies the contents of D00000 to CIO 0002 2 Bit Operand MOVR 560 000013
413. r less when installing the Units Not connecting to a ground of 100 or less may result in electric shock A ground of 100 or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG terminals on the Power Supply Unit Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units I O Units CPU Units or any other Units xvi Application Precautions 5 Assembling the Units Setting DIP switches or rotary switches Connecting cables or wiring the system Connecting or disconnecting the connectors Z Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units Always heed these precautions A CJ series CPU Unit is shipped with the battery installed and the time already set on the internal clock It is not necessary to clear memory or set the clock before application as it is for the CS series CPU Units When creating an AUTOEXEC IOM file from a Programming Device a Programming Console or the CX Programmer to automatically transfer data at startup set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area When the data file is read from the Memory Card at startup data will be written in the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if anothe
414. r when more than 10 I O Units is connected in a Rack Read only Too Many I O Points Details A40700 to A40712 The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I O Points Error are listed below The 3 digit binary value in A40713 to A40715 indicates the cause of the error The causes corresponding to values 0 to 5 are listed below The 13 bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indi cates the details the excessive value or the dupli cated unit number The number of I O points will be written here when the total number of I O points set in the I O Table excluding Slave Racks exceed the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit The number of Racks will be written here when the number of Expansion Racks exceeds the maximum Read only Too Many I O Points Cause A40713 to A40715 This binary value indicates the cause of the Too Many I O Points Error See A40700 to A40712 000 0 Too many I O points 101 5 Too many Expansion Racks connected 111 7 Too many Units in one Rack Read only I O Information I O Bus Error Flag Fatal error A40114 ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot or when the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack Read only I O Bus Error Slot Number A40400 to A40407 Contains the 8 bit binary slot number 00 to 09 where an I O Bus Error occurred When the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack
415. racing and online editing Force Set and Force Reset When necessary the force set and force reset operations can be used to force the status of bits and check program execution When a Programming Console is being used monitor the bits with Bit Word Monitor or 3 word Monitor Press the SHIFT SET Keys to force set a bit or press the SHIFT RESET Keys to force reset a bit The forced status can be cleared by pressing the NOT Key Force set Bit Word Monitor display Force reset 3 word Monitor display Clear When CX Programmer is being used click the bit to be force set or force reset and then select Force On or Off from the PLC menu Differentiation Monitor The differentiation monitor operation can be used to monitor the up or down differentiation of particular bits When a Programming Console is being used monitor the bit with Bit Word Monitor Press the SHIFT Up Arrow Keys to specify up differentiation or press the SHIFT Down Arrow Keys to specify down differentiation r Detect up differentiation Detect down differentiation When CX Programmer is being used follow the procedure shown below Bit Word Monitor display 1 Click the bit for differential monitoring 2 Click Differential Monitor from the PLC Menu The Differential Monitor Di alog Box will be displayed 3 Click Rising or Falling 4 Click the Start button The buzzer will sound wh
416. ram and PC Setup Compatibility with CS series CPU Units No Backplanes for Greater Space Efficiency Up to 3 Expansion Racks and 40 Units The CJ Series provides high speed high capacity and more functions in micro size PCs At 90 x 65 mm height x depth the CJ series Units have on 7096 the height and half the depth of CS series Units contributing to machine downsizing The CJ series PCs can be mounted to DIN Track along with power supplies and other components when there is limited installation space in a machine e g limited space between top and bottom ducts The cycle time has been greatly reduced as a result of faster instruction exe cution basic instructions 0 08 us min special instructions 0 12 us and floating point instructions 10 2 us min and faster processing for overhead I O refreshes and peripheral servicing With up to 60 Ksteps of program capacity 128 Kwords of DM Memory and 1 280 I O points there is sufficient capacity for added value programs includ ing machine interfaces communications data processing etc There is almost 10096 compatibility with CS series CPU Units for program ming and internal settings PC Setup Note The CJ series CPU Units do not support Interrupt Input Units I O in terrupt tasks and Inner Boards I O interrupt related instructions are thus not supported A flexible system configuration that requires less space is made possible because Backplanes are not required
417. ramming Instructions Instruction BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Mnemonic ON execution time us Length steps See note OFF execution time us Conditions BPRG BLOCK PROGRAM END BEND BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE BPPS BLOCK PROGRAM RESTART BPRS CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT Execution condition EXIT EXIT condition satisfied EXIT condition not satisfied CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT 264 EXIT bit address EXIT condition satisfied EXIT condition not satisfied Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Instruction CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT NOT Mnemonic EXIT NOT bit address Code Length ON Conditions steps execution See note time us EXIT condition satisfied EXIT condition not satisfied OFF execution time us Branching IF execution condition IF true IF false Branching IF relay number IF true IF false Branching NOT IF NOT relay num ber IF true IF false Branching ELSE IF true IF false Branching IEND IF true IF false ONE CYCLE AND WAIT WAIT exe cution condi tion WAIT condition satisfied WAIT condition not satisfied ONE CYCLE AND WAIT WAIT relay number
418. ration can then be expanded by connecting devices with RS 232C or RS 422 485 ports such as Temperature Sensor Units Bar Code Readers ID Systems personal computers Board Computers Racks and other companies PCs Serial Communications Units 16 max CPU Unit A zs Communications port 1 Peripheral port RS 232C port Communications port 2 Expanding the system configuration as shown above allows a greater number of serial communications ports and greater flexible and simpler support for different protocols 43 Expanded System Configuration Section 2 5 System Configuration Example Host computer Programming Con DELL OR 2 5 2 Systems Protocols Protocol Host Link SYSMAC WAY sole CX Programmer kei to Communications settings automatically detected CPU Unit PT Serial Communications Unit Peripheral port RS 232C port RS 232C port Protocol macro General purpose external devices such as Temperature Sensor Units Bar Code Readers Refer to page 48 for a table showing which communications protocols are supported by each Unit The serial communications port mode protocol can be switched in the CPU Units PC Setup Depending on t
419. rd will be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log Area A100 Error Log Pointer Reset A50014 Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer A300 Read write Bit to 00 Error code A400 When a non fatal error user defined FALS 006 or Read only System error or a fatal error user defined FALS 007 or system error occurs the 4 digit hexa decimal error code is written to this word FAL FALS FAL Error Flag A40215 ON when a non fatal error is generated by executing Read only Error Non fatal error FAL 006 Information Executed FAL Number A360 to The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number Read only Flags A391 will be turned ON when FAL 006 is executed Bits A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511 FALS Error Flag A40106 ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS 007 Read only Fatal error instruction 213 Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function Name Address Description Access Memory Memory Error Flag A40115 ON when an error occurred in memory or there was Read only Error Fatal error an error in automatic transfer from the Memory Card Information when the power was turned on Memory Error Location A40300 to When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag Read only A40308 A40115 is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A40300
420. reading the value in IRO using the Programming Devices B is read Same for remaining cycles 9 17 Data Registers Examples 230 The sixteen Data Registers DRO to DR15 are used to offset the PC memory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly The value in a Data Register can be added to the PC memory address in an Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I O memory Data Registers contain signed binary data so the content of an Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address Normal instructions can be use to store data in Data Registers Bits in Data Registers cannot be force set and force reset 1 0 Memory et to a base value ith MOVR 560 or OVRW 561 et with a regular nstruction The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PC memory addresses in Index Registers LD DRO IRO Adds the contents of DRO to the contents of IRO and loads the bit at that PC mem ory address Task Flags Range of Values Data Register Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation Precautions 9 18 Task Flags Note Task Flag Initialization 1 2 3 Forcing Bit Status Section 9 18 MOV 021 0001 DRO IR1 Adds the contents of DRO to the contents of IR1 and writes 0001 to that PC mem ory address The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus have a range of 32 768 to 32 767
421. red during automatic transfer from the Memory Card at startup Make sure that the Memory Card is installed properly and that the correct file is on the Card I O Bus error 278 1 0 BUS ERR 80C0 to 80CE or 80CF A40114 1 0 Bus Error Flag A404 I O Bus Error Slot and Rack Num bers Error has occurred in the bus line between the CPU and l O Units or the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack A40400 to A40407 contain the error slot number 00 to 09 in binary OF Hex indi cates that the slot cannot be determined OE Hex indi cates the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack A40408 to A40415 contain the error rack number 00 to 03 in binary OF Hex indi cates that the rack cannot be determined OE Hex indi cates the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack Try turning the power OFF and ON again If the error isn t corrected turn the power OFF and check cable connections between the I O Units and Racks and the End Covers Check for damage to the cable or Units Turn ON the power after correcting the cause of the error Error Processing Section 11 2 Error Program Error Flag and Probable cause Possible remedy ming code in word data Console A400 display Unit Rack UNIT No 80E9 A401 13 The same number has been Check the unit numbers eliminate the Number DPL ERR Dupl
422. referably in a branch from the same execution condition Instruction A Instruction Operand LD Instruction A The result from instruction A is AND reflected in the Equals Flag Instruction B Instruction B 9 20 Clock Pulses Since the Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions program oper ation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing the program The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks so the sta tus of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task For example the status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2 The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by the system Symbol Operation 0 02 s Clock Pulse 0 02s P002s Y k 0 01s ON for 0 01 s JU OFF for 0 01 s 0 01s 0 1 s Clock Pulse 0 1s P 0 1s l 0 05 ON for 0 05 s JE OFF for 0 05 s 7 0 05s 0 2 s Clock Pulse 0 2s P 02s ON for 0 1 s oo 0 1 TLL OFF for 0 1 s 0 1s 1 s Clock Pulse 1s P 1s 0 5 ON for 0 5s OFF for 0 5 s 1 min Clock Pulse 1min P 1min l 30s ON for 30 s m OFF for 30 s 30 S 233 Parameter Areas Note Using the Clock Pulses Section 9 21 The Clock Pulses are specified with labels or symbols rather than addresses The CX Programmer treats condition flags as gl
423. rk Table of PC 1 Destination network Relay network Relay node 3 1 N 2 Relay Network Table of PC 2 Destination network Relay network Relay node 3 2 M 3 Local Network Table of PC 3 Local network Unit number wo 235 Parameter Areas Section 9 21 Relay Network Table This table lists the network address and node number of the first relay node to contact in order to reach the destination network The destination network is reached through these relay nodes Local Network Table This table lists the network address and unit number of the Communications Unit connected to the local PC These are settings for the CPU Bus Units which are controlled by the CPU Unit The actual settings depend on the model of CPU Bus Unit being used refer to the Unit s Operation Manual for details 9 21 4 CPU Bus Unit Setting 236 These settings are not managed directly like the I O memory s data areas but are set from a Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Con sole like the Registered I O Table Refer to the Programming Device s opera tion manual for details on changing these settings Programming Device CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit CPU Bus Unit Settings This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing 10 1 CPU Unit Operation rpe oce enetan eee ee eee 10 1 1 General Flow eico pecura teotan RR 10 1 2 I O Refreshing an
424. rn ON the power supply To check for incorrect Units The user must create and User set I O Allocations or to reserve unused words _ y download I O tables Automatic I O Allocations at Startup Purpose If there is no need to check for incorrect Units or reserve unused words the default setting can be used to automatically allocate I O at startup i e the same system as the CQM1 or CQM1H m Method I O tables will be created automatically according to the Units connected to the Rack each time the power supply is turned ON m Procedure This is the default method and there is no special procedure required Just assemble the Units turn ON the power supply and clear memory from a Pro gramming Device As long as I O tables are not downloaded to the CPU Unit this method will then be used whenever the CPU Unit is turned ON m Unit Check When this method is used no checking will be performed to confirm that the registered I O tables agree with the actual I O 178 I O Allocations Section 8 1 Units connected when power is turned ON are registered in CPU Unit 4 Power turned ON Registered I O table Note O tables created automatically when power is turned ON can be uploaded to the CX Programmer and edited User set I O Allocations Purpose I O tables can be set by the user if it is necessary to check for incorrect Units or to reserve unused words i e the same system as the CS series
425. rogrammer User Manual W361 E2 Using a Programming Console Temporarily force setting force resetting bits from the Bit Word Monitor or the 3 word Monitor operation see Pro gramming Consoles Operation Manual The following table lists the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits The table is organized according to the functions of the flags and bits For Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 more details or to look up a bit by its address refer to Appendix B Auxiliary Area Function Address Description Initial I O Response Times in A22000 to Contains the current I O response times for Basic I O Read only Settings Basic I O Units A25915 Units IOM Hold Bit A50012 Determines whether the contents of I O memory are Read write retained when the PC s power is reset or the PC s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN MONITOR or vice versa Forced Status Hold BIt A50013 Determines whether the status of force set and Read write force reset bits is maintained when the PC s power is reset or the PC s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN MONITOR or vice versa Status of DIP Switch Pin 6 A39512 Contains the status set on pin 6 of the CPU Unit s Read only DIP switch Refreshed every cycle Basic I O Unit Status Area A05000 to Indicate the status of the load short circuit protection Read only A08915 function alarm output for Basic I O Units The flags correspond to rack 0 slot 0 through rack 3 slot 9
426. ror PNT O Points binary value 000 to 101 in Flag A40713 to A40715 indicates A407 Too the cause of the error The Many I O Value of these 3 bits is also Points output to A40700 to A40712 Details 1 The total number of I O points set in the I O Table exceeds the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit 2 The number of Expan sion Racks exceeds the maximum bits 101 3 More than 10 I O Units are connected to one Rack bits 111 279 Error Processing Section 11 2 Error Program Error Flag and Probable cause Possible remedy ming code in word data Console A400 display I O Table Setting error VO SET ERR A40110 1 O Setting Error Flag The Units that are connected do not agree with the regis tered I O table or the number of Units that are connected does not agree with the number in the registered I O table The CJ1W OC201 Contact Output Unit must be set as a 16 point Output Unit in the 1 O tables made on the CX Programmer because this Unit is allocated 1 word even though it has only 8 outputs An I O setting error will occur if this Unit is set as an 8 point Unit Any discrepancies in the I O table will be detected when the I O verification opera tion is performed If this error occurs even when the number Units is correct there may be a faulty Unit Automatically create the I O tables and check for Units that are not being detected If the number of Units is not correct t
427. rresponding timer times out the set time elapses Timer PVs The PVs are read and written as words 16 bits The PVs count up or down as the timer operates There are two counter data areas the Counter Completion Flags and the Counter Present Values PVs Up to 4 096 counters with counter numbers C0000 to C4095 can be used The same number is used to access a counter s Completion Flag and PV Counter Completion Flags These flags are read as bits A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system when the corresponding counter counts out the set value is reached Counter PVs The PVs are read and written as words 16 bits The PVs count up or down as the counter operates These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always ON and Always OFF Flags The Condition Flags are specified with labels symbols rather than addresses The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit s internal timer These bits are specified with labels symbols rather than addresses Task Flags range from TKOO to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31 A Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable RUN status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn t been executed INI or is in standby WAIT status These registers IRO to IR15 are used to store PC memory addresses abso lute memory addresses in RAM to indirec
428. rrupt tasks Programming Manual W394 4 3 2 Inter rupt Task Priority Data Pro cessing Operating a FIFO or LIFO stack Use the stack instructions FIFO 633 and LIFO 634 Performing basic opera tions on tables made up of 1 word records Use range instructions such as MAX 182 MIN 183 and SRCH 181 Performing complex opera tions on tables made up of 1 word records Use Index Registers as pointers in special instructions Instructions Reference Manual W340 Table Pro cessing Instructions Performing operations on tables made up of records longer than 1 word For example the tempera ture pressure and other manufacturing settings for different models of a prod uct could be stored in sepa rate records Use Index Registers and the record table instructions Programming Manual W394 6 2 Index Registers System Configura tion and Serial Com munications 14 Monitoring several differ ent kinds of devices through the RS 232C port Multiple serial ports can be installed with Serial Communications Units protocol macros Operation Manual 2 5 Expanded System Configura tion Changing protocol during operation from a modem connection to host link for example Use STUP 237 the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP instruction Instructions Reference Manual W340 Serial Com munica tions Instructions Function Tables
429. s Checking Initial Operation a Set the operating mode to PROGRAM mode and connect the Pro gramming Console b Turn the power ON after checking the power supply wiring and volt age Check the Power Supply Units POWER indicator and Program ming Console s display Note If power is turned ON with a new CPU Unit without connecting a Pro gramming Console the CPU Unit will attempt to enter RUN mode the default setting but an error will occur because there is no pro gram Registering the I O Tables If Required Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots With the PC in PROGRAM mode register the I O tables from the Programming De vice CX Programmer or Programming Console Another method is to create the I O tables in CX Programmer and transfer them to the CPU Unit See 8 1 I O Allocations for details PC Setup Settings With the PC in PROGRAM mode change the settings in the PC Setup as necessary from the Programming Device CX Programmer or Program ming Console Another method is to change the PC Setup in CX Pro grammer and transfer it to the CPU Unit DM Area Settings a Use a Programming Device CX Programmer or Programming Con sole to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that are allocated to Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units b Reset the power ON OFF ON or toggle the Restart Bit for each Unit See the Unit s operation manual for details Writing the
430. s of CPU Unit required allocated CJ1W ID111 16 point DC Input Unit CIO 0000 CJ1W ID231 32 point DC Input Unit CIO 0001 and CIO 0002 Unused CIO 0003 created in I O table on CX Programmer Unused CIO 0004 and created in I O table on CX Programmer CIO 0005 CJ1W OD231 32 point Transistor Output CIO 0006 and Unit CIO 0007 Basic I O Units in I O allocation to Basic I O Units continues from the CJ series CPU Rack to the Expansion Racks CJ series Expansion Rack connected to the CJ series CPU Rack Words are 172 I O Allocations Section 8 1 allocated from left to right and each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires just like Units in the CJ series CPU Rack From the left2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g CPU Rack e Oo CIO o j j S v n n c 0000 d d a d i sic T3 4 4 4 7 A 4 c 3 T i i From the left 1 2 3 4 5 Expansion Rack Words are allocated in order beginning with the Expansion Rack nearest the CPU Rack yun Ajddng semodg i4 From the left t 2 3 Expansion Rack yun Ajddns 160g ince 173 I O Allocations Section 8 1 Example The following example shows the I O allocation to Basic I O Units in the CPU Rack and two CJ series Expansion Racks From the left2 1 2 3 4 5 CPU Rack HUN ndo U o o E 62 c ke 9 ES c From the left 1 2 3 Expansion Ra
431. s CJ1W OC201 140 g min CJ1W OC211 170 g min CJ1W ODe211 110 g min CJ1W OD231 70 g min CJ1W OD261 110 g min CJ1W OD212 120 g min CJ1W OD232 80 g min Note The CPU Unit and I O Interface Unit weights include the weight of the End Cover 5 2 5 Connecting PC Components The Units that make up a CJ series PC can be connected simply by pressing the Units together and locking the sliders by moving them toward the back of the Units The End Cover is connected in the same way to the Unit on the far right side of the PC Follow the procedure listed below to connect PC compo nents 1 2 3 1 The following diagram shows the connection of two Units that make up a CJ series PC Join the Units so that the connectors fit exactly Hook Hook holes Connector do 2n ET AE ums 5 ee 3 2 The yellow sliders at the top and bottom of each Unit lock the Units togeth er Move the sliders toward the back of the Units as shown below until they click into place Note If the locking tabs are not secured properly the CJ series may not function properly Be sure to slide the locking tabs until they are se curely in place 120 Installation Section 5 2 Move the sliders toward th
432. s PC s program can be divided into independently executable tasks A single cyclic task can be written for program execution like earlier PCs or several cyclic tasks can be written for a more flexible and efficient pro gram The following table shows the differences when programming with CX Programmer or a Programming Console Programming Device Relationship between Tasks and Program Writing a new program Cyclic tasks Interrupt tasks Editing an existing program Cyclic tasks Interrupt tasks Programming Con sole Task program Cyclic task 0 is the main pro gram Only one can be written Cyclic task 0 Several can be written Interrupt tasks 1 to 3 100 to 131 All can be edited All can be edited CX Programmer Specify the type of task and task number for each program All can be writ ten Cyclic tasks 0 to 31 All can be writ ten Interrupt tasks 0 to 255 All can be edited All can be edited Note When writing the program with a Programming Console specify whether there are interrupt tasks during the memory clear operation 9 Transferring the Program When the program has been created in a Programming Device other than a Programming Console it must be transferred to the PC s CPU Unit 10 Testing Operation Before performing a Trial Operation in MONITOR mode check the I O wiring 101 Examples Section 4 2 10 a I O Wiring Checks
433. s after power OFF is detected SECTION 11 Troubleshooting This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation Hel Error Logs e eee ep em e e eg HL ae Rn ced 272 11 2 Error Processing noue Reb eR Re eee 273 11 2 1 Error Categories sls 273 11 2 2 Error Information 0 0 0 00 ee eee eee 273 11 2 3 Error Processing Flowchart 0 0 00 00000 e eee 274 11 2 4 Error Messages 0 0 eee eee ce eee eee 276 11 3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units eee 289 271 Error Log 11 1 Error Log Errors Generated by FAL 006 FALS 007 Error Log Structure 272 Note Section 11 1 Each time that an error occurs in a CJ PC the CPU Unit stores error informa tion in the Error Log Area The error information includes the error code stored in A400 error contents and time that the error occurred Up to 20 records can be stored in the Error Log In addition to system generated errors the PC records user defined FAL 006 and FALS 007 errors making it easier to track the operating status of the system A user defined error is generated when FAL 006 or FALS 007 is executed in the program The execution conditions of these instructions constitute the user defined error conditions FAL 006 generates a non fatal error and FALS 007 generates a fatal error that stops program execution The following table shows the error codes for FAL 006 and FALS 007
434. s cycled 9 9 Holding Area The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from HOO0 to H511 bits H00000 to H51115 These words can be used only in the pro gram Holding Area bits can be used in any order in the program and can be used as normally open or normally closed conditions as often as necessary Holding Area Initialization Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled or the PC s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL 002 and ILC 003 and the execution condition for IL 002 is OFF To keep a bit ON even when the execution condition for IL 002 is OFF turn ON the bit with the SET instruction just before IL 002 Self maintaining Bits When a self maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit the self maintaining bit won t be cleared even when the power is reset H00000 a eae H00000 Note 1 Ifa Holding Area bit is not used for the self maintaining bit the bit will be turned OFF and the self maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is reset 2 Ifa Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self maintaining bit as in the following diagram the bit will be turned OFF by execution condi tion A when the power is reset A H00000 Precautions When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP 011 instruction never use a nor mally closed c
435. s for which the first word has been set words are allocated from the specified first words to Units in the order that the Units are mounted from left to right For Racks in which the first word has not been set words are allo cated in order of rack number lowest to highest from CIO 0000 An example of setting the first word for Racks is shown below Note First word CIO 0100 First word CIO 0120 First word Not set First word CIO 0140 O cU c c 3 From the left gt 1 2 3 4 5 CPU Rack Rack 0 From the lefi gt 1 2 3 yun Ajddns semod IN 16 pt 0120 IN IN 32 pt 64 pt 0121 0123 0122 to 0126 IN 16 pt 0127 From 2 1 2 3 4 3 dig o E IN wun Ajddns 13m0 16 pt 0000 IN OUT 16 pt 16 pt 0001 0002 OUT 32 pt 0003 0004 From 2 1 2 3 4 Ey dig o zt yun Ajddng samo IN 16 pt 0140 IN OUT 16 pt 8 pt 0141 0142 OUT 32 pt 0143 0144 Expansion Rack Rack 1 Expansion Rack Rack 2 Expansion Rack Rack 3 Section 8 1 1 I O words are not allocated to the I O Control Unit or I O Interface Units Be sure to make first word settings so that allocated words do not overlap The first word setting for a rack can be any address from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900 If a word is allocated to two Racks or the first w
436. s speed auto detection and will not used the default host link communications settings such as 9 600 bps Note Pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to change the PC Setup settings Peripheral Port Settings The RS 232C port will not be used with the Programming Console or CX Programmer peripheral bus communications speed auto detection and will not use the default host link communications settings such as 9 600 bps Note Pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to change the PC Setup settings RS 232C Port Settings You want to speed up communications with a PT via an NT Link Set the peripheral port or the RS 232C port communications port baud rate to high speed NT Link You want the intervals for scheduled interrupts to be set in units of 1 ms rather than 10 ms Scheduled Interrupt Time Units You want CPU Unit operation to be stopped for instruction errors i e when the ER Flag or AER Flag is turned ON You want instruction errors to be fatal errors Instruction Error Operation You want a minimum cycle time setting Minimum Cycle Time You want to set a maximum cycle time other than 1 second 10 ms to 40 000 ms Watch Cycle Time You want to delay peripheral servicing so that it is executed over several cycles Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time You want to give priority to servicing peripherals over program execution Here
437. sed I V O refresh Input Input ON delay Interrupt to CPU Unit i Cydetime Cydetime Instruction Instruction execution execution Output ON delay Output T be Minimum I O response time The I O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I O refresh of the Input Unit The maximum I O response time is the total of the Input ON delay the cycle time x 2 and the Output ON delay Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 E 1 0 refresh Input Ln Input ON delay Interrupt to CPU Unit Cycle time Cycle time Instruction Instruction Instruction execution execution execution Output ON dela I p y Maximum I O response time e Calculation Example Conditions Input ON delay 1 5 ms Output ON delay 0 2 ms Cycle time 20 0 ms Minimum I O response time 1 5 ms 20 ms 0 2 ms 21 7 ms Maximum I O response time 1 5 ms 20 ms x2 0 2 ms 41 7 ms 10 3 6 Interrupt Response Times Scheduled Interrupt Tasks Power OFF Interrupt Tasks Note The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS 690 instruction has elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed The length of the interrupt re
438. sed set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default peripheral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified in the PC Setup Host Link System The Host Link System allows the I O memory of the PC to be read written SYSMAC WAY Mode 1 N and the operating mode to be changed from a Host computer personal com puter or Programmable Terminal by executing Host Link commands or FINS commands that are preceded by a header and followed by a terminator Alter natively FINS commands preceded by a header and followed by a termina tor can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by executing Network Communications Instructions SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 from the PC Host computer FINS commands sent via SEND RECV CMND instructions from the PC Applicable port Serial CPU Unit Communi cations RS 232C Unit Peripheral pot RS 232C port I Yes Yes Yes Host Link commands See note 1 See note 2 or FINS commands Note 1 Setpin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to ON and set the serial communications mode in the PC Setup to Host Link 2 Setpin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF and set the serial communications mode in the PC Setup to Host Link No protocol Custom No protocol communications allow simple data transmissions such as input Communicat
439. setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit the contents of the Link Area won t be cleared when the PC s power supply is cycled If the IOM Hold Bit 450012 is ON the contents of the Link Area won t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa 9 5 CPU Bus Unit Area 202 The CPU Bus Unit Area contains 400 words with addresses ranging from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit Each Unit is allocated 25 words based on the Unit s unit number setting Data is exchanged with CPU Bus Units once each cycle during I O refreshing which occurs after program execution Words in this data area cannot be refreshed with immediate refreshing or IORF 097 CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit CPU Bus Unit Area 25 words Unit Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number as shown in the following table Unit number Allocated words CIO 1500 to CIO 1524 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724 co O O BR W P o Section 9 6 Special I O Unit Area Forcing Bit Status CPU Bus Unit Area Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation Unit number Allocated words CIO 1725 t
440. sponse time for scheduled interrupt tasks depends on the following conditions The software interrupt response time is 1 ms max Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed while an instruction is being exe cuted or by stopping the execution of an instruction during execution of the user program I O refresh peripheral servicing or overseeing The interrupt response time is not affected by the scheduled time elapsing during any of the above processing operations Some scheduled interrupts however are not executed during other interrupt tasks even if the scheduled interrupt conditions are satisfied Instead the scheduled interrupt is executed after the other interrupt task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time 1 ms max has elapsed The interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is the software inter rupt response time 1 ms max Scheduled interrupt time Internal timer Software interrupt response time i D cheduled interrupt task Power OFF interrupt tasks are executed within 0 1 ms of the power being con firmed as OFF 249 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 10 4 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are avail able for CJ PCs The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is
441. sses range from E0_00000 to E2_32767 This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word Data in the EM Area is retained when the PC s power is cycled or the PC s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode or vice versa Although bits in the EM Area cannot be accessed directly the status of these bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions TST 350 and TSTN 351 Bits in the EM Area cannot be force set or force reset There are two ways to specify an EM address the bank and address can be specified at the same time or an address in the current bank can be specified after changing the current bank if necessary In general we recommend specifying the bank and address simultaneously 1 Bank and Address Specification With this method the bank number is specified just before the EM address For example E2 00010 specifies EM address 00010 in bank 2 2 Current Bank Address Specification With this method just the EM address is specified For example E00010 specifies EM address 00010 in the current bank The current bank must be changed with EMBC 281 to access data in another bank A301 con tains the current EM bank number The current bank will be reset to 0 when the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN MONITOR mode unless the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is ON The current bank is not changed as the program proceeds through cyclic tasks and t
442. ssing Section 11 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation Section 12 provides information on hardware maintenance and inspections The Appendices provide Unit specifications current power consumptions Auxiliary Area words and bits internal I O addresses and PC Setup settings and information on RS 232C ports NWARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per xii sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CJ series Programmable Controllers PCs and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable Controllers You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system 1 Intended Audience soa me RR ERR RR Aka eke RR xiv 2 General Precautions csiis fe 6 pices ok xev eem eA xiv 3 Safety Precautions vog Re Ls RE epe AT E xiv 4 Operating Environment Precautions lsleeeeeeeeee en xvi 5 Application Precautions llleeeeeee eee xvi 6 Conformance to EC Directives xix 6 1 Applicable Directives eee xix 6 2 CO
443. steps See note ON execution time us Conditions Initial execution Sampling Not sampling OFF execution time us LIMIT CONTROL DEAD BAND CONTROL DEAD ZONE CONTROL SCALING SCALING 2 SCALING 3 AVERAGE Average of an operation Average of 64 operations 261 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10 4 Subroutine Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time Ls SUBROUTINE CALL SUBROUTINE ENTRY SUBROUTINE RETURN MACRO Interrupt Control When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length Instructions column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us SET INTERRUPT MASK READ INTERRUPT MASK CLEAR INTERRUPT DISABLE INTERRUPTS ENABLE INTERRUPTS Step Instructions When a double length operand is used add 1 to the value shown in the length column in the following table Instruction Mnemonic Length ON Conditions OFF steps execution execution See note time us time us STEP DEFINE Step control bit ON Step control bit OFF STEP START ET
444. ster values from each task to another area e g DM area at the end of each task and to read Index Register values from the storage words e g DM area at the beginning of each task The values stored for each task in other areas e g DM area can then be edited using the Programming Devices Host Link com mands or FINS commands 228 Index Registers Section 9 16 Peripheral servicing eee Note Be sure to use PC memory addresses in Index Registers Note D01001 and D01000 stored in IRO or Actual memory address of CIO 0000 0000C000 Hex stored in IRO Contents of IRO stored in D01001 and D01000 D02001 and D02000 stored in IRO or Actual memory address CIO 0005 0000C005 Hex stored in IRO Contents of IRO stored in D02001 and D02000 IR storage words for task 1 D01000 D01001 or 0000C000Hex Al t IRO C t D01000 ae 001 IRO C IR storage words for task 2 D02000 i D02001 IRO or m 0000C005Hex IRO 7 i D02000 D02001 IRO E Read D02001 and D02000 Read D01001 and D01000 To share Index Register values between two or more tasks set the storage words for the Index Register values for each task to the same words For example in the example given above you would use D01001 and D01000 for both Task 1 and Task 2 When switching tasks ending one task and starting the next data is exchanged internally storing and restoring IR values between the
445. stics 10 m regulations may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used other devices connected to the control panel wiring and other con ditions You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives 6 4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods Countermeasures The CJ series PCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards EN50081 2 of the EMC Directives However noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards In such a case a noise filter must be con nected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures must be pro vided external to the PC Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the devices on the load side wiring configuration of machines etc Following are examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise Refer to EN50081 2 for more details Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is more than 5 times per minute Countermeasure Examples XX When switching an inductive load connect an surge protector diodes etc in parallel with the load or contact as shown below Conformance to EC Directives Circuit CR method Oo Current Inductive
446. structions allow text processing to be performed easily from the ladder program These instructions simplify the processing required when creating messages for transmission or processing messages received from external devices with the protocol macro function Processing of text string data External device with standard serial port The FOR 512 NEXT 513 and BREAK 514 instructions provide a very powerful programming tool that takes up little program capacity Sixteen Index Registers are provided for use as pointers in instructions An Index Register can be used to indirectly address any word in I O memory The CJ series PCs also support the auto increment auto decrement and offset functions The Index Registers can be a powerful tool for repetitive processing loops when combined with the auto increment auto decrement and offset func tions Index Registers can also be useful for table processing operations such as changing the order of characters in text strings Table Data Processing Instructions Stack Instructions A region of I O memory can be defined as a stack region Words in the stack are specified by a stack pointer for easy FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in first out data processing Stack region FIFO Range Instructions These instructions operate on a specified range of words to find the maximum value or minimum value search for a particular value calculate the sum or FCS or swap the contents
447. sumption 80 mA max Weight 110 g max INOO c m to i EP l i 3 IN150 a av 5 i 1000 pF Hern era E s i SI COMO 4 si COM Input indicator T x Temperature characteristics for simultaneously ON points 16 points at 45 C 12 points at 55 C o n 2 o o 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 CC Ambient temperature No of simultaneously ON points Specifications of Basic I O Units Terminal Connections Q o o S Appendix A E aT LEE zle 3 8 i T A g g g aTeleleiele ame a III l 24 V DC Polarity of the input power supply can connected in either direction Note The ON response time will be 20 us maximum and OFF response time will be 400 us maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays CJ1W ID231 DC Input Unit Fujitsu Connector 32 Points Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC 10 iv Input Impedance 5 6 kQ Input Current 4 1 mA typical at 24 V DC ON Voltage ON Current 19 0 V DC min 3 mA min OFF Voltage OFF Current 5 V DC max 1 mA max ON Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup OFF Response Time 8 0 ms max Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PC Setup No of Circuits 32 16 points common 2 cir
448. t the baud rate of the communications devices can be automatically recognized for connection Host Link This is a communications protocol with a general purpose host computer Either 1 1 or 1 N connections are possible Host Link communications are slow compared with the Peripheral Bus communications The following connections are possible Via a modem or optical fiber adapter over long distance using a RS 422A 485 and 1 N 3 The CX Programmer can be used for remote programming and monitor ing It can be used to program and monitor not only the PC to which it is directly connected but also to program and monitor any PC connected through a Controller Link or Ethernet network to which the PC that the CX Programmer is connected to is a part of All programming and monitoring functionality for the directly connected PC is supported for remote pro gramming and monitoring the PC can be connected though either the pe ripheral or an RS 232C port and either the peripheral bus or Host Link bus can be used Remote programming is possible for up to three levels of net works counting the local network but not counting the peripheral bus or Host Link connection between the CX Programmer and the local PC 79 Programming Devices Section 3 3 Peripheral port or RS 232C port Peripheral bus or Host Link TET Remote programming andimenitenng Controller Link or Ethernet Network CX Programmer Per
449. t in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Con tact Output Unit prevent noise and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits Arc killers can how ever reduce relay life if not use correctly Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay mounted to the Contact Output Unit 316 Specifications of Basic I O Units Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table Circuit Current AC DC Yes Yes CR method oe oT 7 L o E Q f l Power o PR supply Characteristic If the load is a relay or solenoid there is a time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V insert the arc killer in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the arc killer between the con tacts Appendix A Required element The capacitance of the capacitor must be 1 to 0 5 uF per contact current of 1 A and resistance of the resistor must be 0 5 to 1 Q per contact voltage of 1 V These values however vary with the load and the characteristics of the relay Decide these values from experi ments and take into consideration that the capacitance suppresses spark dis charge when the contacts are sepa rated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load when the circuit is closed again
450. t itself Read only Special I O Unit Error Unit Number Flags A41800 to A42315 When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a Special I O Unit the Special I O Unit Error Flag 440206 and the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95 Read only Other PC operating information 216 Battery Error Flag Non fatal error A40204 ON if the CPU Unit s battery is disconnected or its voltage is low and the PC Setup has been set to detect this error Detect Low Battery Read only Cycle Time Too Long Flag Fatal error A40108 ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set in the PC Setup Watch Cycle Time Read only FPD Teaching Bit A59800 Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time in FPD 269 automatically with the teaching function Read write Memory Corruption Detected Flag A39511 ON when memory corruption is detected when the power supply is turned on Read only Auxiliary Area Section 9 10 Function Clock Information Name Clock data Address A35100 to A35107 Description Second 00 to 59 BCD Access Read only A35108 to A35115 Minute 00 to 59 BCD Read only A35200 to A35207 Hour 00 to 23 BCD Read only A35208 to A35215 Day of the month 01 to 31 BCD Read only A35300 to A35307 Month 01 to
451. tained we we T PC turned ON Output OFF Bit A50015 Turning ON the Output OFF Bit causes all outputs on Basic I O Units and Special I O Units to be turned OFF The outputs will be turned OFF regardless of the PC s operating mode h h gigeeele q g d 4 q Output Unit d Output Unit o m m o m c E Use the Programming Console or Programming Device CX Programmer to switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode Using a Programming Console Turn the Mode Switch to MONITOR for the Trial Operation Turn the switch to RUN for full scale PC operation Trial Operation MONITOR RUN PROGRAM N Programming Console Actual operation MONITOR RUN PROGRAM ES 7 103 Examples Section 4 2 Using a Programming Console The PC can be put into MONITOR mode with a host computer running CX Programmer Trial Operation Select PC Mode MONITOR WX sa epus 277778 Actual operation CX Prpgrammer Select PC Mode RUN 10 d Monitoring and Debugging 104 1 2 3 There are several ways to monitor and debug PC operation including the force set and force reset operations differentiation monitoring time chart monitoring data t
452. tained Retained Retained Counter PVs C Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Task Flags TK Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared 195 I O Area Area Index Registers IR Section 9 3 Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared IOM Hold Bit Cleared IOM Hold Bit Held IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold Bit OFF Bit ON Bit OFF Bit ON Bit OFF Bit ON Retained Data Registers DR Note 9 3 IO Area Note Forcing Bit Status I O Area Initialization 1 2 3 IOM Hold Bit Operation Note 196 Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained 1 Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN MONITOR or vice versa 2 The PC Setup s IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting determines wheth er the IOM Hold Bit s status is held or cleared when the PC is turned on l O Area addresses range from CIO 0000 to CIO 0079 CIO bits 000000 to 007915 but the area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the first Rack word with any Programming Device other than a Programming Console The maximum number of bits that can be allocated for external I O will still be 1 280 80 words even if the I O Area is expanded The maximum number of external I O points depends upon the CPU Unit being used Words in the I O Area are allocated to I O terminals on Basic
453. tal 0 or fatal errors 1 A program error will be generated as an instruction error if any of the following flags is turned ON Instruction error flag Address Cause Instruction Processing Error Flag A29508 The ER Flag was turned ON Indirect DM EM BCD Error Flag A29509 The contents of a DM EM word wasn t BCD when BCD was required for indi rect addressing Illegal Access Error Flag A29510 Attempted to access part of memory that is off limits from the program If this setting is OFF 0 PC operation will continue after one of these errors If this setting is ON 1 PC operation will stop after one of these errors Set the minimum cycle time to a non zero value to eliminate inconsistencies in I O responses This setting is effective only when the actual cycle time is shorter than the minimum cycle time setting If the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time setting the actual cycle time will remain unchanged The minimum cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode T Fixed cycle time If the cycle time exceeds the watch maximum cycle time setting the Cycle Time Too Long Flag A40108 will be turned ON and PC operation will be stopped This setting must be changed if the normal cycle time exceeds the default watch cycle time setting of 1 s Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Note The watch cycle time setting cannot be changed wh
454. tancy of the relays NY 24W K IE in the CJ1W OC201 211 Contact Output Units is shown in the following diagrams Use the diagrams to calculate the relay service life based on the operating conditions and replace the relay before the end of its service life Note The diagrams show the life expectancy of the relay itself Do not use a contact current therefore that exceeds the maximum switching capacity specified in the specifications for each Contact Output Unit If a switching capacity exceeding the specifications is used the reliability and life expectancy of other parts will be reduced and the Unit may malfunction 315 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Service Life with AC Load Service Life with DC Load AC resistive load 300 I DC24V t 7ms 40 V AC resistive load 100 24 V DC resistive loa Service life x104 Service life x104 N eo 0 1 02 03 0507 1 2 3 5 005 0 1 0 2 0 3 050 7 1 2 3 5 Contact current A Contact current A Inductive Load The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output Unit use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output Unit Contact Protection Circuit Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Uni
455. te There will be an additional increase of the event execution times when Host Links or 1 N NT Links are used Ethernet Unit CJ1W ETN11 If socket services are executed with soft ware switches there will be an additional increase of 0 002 ms x the number of bytes sent received See note There will be an additional increase of the event execution times when FINS communications services socket ser vices for CMND instructions or FTP ser vices are performed DeviceNet Unit 246 CJ1W DRM21 0 7 ms 0 001 ms x number of allo cated words The number of allocated words include all words allocated to slaves Any unused words between allocated words are also included If message communications are performed the number of words in the messages must also be added to the allocated words in the calculation Computing the Cycle Time Section 10 3 10 3 3 Cycle Time Calculation Example The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time when Basic I O Units only are connected in the PC Conditions Item Details CPU Rack CJ1W ID211 16 point Input Units 4 Units CJ1W OD211 16 point Output Units 4 Units CJ1W ID211 16 point Input Units 4 Units CJ1W OD211 16 point Output Units 4 Units 5K steps LD instruction 2 5 K steps OUT instruc tion 2 5 K steps Expansion Rack User program Peripheral port connection Yes and no Fixed cycle time processing N
456. ted at start up Power Power Non retained parts OFF Ly ON Non retained parts of I O memory of I O memory Retained ode switch Retained Power anl Retained IOM Hold Bit 1 IOM Hold Bit 0 Retained when ON OFF power is turned on Forced Status Hold Bit at The Forced Status Hold Bit A50013 can be turned ON to retain the forced Startup status of all bits that have been force set or force reset when the CPU Unit s operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN MONITOR mode When the PC is turned on the Forced Status Hold Bit itself will be cleared OFF unless it is protected with this PC Setup setting If the Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup setting is ON the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit will be protected when the PC is turned on If this setting is ON and the Forced Status Hold Blt itself is ON all force set and force reset bits will retain their forced status when the PC is turned on 157 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected the Forced Status Hold Bit will be cleared whether this setting is ON or OFF OFF 0 Forced Status Hold Bit cleared at start up Power Power Forced bit status OFF O ON Forced bit status Mode switch Retained Power on Not retained Forced Status Forced Status m iu Not retained when Hold Bit 1 ON Hold Bit 0 OFF power is turned ON ON 1 Forced Status Hold Bit protected at start up
457. ted circuit boards may be damaged To guard against this incorporate a fuse in the external circuit Use a fuse with a capacity of about twice the rated output Transistor Output A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of Residual Voltage the transistors residual voltage It is necessary to connect a pull up resistor and a CMOS IC between the two Output Surge Current When connecting a transistor or triac output to an output device having a high surge current such as an incandescent lamp steps must be taken to avoid damage to the transistor or triac Use either of the following methods to reduce the surge current Method 1 Add a resistor that draws about 1 3 of the current consumed by the bulb Method 2 Add a control resistor as shown in the following diagram OUT COM 139 Wiring Section 5 3 5 3 5 Reducing Electrical Noise I O Signal Wiring Whenever possible place I O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or raceways both inside and outside of the control panel 1 I O cables 2 Power cables Suspended duct In floor duct Conduits If the I O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct use shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise Inductive Loads When an inductive load is connected to an I O Unit connect a surge suppres sor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below IN Relay output or triac
458. that the connector is firmly locked in place before using it 125 Installation Section 5 2 wr 2 Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before connecting a cable 3 Do not route the I O Connecting Cables through ducts that contain the I O or power wiring 4 Anl O bus error will occur and the PC will stop if an I O Connecting Cable s connector separates from the Rack Be sure that the connectors are se cure 5 A 63 mm hole will be required if the I O Connecting Cable must pass through a hole when connecting an Expansion Rack 6 The cables can withstand a pulling force up to 49 N 11 lbs so be sure that they aren t pulled too forcefully 7 The I O Connecting Cables mustn t be bent too severely The minimum bending radii are shown in the following diagram D Eg A R 69 min Cable outer diameter 8 6 mm qu 8 Always attach the cover to the output connector left side on the last I O Interface Unit on the last Expansion Rack to protect it from dust CJ1W 11101 I O Interface Unit OVO Output connector cover 126 Wiring 5 3 Wiring Section 5 3 5 3 1 Power Supply Wiring CJ1W PA205R Power Supply Unit AC PA205R C POWER AC Power Source Isolation Transformer Power Supply Capacity RUN Output Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has been com
459. the CPU Unit Gard tothe CPU Unit Inside the battery compartment DIP Switch Refer to following table o zZ 1 765432 s 29 CPU Unit Components and Functions Indicators DIP Switch Section 2 2 The following table describes the LED indicators on the front panel of the CPU Unit Indicator Meaning RUN green Lights when the PC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode ERR ALM red Flashes if a non fatal error occurs that does not stop the CPU Unit If a non fatal error occurs the CPU Unit will continue operating Lights if a fatal error occurs that stops the CPU Unit or if a hardware error occurs If a fatal or hardware error occurs the CPU Unit will stop operating and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF INH orange Lights when the Output OFF Bit A50015 turns ON If the Output OFF Bit is turned ON the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF PRPHL orange Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the periph eral port COMM orange Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the RS 232C port The CJ series CPU Unit has an 8 pin DIP switch that is used to set basic operational parameters for the CPU Unit The DIP switch is located under the cover of the battery compartment The DIP switch pin settings are described in the following table Setting Function Writin
460. the PC Setup setting will differ from the actual file memory setting in the EM Area In this case the val ues in A344 can be checked to see the actual file memory setting The EM Area cannot be formatted if the current EM bank is one of the banks that is being converted to file memory The following example shows EM bank 2 converted to file memory EM File Memory setting 1 EM Starting Bank setting 2 EM file memory enabled gt Bank 0 Bank 1 l Bank2 Converted EM file memory These settings are effective only when pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON The default settings for the peripheral port are host link mode 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits and a baud rate of 9 600 bps Set the peripheral port settings in the PC Setup when you need to change these set tings When pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF the CPU Unit automatically detects the communications parameters of a connected 159 Explanations of PC Setup Settings Section 7 2 RS 232C Port Settings 160 Programming Device including Programming Consoles Those automati cally detected parameters are not stored in the PC Setup SYSMAC RUND CJ1G CPU44 ERR AEMO PROGRAMMABLE peni CONTROLLER f Ca Hh Y Peripheral port communications settings when DIP Switch pin 4 is ON Default settings Host link mode 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 sto
461. the peripheral port settings in the PC Setup Also check the cable connections RS 232C Port Communications Error A communications error has occurred in communications with the device con nected to the RS 232C port if the indicators have the following conditions Power Supply CPU Unit Indicators Unit Indicator Check the setting of pin 5 on the DIP switch and the RS 232C port settings in the PC Setup Also check the cable connections If a host computer is con nected check the communications settings of the serial port on the host com puter and the communications program in the host computer The allowable voltage ranges are shown in the following table Power Supply Unit Power supply Allowable voltage voltage range CJ1W PA205R 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 285 Error Processing Section 11 2 Power indicator not lit Is power being supplied No Connect power supply Yes Not lit Lit Is power indicator lit Power supply voltage in acceptable range Yes Set supply voltage within acceptable limits Lit No Not lit m Is power indicator lit Are there any loose terminal screws or broken wires Yes Tighten screws or replace wires No Not lit Lit Is power indicator lit Replace the Power End Supply Unit l O Check The I O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section assuming that SOL1 does not turn ON 2
462. tly address words in I O memory The Index Registers are used separately in each task These registers DRO to DR15 are used together with the Index Registers When a Data Register is input just before an Index Register the content of I O Memory Areas Section 9 2 the Data Register is added to the PC memory address in the Index Register to offset that address The Data Registers are used separately in each task 9 2 3 Data Area Properties Content after Fatal Errors Forced Set Reset Usage Fatal Error Generated Forced Set I O Area Execution of FALS 007 Other Fatal Error Data Link Area CPU Bus Unit Area Special I O Unit Area DeviceNet Area Internal I O Area IOM Hold Bit OFF Retained ON Retained IOM Hold Bit OFF Cleared IOM Hold Bit IOM Hold Bit ON Retained Forced Reset Functions Usable Work Area W Retained Retained Cleared Retained Holding Area H Retained Retained Retained Retained Auxiliary Area A Status varies from address to address Data Memory Area D Retained Retained Retained Retained Extended Data Memory Area E Retained Retained Retained Retained Timer Completion Flags T Retained Retained Cleared Retained Timer PVs T Retained Retained Cleared Retained Counter Completion Flags C Retained Retained Retained Retained
463. to CIO 0003 The status of input points is read from the Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units IORF 0000 0003 In the following example the status of input points allocated to CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are read from the Input Unit CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are allocated to Output Units CPU Unit Input Unit Switch 0 o 0 Switch 16 l There is no limit on the number of times that input bits can be used as nor mally open and normally closed conditions in the program and the addresses can be programmed in any order An input bit cannot be used as an operand in an Output instruction 00001 000100 i Not allowed if ClO 000100 is an input bit I O Area Input Response Time Settings Output Bits Normal I O Refreshing Immediate Refreshing Note Section 9 3 The input response times for each Input Unit can be set in the PC Setup Increasing the input response time will reduce chattering and the effects of noise and decreasing the input response time allows higher speed input pulses to be received The default value for input response times is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 5 ms to 32 ms If the time is set to 0 ms there will still be an ON delay time of 20 us max and an OFF delay time of 300 us due to delays caused by internal elements Pulses shorter than the time constant are not received nput from switch Inp
464. to Units that use 24 V DC power Power Supply Unit Maximum current at 24 V DC CUTWPAZOSR The following table shows the maximum total power that can be supplied at 5 V DC and 24 V DC Power Supply Unit Maximum total power output CJIW PA205R Refer to 2 6 Unit Current Consumption for tables showing the current con sumed by each particular Unit as well as example calculations 3 5 I O Control Units and I O Interface Units 84 An I O Control Unit and I O Interface Units are used to connect Expansion Racks to expand the system I O Control Units and I O Interface Units Section 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 Models Name Model number Number required Weight O Control Unit CJ1W IC101 1 on the CPU Rack 70 g max I O Interface Unit CJ1W 1I101 1 on each Expansion Rack 130 g max including End Cover System Configuration The I O Control Unit is connected directly to the CPU Unit If it is not immedi ately to the right of the CPU Unit correct operation may not be possible The I O Interface Unit is connected directly to the Power Supply Unit If it is not immediately to the right of the Power Supply Unit correct operation may not be possible Power P it CJ1W IC101 Supply Unit PERDE VO Control Unit 1 I CPU Rack 1 O Connecting Cable Power S CJ1W II101 Supply Unit l O Interface Unit l Expansion Rack l O Connecting Cable P ower CJ1W I
465. to communicate with external devices SYSMAC CS CJ series CJ1W ETNO1 ENT11 CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Unit Operation Manual Describes the installation and operation of CJ1W ETNO1 CJ1W ENT11 and CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units xi About this Manual Continued This manual contains the following sections Section 1 introduces the special features and functions of the CJ series PCs and describes the differ ences between these PCs and the earlier CS series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 2 provides tables of standard models Unit specifications system configurations and a com parison between different Units Section 3 provides names of Unit components and their functions Dimensions are also provided Section 4 outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CJ PC system Section 5 describes how to install a PC System including mounting and wiring Units Follow instruc tions carefully Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction resulting in very dangerous situ ations Section 6 describes DIP switch settings Section 7 describes initial hardware and software settings in the PC Setup Section 8 describes I O allocation to Basic I O Units Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units as well as and data exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 9 describes the structure and functions of the I O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas Section 10 describes the internal operation of CPU Units and the cycle used for internal proce
466. tor com ponents which although have an extremely long life time can deteriorate under improper environmental conditions Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required conditions are being kept Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year but more frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the fol lowing table are not met Inspection Criteria Action Source Power Check for voltage fluctuations The voltage must be within Use a voltage tester to check the Supply at the power supply terminals the allowable voltage fluctu power supply at the terminals Take ation range necessary steps to bring voltage See note fluctuations within limits I O Power Sup Check for voltage fluctuations Voltages must be within Use a voltage tester to check the ply at the I O terminals specifications for each Unit power supply at the terminals Take necessary steps to bring voltage fluctuations within limits Ambient environ Check the ambient tempera 0 to 55 C Use a thermometer to check the ment ture Inside the control panel temperature and ensure that the if the PC is in a control panel ambient temperature remains within the allowed range of 0 to 55 C Check the ambient humidity Relative humidity must be Use a hygrometer to check the Inside the control panel if the 10 to 90 with no
467. ts for list of specific Basic I O Units Basic I O Units on the CPU Basic I O Units on the CPU Rack are allocated words from left to right starting Rack with the Unit closest to the CPU Unit Each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires Note Units that have 1 to 16 I O points are allocated16 bits and Units that have 17 to 32 I O points are allocated 32 bits For example an 8 point Unit is allocated 16 bits 1 word and bits 00 to 07 of that word are allocated to the Unit s 8 points c 10 I O Units max gt 7 Clo CPU Rack 1 Q oo00 2 d c l 9 2g SA gt Example 1 The following example shows the I O allocation to 5 Basic I O Units in the CPU Rack From the left gt 1 2 3 4 5 IN IN IN OUT OUT 16 pt 16 pt 32 pt 32 pt 64 pt 0002 0004 0006 0000 0001 0003 0005 to 0009 wun Ajddns semodg HUN ndo CPU Rack Position to left of CPU Unit CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit Words Words required allocated CIO 0000 CJ1W ID211 16 point DC Input Unit CIO 0001 CJ1W ID231 32 point DC Input Unit CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 CJ1W OD231 32 point Transistor Output Unit CIO 0004 and CIO 0005 CJ1W OD261 64 point Transistor Output Unit 170 CIO 0006 to CIO 0009 I O Allocations Position 1 16 point DC Input Unit Bit address 00 000000
468. ts have been detected If the startup mode is RUN or MONITOR mode the CPU will remain on standby until all Units have been directed Power Supply Unit Indicator CPU Unit Indicators Status Error Program Error Error Flags Probable Possible rem Possible rem ming flags in code in cause edy edy Console Auxiliary A400 display Area A Special I O Unit or CPU Bus Unit was not detected a Unit requiring time to detect is connected or a Check the CPU Bus Units to be sure they are starting prop erly Check the Spe cial I O Units to Check the set tings and con nections of the Units and then turn the power supply OFF and ON faulty Unit is be sure the connected y are starting properly Fatal Errors A fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in RUN or MONITOR mode Power Supply Unit Indicator CPU Unit Indicators POWER Connect a Programming Console to display the error message The cause of the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary Area flags and words Errors are listed in order of importance When two or more errors occur at the same time the more serious error s error code will be recorded in A400 If the IOM Hold Bit hasn t been turned ON to protect I O memory all non retained areas of I O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than FALS 007 occurs If the IOM Hold Bit
469. tting an exclamation point just before the instruction and the instruction s operand is an input bit or word the word containing the bit or the word itself will be refreshed just before the instruction is executed This immediate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I O refreshing performed once each cycle 1 Bit Operand Just before the instruction is executed the ON OFF status of the 16 I O points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be read to the PC 2 Word Operand Just before the instruction is executed the ON OFF status of the 16 I O points allocated to the specified word will be read to the PC In the following example ClO 000101 is allocated to switch 1 an external switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit The ON OFF status of switch 1 is read and reflected in CIO 000101 just before LD 000101 is exe cuted 197 I O Area IORF 097 Refreshing Limitations on Input bits 198 Section 9 3 Ladder symbol Mnemonic o ILD 000101 Input Unit CPU Unit CIO 000101 Switch 0 Oo O Switch 1 0 oO Switch 7 ps9 instruc tion execu tion When IORF 097 I O REFRESH is executed the input bits in the specified range of words are refreshed This I O refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I O refreshing performed once each cycle The following IORF 097 instruction refreshes the status of all I O points in I O Area words CIO 0000
470. um load currents will be 2 0 A common and 4 0 A Unit if a pressure welded connector is used 313 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Circuit Configuration i i 1 0 word m i i i i i 2 5 29 io E 15 C UE COMI V j E i COMI V UeE l O word m1 i OUTOO I i ouris yoyo nat gt i 9 0v H 1 Z ERR indi r l indicato I f When the output current of any output exceeds the detection current the output for that point will turn OFF At the same time the ERR indicator will light and the corresponding flag one for each common in the Basic I O Unit Information Area A050 to A089 will turn ON 314 Specifications of Basic I O Units Appendix A Terminal Connections zvod 4 I COMIGV COM1 4V z a z O g D D e D 5 D e O44 D 3 D r D 2 D D 1 D r meee O COMO G COMOGV ov O t D 4 D 7 D o o4 FI to ell pec 0 fe D 2 D D D D 2 D l 24 V DC When wiring pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply The load may operate if the polarity is reversed Although the COM V and OV of rows A and B are internally connected wire all points completely About Contact Output Units Life Expectancy of CJ1W OC201 211 Relays The life expec
471. unications rate bps 145 0to7 00 9 600 Settings 00 and 06 through 0A 01 300 are valid when the communica 02 600 tions mode is set to peripheral 03 1 200 bus 04 2 400 When the communications mode 05 4 800 is set to NT Link the settings are Dm oer as follows 08 38 400 00 to 09 Hex Standard NT Link 09 57 600 0A Hex High speed NT Link 0A 115 200 When making the settings with the CX Programmer select Default 00 115 200 bps CPU Unit s Unit Number in 147 0to7 00to 1F This setting determines the CPU Host Link Mode 0 to 31 Unit s unit number when it is con Default 00 nected in a 1 to N N 2 to 32 Host Link Maximum Unit Number in 150 0to3 0to7 This setting determines the high NT Link Mode Default 0 est unit number of PT that can be connected to the PC in NT Link mode A61901 Periph eral Port Settings Changing Flag Takes effect the next cycle Also can be changed with STUP 237 151 PC Setup Section 7 1 Item Address in Settings Function Related New Programming flags and setting s Console words effective Word Bit s ness RS 232C Port Set tings 152 RS 232C Port Settings Selection Communica tions mode Data bits Stop bits Parity 0 Default 1 PC Setup Default 0 This setting is effective only when pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF The default settings are 1 start bit 7 data bits
472. urely Note Do not force the cables 2 Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has been completed This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter from entering the Unit during wiring Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling Before wiring After wiring Remove label after wiring 3 When solder type connectors are being used be sure not to accidentally short adjacent terminals Cover the solder joint with heat shrink tubing Solder type connector Heat shrink tubing Wire 0 2 to 0 13 mm Note Double check to make sure that the Output Unit s power supply leads haven t been reversed If the leads are reversed the Unit s internal fuse will blow and the Unit will not operate 4 Assemble the connector purchased separately as shown in the following diagram 133 Wiring Section 5 3 Connector bar g Connector m Small screws 3 Connector attaching Screws Cable securing bracket e B Nuts 2 Gale Connector I O Unit 6 Remove the protective label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling Connector lock screws After wiring Remove label after wiring Tighten the connector attaching screws to a torque of 0 2 Nem 134 Wiring Section 5 3 Connecting to Connector Terminal Block Convers
473. urn OFF the power supply and correctly con nect the proper Units If the number of Units is correct confirm the Unit in discrepancy turn OFF the power supply and then correct the Unit connections If there is a mistake in the I O tables rec reate or edit them to correct the mistake Program error 280 A40109 Program Error Flag A294 to A299 Pro gram error information The program is incorrect See the following rows of this table for details The address at which the program stopped will be out put to A298 and A299 Check A295 to determine the type of error that occurred and check A298 A299 to find the program address where the error occurred Correct the program and then clear the error A29511 No END error Be sure that there is an END 001 instruction at the end of the task speci fied in A294 program stop task number The address where the END 001 instruction would normally be expected will be provided in A298 A299 A29515 UM overflow error The last address in UM user program memory has been exceeded Use a Programming Device to transfer the program again Error Processing Section 11 2 Error Program Error Flag and Probable cause Possible remedy ming code in word data Console A400 display Program error cont A40109 Program Error Flag A294 to A299 Pro gram error information A29513 Differentiation over flow error
474. ut bit Input time constant Input time constant A bit in the I O Area is called an output bit when it is allocated to an Output Unit The ON OFF status of an output bits are output to devices such as actu ators There are three ways for the status of output bits to be refreshed to an Output Unit normal I O refreshing immediate refreshing and IORF 097 refreshing The status of output bits are output to external devices once each cycle after program execution In the following example CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator an external device connected to an output terminal of an Output Unit The ON OFF status of CIO 000201 is output to that actuator once each cycle Ladder symbol Mnemonic 000201 OUT 000201 CPU Unit CIO 000201 Bit allocation p Output Unit Actuator NL When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction and the instruction s operand is an output bit or word the content of the word containing the bit or the word itself will be output just after the instruction is executed This immedi ate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I O refreshing performed once each cycle 199 I O Area 1 2 3 IORF 097 Refreshing 200 Section 9 3 1 Bit Operand Just after the instruction is executed the ON OFF status of the 16 I O points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be output to the
475. ver unused CIO Area bits may be used when expanding functions Always use Work Area bits first 191 I O Memory Areas Work Area WR Holding Area HR 192 Section 9 2 I O Area These words are allocated to external I O terminals on Basic I O Units Words that aren t allocated to external I O terminals may be used only in the pro gram Data Link Area These words are used for data links in Controller Link Networks Words that aren t used in data links may be used only in the program CPU Bus Unit Area These words are allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer status information Each Unit is allocated 25 words and up to 16 Units with unit numbers 0 to 15 can be used Words that aren t used by CPU Bus Units may be used only in the program Special I O Unit Area These words are allocated to Special I O Units Each Unit is allocated 10 words and up to 96 Units unit numbers 0 to 95 can be used Words that aren t used by Special I O Units may be used only in the program DeviceNet Area These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet CompoBus D Remote O Communications Allocations are fixed and cannot be changed Words that aren t used by DeviceNet devices can be used only in the program Internal I O Area These words can be used only in the program they cannot be used for I O exchange with external I O terminals Be sure to use the work words provided in the Work Area WR before allocating words in
476. vice PC Setup Modify Force set Changing Changing Changing I O Program reset Timer Counter Timer Counter Memory PV Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks Cyclic task status Interrupt task status Disabled status INI Stopped Any task that has not yet been executed will be in disabled status INI Executed if inter Atask will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at star UPt condition is tup or the TASK ON TKON instruction has been executed for it met A task in READY status will be executed RUN status when it obtains the right to execute A status will go to Standby status if a READY task is put into Standby status by a TASK OFF TKOF instruction Mode Changes Non holding areas Holding Areas I O bits HR Area Data Link bits DM Area CPU Bus Unit bits EM Area Special I O Unit bits Counter PV and Completion Flags Work bits Auxiliary Area bits words are hold ing or non holding depending on the address Timer PV Completion Flags Index Registers Data Registers Task Flags Auxiliary Area bits words are hold ing or non holding depending on the address RUN or MONITOR to PROGRAM Cleared See note 1 PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR Cleared See note 1 RUN to MONITOR or Held See note 2 MONITOR to RUN Note 1 The following processing is performed depending on the status o
477. when the RS 232C port is communi cating with a PT in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 1 Communi cating 0 Not commu nicating Retained Cleared Written when there is a normal response to the token A39308 RS 232C Port PT Pri ority Regis tered Flags to A39315 The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority when the RS 232C port is communicating in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 These flags are written when the pri ority registration command is received 1 Priority reg istered 0 Priority not registered Retained Cleared See Func tion col umn A39300 RS 232C to Port Recep A39315 tion Counter No proto col mode 330 Indicates in binary the number of bytes of data received when the RS 232C port is in no protocol mode Retained Written when data is received Auxiliary Area Appendix B Address Words Bits A39400 t O A39407 Name Peripheral Port PT Communi cations Flag Function The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is communi cating with a PT in NT link mode Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7 Settings 1 Communi cating 0 Not commu nication Status after mode change Retained Statusat startup Cleared Write tim ing Written when there is a normal response to the token Relat
478. y depending on the connected load Refer to page 315 for information on service life according to the load Relay replacement NY 24W K IE Fujitsu Takamizawa Component Ltd Relays cannot be replaced by users ON Response Time 15 ms max OFF Response Time 15 ms max No of Circuits 16 points common 1 circuit Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between external terminals and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 2 000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max 96 mA 24 V DC 6 mA x No points ON som amp OUTIS 307 Specifications of Basic I O Units Terminal Connections Appendix A OOOO CJ1W OD211 Transistor Output Unit Terminal Block 16 Points Sinking Circuit Configuration 308 Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 10 2 to 26 4 V DC Maximum Load Current 0 5 A point 5 0 A Unit Maximum Inrush Current 4 0 A point 10 ms max Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Residual Voltage 1 5 V max ON Response Time 0 1 ms max OFF Response Time 0 8 ms max Insulation Resistance 20 MQ between the external terminals and the GR terminal 100 V DC Dielectric Strength 1 000 V AC b

SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1G CPU## Programmable Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents